Specifications BOOKLET 3

MEP and Finishing Works (PK4)
Booklet 3 of 7
Volume 3 – Technical Specifications
J17006-0100D – November 2018
Ritz Carlton Hotel & Residences J17006-0100D - Specification
Amman - Jordan November 2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01100 SUMMARY
01125 MULTIPLE CONTRACTS SUMMARY
01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
01330 SUBMITTALS PROCEDURES
01352 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01420 REFERENCES
01433 MOCKUPS
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01700 EXECUTION
01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01781 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01783 WARRANTIES
01820 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01831 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURE PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION
02240 DEWATERING
02300 EARTHWORK
02584 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND UTILITY STRUCTURES
02780 UNIT PAVERS
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03300 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03371 SHOTCRETE
03544 CEMENT-BASED SCREED
DIVISION 04 MASONRY
04200 UNIT MASONRY

04721 STONE BALUSTRADE
04862 ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER
DIVISION 05 METALS
05051 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
05530 GRATINGS
05700 ORNAMENTAL METAL
05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILING
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 1 of 5

RCHR-G-FD-TOC-GN-PMC-01 R03
© Copyright protected
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS
06105 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06615 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
06620 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07130 EPDM SHEET WATERPROOFING
07131 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
07136 STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
SYSTEM
07141 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07161 MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING
07180 TRAFFIC COATINGS
07190 WATER REPELLENTS
07210 BUILDING INSULATION
07418 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
07420 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
07422 EXTERIOR CLADDING:LIGHT WEIGHT CEMENT BOARD
07531 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
07710 ROOF SPECIALTIES
07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES
07841 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07842 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07920 JOINT SEALANTS
07950 EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08163 SLIDING ALUMINUM FRAMED GLASS DOORS
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08346 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
08380 TRAFFIC DOORS
08411 ALUMINIUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08463 SWINGING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08521 FIRE RATED ALUMINUM WINDOWS
08712 DOOR HARDWARE (SCHEDULED BY DESCRIBING PRODUCTS)
08800 GLAZING
08830 MIRRORS
08840 PLASTIC GLAZING
08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
08962 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
DIVISION 09 FINISHES
09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING

09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
09230 SOUND ABSORBING PLASTER SYSTEM
09250 GYPSUM BOARD
09310 CERAMIC TILE
09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09513 ACOUSTIC METAL PAN CEILING

09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

09680 CARPET
09810 ACOUSTICAL UNDERLAYMENT
09911 EXTERIOR PAINTING
09912 INTERIOR PAINTING
09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10213 FIXED LOUVERS
10221 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
10270 ACCESS FLOORING
10505 METAL LOCKERS
10520 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10605 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS
10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT
11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11460 UNIT KITCHENS
11521 PROJECTION SCREENS
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
12000 FURNITURE
12241 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
12484 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

13342 FABRICATED DOME STRUCTURES
13735 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEM (SSS)
13915 FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
13921 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, HORIZONTAL FIRE PUMPS
13956 FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
13967 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

15051 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING
15055 MOTORS
15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15071 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15081 DUCT INSULATION
15082 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
15083 PIPE INSULATION
15110 VALVES
15121 PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
15122 METERS AND GAGES
15181 HYDRONIC PIPING
15182 STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING

15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS

15186 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
15189 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
15191 FUEL OIL PIPING
15194 FUEL GAS PIPING
15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES
15441 WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
15444 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
15445 SEWAGE PUMPS
15446 SUMP PUMPS
15450 POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS
15465 COMPRESSED-AIR EQUIPMENT
15469 WATER SOFTENERS
15481 COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
15485 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
15486 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
15487 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
15490 SWIMMING POOL
15491 JACUZZI
15495 DECORATIVE FOUNTAIN
15513 CONDENSING BOILERS
15515 STEEL WATER-TUBE BOILERS
15520 FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT
15550 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
15585 DEAERATORS
15600 INDOOR POOL DEHUMIDIFIER
15672 AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
15684 ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS
15710 HEAT EXCHANGERS
15725 CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
15732 ROOFTOP UNITS
15734 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
15738 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15739 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
15752 HUMIDIFIERS
15761 AIR COILS
15763 FAN-COIL UNITS
15769 RADIANT HEATING PANELS
15785 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS
15815 METAL DUCTS
15816 HVAC CASINGS
15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES
15834 AIR CURTAINS
15836 AXIAL FANS
15837 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
15838 POWER VENTILATORS
15845 AIR TERMINALS
15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
15856 INTAKE AND RELIEF VENTILATORS
15861 AIR FILTERS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

16051 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING
16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES
16138 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAY
16139 CABLE TRAYS
16140 WIRING DEVICES
16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS
16264 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
16265 CENTRAL BATTERY INVERTER
16280 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
16289 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES
16441 SWITCHBOARDS
16442 PANELBOARDS
16450 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
16482 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING
16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
A1 APPENDIX A1 – PART 1
A1 APPENDIX A1 – PART 2
A2 APPENDIX A2
SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO FOH INTERIOR DECORATION WORKS
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS (SUPPLEMENT)

05521 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
05721 ORNAMENTAL RAILINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06615 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS (SUPPLEMENT)
08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES (SUPPLEMENT)
08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS (SUPPLEMENT)
08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES (SUPPLEMENT)
08712 DOOR HARDWARE (SUPPLEMENT)
08800 GLAZING (SUPPLEMENT)
08830 MIRRORS (SUPPLEMENT)
09250 GYPSUM BOARD (SUPPLEMENT)
09310 CERAMIC TILE (SUPPLEMENT)
09385 DIMENSION STONE TILE
09640 WOOD FLOORING
09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS (SUPPLEMENT)
09680 CARPET (SUPPLEMENT)
09720 WALL COVERINGS
09912 INTERIOR PAINTING (SUPPLEMENT)
10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS (SUPPLEMENT)
10221 DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS (SUPPLEMENT)
10280 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES (SUPPLEMENT)
11460 UNIT KITCHENS (SUPPLEMENT)
12000 FURNITURE (SUPPLEMENT)
13038 SAUNAS
13039 STEAM ROOMS

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other
Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Concrete base construction requirements.
3. Escutcheons.
4. Dielectric fittings.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Mechanical sleeve seals.
7. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in Division 15 piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. UPVC: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic
4. NP: Nylon plastic.
5. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
6. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
7. PPR: Polypropylene plastic
E. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

2. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 / Page 1 of 12

RCHR-G-FD-SPC-GN-ME-01 R01
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.
C. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment
and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Show
space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations
are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the following:
1. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem movement.
2. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
3. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties, including
space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
4. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
5. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
6. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
7. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
8. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during
construction.
9. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and
their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
10. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and inlets, light
fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, ceiling access panels and other
ceiling-mounted items.
11. Typical corridors cross sections to coordinate piping, ducting, cable trays, conduits, lighting,
smoke detectors, and sprinklers (if present) above false ceiling.
D. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each identification
material and device.
E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,

capacities, and ratings may be furnished at no additional cost to the Contract, provided such
proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services,
circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, equipment spaces and the like are increased accordingly. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must meet design
and commissioning requirements.
C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural
capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other trades and building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete
and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning before closing
in building.
E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and
controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanical items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section
"Access Doors."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices are
applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Central Plastics Co.
2. Dielectric Couplings:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Lochinvar Corp.
3. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.

b. Perfection Corp.
c. Victaulic Co. of America.
4. Flexible Connectors:
a. Flexicraft Industries.
b. General Rubber Corp.
c. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.
d. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
e. Mercer Rubber Co.
f. Metraflex Co.
g. Proco Products, Inc.
h. Uniflex, Inc.
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a. Calpico, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
c. Thunderline/Link-Seal.
6. Transition Fittings
a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
d. JCM Industries.
e. Smith-Blair, Inc.
f. Viking Johnson.
7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.
c. Metraflex Co.
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining methods.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 15 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2-mm (1/8-inch) maximum thickness,

unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 3.2 mm (1/8 inch) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10 percent lead
content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.

2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.
J. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel
bolts and nuts.
K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2. Followers: ASTM A 47M (ASTM A 47) malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to prevent
galvanic action and stop corrosion.
B. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-neck end
types and matching piping system materials.
C. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or ring

type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves,
phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 1035- or 2070-kPa (150- or
300-psig) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
threaded ends; and 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum working pressure at 107 deg C (225 deg F).
F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 2070-kPa (300-psig) minimum working pressure at 107 deg C
(225 deg F).
2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Fabricated from materials suitable for system fluid and that will provide flexible pipe
connections. Include 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working-pressure rating, unless higher working
pressure is indicated, and ends according to the following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Option for DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Grooved for use with keyed couplings.
B. Bronze-Hose, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, bronze, inner tubing covered with bronze wire
braid. Include copper-tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze welded to hose (for potable water
upto 4inch).
C. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Stainless-Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner

tubing covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include stainless-steel nipples or flanges, welded to
hose (for potable water larger than 4inch).
D. Stainless-Steel-Hose/Steel Pipe, Flexible Connectors: Corrugated, stainless-steel, inner tubing

covered with stainless-steel wire braid. Include steel nipples or flanges, welded to hose (for non-
potable water).
E. Rubber, Flexible Connectors: CR or EPDM elastomer rubber construction, with multiple plies of
NP fabric, molded and cured in hydraulic presses. Include 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working-
pressure rating at 104 deg C (220 deg F). Units may be straight or elbow type, unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with NSF 61 if used in potable water system.
2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.6-mm (0.0239-inch) minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to conceal
protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: One piece, with set screw or spring clamp and polished chrome-plated finish.
4. Stamped Steel: One piece, with set screw or spring clamp and chrome-plated finish.
5. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.8 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,

nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 34.5-MPa, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specify otherwise. Individual
Division 15 piping Sections specify unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size
pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install
piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and service
areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal
runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 25-mm clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions,
and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-plated
finish.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass or stamped steel; with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel with set-screw.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other

wet areas 50 mm above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.

3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 6-mm annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than DN150 (6-inch NPS).
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes DN150 (6-inch NPS) and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.
Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to
extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7 Section "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"
for materials.
5. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless otherwise
indicated.
O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm (6 inches) in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
P. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe
penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to Division 7 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.
T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in individual
piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Soldering Manual," Chapter "The
Soldering of Pipe and Tube"; or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type,
and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Assemble
joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and
parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
b. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661.
c. CPVC Piping: ASTM D 2846 and ASTM F 493.
d. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D 2672.
e. PVC Nonpressure Piping: ASTM D 2855.
f. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Procedure and solvent cement
according to ASTM D 3138.

9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth
or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657 procedures and manufacturer's written
instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment with DN50 (2-inch NPS) or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and
at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in
diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Engineer.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope.
F. Install flexible connectors on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to
equipment shafts if possible.
3.3 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Section "Painting" for paint materials, surface preparation, and application of paint.
B. Apply paint to exposed piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Interior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
2. Interior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
3. Interior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include finish coat over
enamel undercoat and primer.
4. Exterior, Ferrous Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats
over rust-inhibitive metal primer.

5. Exterior, Galvanized-Steel Piping: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish
coats over galvanized metal primer.
6. Exterior, Ferrous Supports: Use semigloss, acrylic-enamel finish. Include two finish coats
over rust-inhibitive metal primer.
C. Do not paint piping specialties with factory-applied finish.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or otherwise required, but not less than 100 mm
larger in both directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting
templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 21-MPa, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,
install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.
2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base,
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Install chillers on 150mm concrete pads with spring isolators.
7. Install boilers on 100mm concrete pads.
8. Install pumps on 100mm concrete pads with concrete inertia bases and spring isolators.
Concrete inertia bases are not required when pumps are mounted on a slab on grade.
9. Install air handling unit on 150mm concrete pads.
10. Other equipment to be installed on 100mm concrete pads.
3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to
support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.7 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, nonshrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 15050

SECTION 15051 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves.
2. Stack-sleeve fittings.
3. Sleeve-seal systems.
4. Sleeve-seal fittings.
5. Grout.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SLEEVES
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel
collar; zinc coated.
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,
with plain ends.
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing
flange for attaching to wooden forms.
2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
or approved equal
1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING 15051 / Page 1 of 5

2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring,
bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
or approved equal
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.
3. Metraflex Company (The).
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5. Proco Products, Inc.
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space
between piping and sleeve.
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required
to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
or approved equal
1. Presealed Systems.
B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match
piping OD.
2.5 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.6 CONCRETE CORE DRILLS
A. Core drills shall be executed in a manner to be fitted between the reinforcing bars as much as
possible to avoid cutting away any rebar.
B. Coring / field drilling of openings larger than 150mm diameter in structural concrete elements shall
not be permitted without prior Engineer’s approval to perform such field drilling.
C. In case of drilling two sleeves adjacent to each other, a minimum clear distance of 150mm or a
distance of 2 times the diameter of drill shall be left, whichever is larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide
1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are
constructed.
1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other

wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing.

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor
level.
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring
is specified.
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.
B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe
penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping
entries into building.
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve
ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-
seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.
3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150: Cast-iron wall sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves.
2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between
piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150 and Larger: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.

3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150 Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
b. Piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): Stack-sleeve fittings.

b. Piping [NPS 6 (DN 150)] Stack-sleeve fittings.
5. Interior Partitions:
a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6 (DN 150): PVC-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping [NPS 6 (DN 150)] and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic requirements for factory-installed and field-installed motors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor requirements
for motor-driven equipment.
2. Division 16 Sections for application of motors with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and
location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
B. Factory Test Reports: For specified tests.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
A. Comply with related electrical Standards, referred to in Division 16.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors shall be of the energy efficient design.
C. Motors shall be NEMA design B or design N or NY as applicable to IEC 60034-12, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for high torque applications.
A. Motors 0.746 kW (1 HP) and Larger: Three phase.
B. Motors smaller than 0.746 (1 HP): Single phase.
MOTORS 15055 / Page 1 of 4

C. Frequency Rating: 50 Hz, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
E. Service Factor: According to IEC 60034 and 60072, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start, accelerate,
and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with indicated
operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
G. Low Voltage Motors’ Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled type (TEFC) to NEMA MG1 or IC
411 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer.
H. Medium Voltage Motors’ Enclosures: Totally enclosed, air to air cooled (TEAAC) to NEMA MG1
or IC 611 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable or totally enclosed, water to air cooled (TEWAC) to NEMA
MG1 or IC 817 to IEC 60034-6 as applicable. Enclosure type shall be as recommended by
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Degree of Protection (IP): Motors shall be IP55 to IEC 60529 for outdoor use and IP54 to IEC 60529
for indoor motors as a minimum.
J. Temperature Rise: Shall not exceed 80 deg. C based on 50 deg. C (122 deg. F) ambient temperature,
unless otherwise indicated or recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer for
specific applications such as: overhead cranes or submersible pumps, where temperature rise not
exceeding 105 deg. C may be used.
K. Motors that utilize a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty to NEMA MG1 or
Class I to IEC 60034-18-41 and shall be classified as energy efficiency to NEMA MG1 or high
efficiency class IE2 to IEC 60034-30.
L. Low Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection.
M. Medium Voltage Motors Terminal Boxes: Shall have the same motor’s degree of protection and
shall be designed for differential CT's and/or surge protection (surge arrestor and surge capacitor).
Enough space shall be provided below main terminal box for cable connection.
N. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding protection
for all low voltage motors rated 50 HP and above and for all low voltage VFD motors.
O. Include built-in terminal blocks and built in thermistors PTC100 / RTD200 for winding and bearing
protection for all medium voltage motors.
P. The contractor is responsible for coordination between the motor and motor controller suppliers to
ensure compatibility, proper starting and satisfactory operation.
2.2 THREE PHASE MOTORS
A. Description: IEC 60034 and 60072, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1 or IEC Standards.

2. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency to NEMA MG1 or class IE3 to IEC 60034-30
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate
winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air-conditioned spaces
and Class F for motors located outside or in non air-conditioned spaces.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for indicated
controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control method.
Maximum permissible starting current shall be 5 times the Full Load Current (FLC).
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class F insulation.
3. Insulation: Class F.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to IEC requirements for thermally
protected motors.
D. Rugged-Duty Motors: Where indicated, motors are totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service
factor, greased bearings, integral condensate drains, and capped relief vents. Windings are insulated
with nonhygroscopic material. External finish is chemical-resistant paint over corrosion-resistant
primer.
E. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to IEC:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.

2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.
2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting torque
and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
4. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, Class B for motors located in air-conditioned spaces
and Class F for motors located outside or in non air-conditioned spaces.
5. Energy-Efficient Design: Premium efficiency – Class “eff1”, unless otherwise indicated.
Classification in accordance with the definition set by the “European Commission of Electric
Machinery and Power Electronics Manufacturers”.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 0.037 kW (1/20 hp).
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens power
supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature
rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when motor temperature
returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on
motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install power feeders to motors in raceways. Locate raceways close to motor terminal box and use
liquidtight flex for final connection to motor terminal box.
E. Motors located in classified areas shall be installed in accordance with IEC recommendations
for“Hazardous (classified) Locations”.
3.2 COMMISSIONING
A. Check operating motors for unusual conditions during normal operation. Coordinate with the
commissioning of the equipment for which the motor is a part.
B. Take measurements and prepare a log of voltage, current, frequency, and power.
C. Report unusual conditions.
D. Report current deficiencies of field-installed units.

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Sup-
ports."
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design channel support systems for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B. Design heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of supporting com-
bined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
C. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
D. Design and obtain approval from Engineer for seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and
equipment.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-hanger
shield insert indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for multiple piping supports
and trapeze hangers. Include seismic and design calculations justifying forces, sizes, embedments
and characteristics of components and fabrication details.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.
A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15060 / Page 1 of 8

B. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each
multiple pipe support, trapeze, and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in provid-
ing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of hangers, supports and seismic restraints that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering prod-

ucts that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Pipe Hangers:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
d. Erico-Caddy.
e. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Grinnell Corp.; Power-Strut Unit.
c. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
d. Unistrut Corp.
e. Erico-Caddy.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.

b. Pipe Shields, Inc.
c. Value Engineered Products, Inc.
d. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
4. Power-Driven, Mechanical-Anchor Expansion Shield, Fastener Systems:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components: MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support
types.
1. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-applied
finish.
2. Copper Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems: MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
2. Copper Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct
contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength insulation, en-

cased in sheet metal shield.
1. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate
with vapor barrier.
2. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
3. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
4. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
5. Insert Length: Extend 50 mm beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropri-
ate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry, hy-
draulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated
stationary pipes, DN15 to DN750 (NPS 1/2 to NPS 30).
2. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, DN100 to DN900 (NPS 4 to
NPS 36), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt
to retain pipe.

3. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
DN65 to DN900 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36), if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe
base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
4. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, DN25 to DN750 (NPS 1 to
NPS 30), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
5. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, DN65 to DN500
(NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
6. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN1050 (NPS 2 to
NPS 42), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but
vertical adjustment is not necessary.
7. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN600 (NPS 2 to
NPS 24), if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
8. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, DN50 to DN750
(NPS 2 to NPS 30), if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in
addition to expansion and contraction.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Spec-
ification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to DN500
(NPS 3/4to NPS 20).
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, DN20 to
DN500 (NPS 3/4to NPS 20), if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
2. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of build-
ing attachments.
3. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 49 to 232 deg C (120 to 450 deg F) piping
installations.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Speci-
fication Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe
hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams
for heavy loads.
5. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-
beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
6. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural
steel.
7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 340 kg (750 lb).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 675 kg (1500 lb).
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 1350 kg (3000 lb).

8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
9. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear hori-
zontal movement where head room is limited.
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Specifi-
cation Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe, 360-degree insert of high-
density, 690-kPa (100-psi) minimum compressive-strength, water-repellent-treated calcium
silicate, same thickness as adjoining insulation with vapor barrier and encased in 360-degree
sheet metal shield.
H. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 32
mm.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion
in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor
to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit varia-
bility factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze
support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from
one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary
stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include
the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping
and support together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hang-
ers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1.
D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Space attachments
within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at con-
centrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in
direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and
install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
E. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners ac-
cording to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
F. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. In-
stall fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other
accessories.
H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems,
to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe
deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through in-
sulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is indi-
cated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span arc of 180 degrees.
a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution

plate for pipe DN100 (NPS 4) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. DN8 to DN90 (NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2): 300 mm (12 inches) long and 1.22 mm (0.048
inch) thick.
b. DN100 (NPS 4): 300 mm long and 1.52 mm (0.06 inch) thick.
c. DN125 and DN150 (NPS 5 and NPS 6): 450 mm (18 inches) long and 1.52 mm (0.06
inch) thick.
d. DN200 to DN350 (NPS 8 to NPS 14): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 1.91 mm (0.075
inch) thick.
e. DN400 to DN600 (NPS 16 to NPS 24): 600 mm (24 inches) long and 2.67 mm (0.105
inch) thick.
5. Pipes DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
L. Provide cork and rubber isolation pad between clamp rings and floor structure.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support equipment
above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment sup-
ports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot be
shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion re-
sistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of
welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indi-
cated slope of pipe.
B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 40 mm (1-1/2 inches).
3.6 PAINTING

A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15071 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes vibration isolators, vibration isolation bases, vibration isolation roof curbs,
and seismic restraints and snubbers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Indicate types, styles, materials, and finishes for each type of isolator specified.
Include load deflection curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show designs and calculations, certified by a professional engineer, for the
following:
1. Design Calculations: Calculations for selection of vibration isolators, design of vibration

isolation bases, and selection of seismic restraints.
2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments
to the structure and to the supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and
base weights.
3. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of restraints and snubbers.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of vibration isolation bases and seismic restraints that are similar to those
B. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be considered in selection of vibration and seismic

restraints. All selection shall be certified by manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that all specified equipment
will withstand seismic forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculations.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROLS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 15071 / Page 1 of 9

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
their installation requirements.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Project seismic zone is 2A with a zone factor of 0.15.
B. Building Importance Factor: 1.0.
1.6 SEISMIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: The requirements for seismic protection measures described in this section
shall be applied to the mechanical equipment and systems listed below.
B. Mechanical Equipment: Mechanical equipment to be seismically protected shall include the

following items to the extent required on the Drawings or in other Sections of the Specification:
1. Storage tanks for oil and water.

2. Water, oil and gas piping.
3. Expansion air separator tanks.
4. Valves and fittings for piping.
5. Heat exchangers.
6. Water chiller units.
7. Air and refrigerant compressors.
8. Refrigerant piping.
9. Air handling units.
10. Pumps with motors.
11. Ducts.
12. Exhaust and return fans.
C. Mechanical Systems: The following mechanical systems shall be installed as required on the
drawings and other Sections of the Specification and shall be seismically protected in accordance
with this Specification:
1. All Piping Inside the Building Except as Specifically Stated Below Under "Items Not
Covered By This Section".
2. Fuel piping outside of buildings.
3. All water supply systems.
4. Storm and sanitary sewer systems.
5. Condenser water piping outside the building.
6. Fuel storage tanks.
7. Water storage tanks.
D. Contractor Designed Bracing: The Contractor shall design the bracing in accordance with
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Design shall be performed by a certified engineer. Resistance
to lateral forces induced by earthquakes shall be accomplished without consideration of friction
resulting from gravity loads.
E. Items Not Covered By This Section: Fire Protection Systems. Seismic protection of piping for fire
protection systems shall be installed as specified in Division 13.
F. Items Requiring No Seismic Restraints: Seismic restraints are not required for the following items:

1. Gas piping less than 25 mm inside diameter.

2. Piping in mechanical equipment rooms less than 32 mm inside diameter.
3. All other piping less than 64 mm inside diameter.
4. Rectangular air handling ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
5. Round air handling ducts less than 711 mm in diameter.
6. Piping suspended by individual hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of pipe to
the bottom of the supporting structural member where the hanger is attached. All hangers
shall meet the length requirements. If the length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in
the run, the entire run shall be braced.
7. Ducts suspended by hangers 1000 mm or less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom
of the supporting structural member. All hangers shall meet the length requirements. If the
length requirement is exceeded by one hanger in the run, the entire run shall be braced.
8. Interior piping and ducts not listed above shall be seismically protected in accordance with
the provisions of this Specification.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping and vibration isolation bases. Cast anchor-
bolt inserts into base. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are
specified in Division 7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. B-Line Systems, Inc.
3. California Dynamics Corp.
4. Greene Rubber Co.
5. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
6. King, H.A., Ltd.
7. Mason Industries, Inc.
8. Rubatex Corp.
9. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
10. Vibration Isolation Co., Inc.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Noise Criteria:
1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed
following NC levels:

Space Guestrooms Public Back-of-House
Maximum NC
NC / RC 30 NC / RC 35 NC / RC 40
or RC Level
Hertz (Hz) NC / RC dB NC / RC dB NC / RC dB
31.5 -/55 -/60 -/65

63 57/50 60/55 64/60
125 47/45 53/50 57/55
250 41/40 46/45 51/50
500 35/35 40/40 45/45
1000 31/30 36/35 41/40
2000 29/25 34/30 39/35
4000 28/20 33/25 38/30
8000 27/- 32/- 37/-
2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, the Contractor shall
select equipment such that the foregoing noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and
ASHRAE requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with
ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook 2009, Chapter 8, Sound and Vibration.
3. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate for the
variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to occupancy and
design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of sound absorbing
material, such as furniture. This allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room
attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room
and sound pressure level in room.
4. In the absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels
0.914 m from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.
B. Machinery Airborne Sound Level Criteria: For each piece of machinery in the human work
environment, the maximum airborne sound levels shall not exceed 84 dB A-weighted scale,
continuous or intermittent, or 140 dB peak sound pressure-level, impact or impulse, noise. Unless
otherwise specified the maximum equipment airborne sound power level in dB shall not exceed the
following data:
Maximum Sound Power Level (dB)

Octave Band Level Center Frequency (Hz)
Equipment
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Air Handling Unit 94 90 89 89 89 84 82 79
Make-Up Air Fan 91 91 80 84 82 76 71 65
Condensing Unit 100 96 90 89 86 80 75 72
Chiller 98 98 96 95 93 94 88 81
Pump 85 80 82 82 80 77 74 72
Fan 55 50 48 47 48 46 42 37
C. Allowable Vibration Tolerances for Rotating, Non-reciprocating Equipment: Not to exceed a self-
excited vibration maximum velocity of 5 mm per second RMS, filter in, when measured with a

vibration meter on bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal, and axial directions or measured
at equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed. Measurements for internally isolated fans and
motors may be made at the mounting feet.
D. Materials: Rubber shall be natural rubber. Elastomer shall be chloroprene. Shore A durometer
measurement of both materials shall range between 40 and 60. Inorganic materials such as
precompressed, high-density, fibrous glass encased in a resilient moisture-impervious membrane
may be used in lieu of specified natural rubber and elastomers. Where this substitution is made,
specified deflections shall be modified by the manufacturing source to accommodate physical
characteristics of inorganic materials and to provide equal or better vibration isolation. Weather-
exposed metal vibration-isolator parts shall be corrosion protected. Springs shall be chloroprene
coated.
2.22.3 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Isolator Pads: Oil and water resistant and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of the
equipment supported.
1. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or multiple layers
and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness to provide
uniform loading over the pad area.
2. Fiberglass or Cork Isolator Pads: Molded cork or glass fiber not less than 25 mm thick and
precompressed through 10 compression cycles at 3 times the rated load.
3. Load Range: From 69 to 345 kPa (10 to 50 psig) and a deflection not less than 2 mm per
25 mm of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 345 kPa (50 psig).
B. Rubber Isolator Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene
isolator elements, with encapsulated top- and baseplates. Factory-drilled and tapped top plate for
bolted equipment mounting. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolted connection to structure. Color-
code to indicate capacity range.
C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring-type isolators.
1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at
rated load.
2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness.
4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber
isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Size baseplates to limit floor loading to 690
kPa (100 psig).
6. Top Plates: Provide threaded studs for fastening and leveling equipment.
7. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Vertically restrained, freestanding, laterally stable, steel open-spring-
type isolators.
1. Housing: Welded steel with resilient vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension due to
wind loads or when weight is removed. Factory-drilled baseplate for bolting to structure and
bonded to a 6-mm thick, rubber isolator pad attached to the baseplate underside. Provide
adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt.
rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness.

6. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components on isolators for interior use. Hot-dip
galvanized for metal components on isolators for exterior use.
E. Rubber Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene isolator
elements bonded to formed-steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code
to indicate capacity range.
F. Spring Hangers: Combination spring and elastomeric hanger with coil spring and elastomeric insert
in compression.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees
of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
rated load.
4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of the rated vertical stiffness.
6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
2.32.4 SEISMIC CONTROLS
A. Thrust Restraints: Combination spring and elastomeric restraints with coil spring and elastomeric
insert in compression. Factory set for thrust.
1. Frame: Formed steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for 30 degrees
of angular hanger rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
rated load.
4. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
5. Finishes: Baked enamel for metal components. Color-code to indicate capacity range.
B. Manufactured Seismic Snubbers: All-directional, double-acting snubbers.
1. Construction: Interlocking steel members restrained by a 19-mm thick, replaceable, shock-

absorbing neoprene insert. Maintain 3-mm clearance in all directions between rigid and
resilient surfaces.
C. Fabricated Seismic Snubbers: Welded structural-steel shapes designed and fabricated to restrain
equipment or vibration isolation bases from excessive movement during a seismic event. Design to
resist gravity forces.
1. Construction: Welded steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36).

2. Resilient Components: 19-mm thick, replaceable, shock-absorbing neoprene insert.
D. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made of steel assemblies
that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
E. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts
with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488/E 488M.

2.42.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION BASES
A. Fabricated Steel Bases: Structural-steel bases and rails designed and fabricated by the isolation
equipment manufacturer. Include equipment static loadings, power transmission, component
misalignment, and cantilever loadings.
1. Fabricate bases to shapes required, with welded structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars
conforming to ASTM A 36M (ASTM A 36). Include support brackets to anchor base to
isolation units. Include prelocated equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases
or rails.
2. Design and fabricate bases to result in the lowest possible mounting height with not less than
25-mm clearance above the floor.
3. Concrete-Filled Inertia Bases: Weld reinforcing bars to the structural frame. Pour concrete
into base with relocated equipment anchor bolts.
4. Weld steel angles on frame for outrigger isolation mountings, and provide for anchor bolts
and equipment support.
5. Configure inertia bases to accommodate equipment supported.
6. Pump Bases: Size to support pump and piping elbows.
7. Factory Finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.
2.52.6 VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF CURBS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb designed to
resiliently support roof-mounted equipment and to withstand 56-m/s (125-mph) wind impinging
laterally against the side of the equipment. Design restraints to meet seismic requirements.
B. Components: Upper support frame; lower support assembly; freestanding, unhoused, laterally
stable steel springs; vertical and horizontal restraints.
1. Lower Support Assembly: Provide a means of attachment to the building structure and
include a wood nailer stripe for attachment of roof material and 50 mm of rigid insulation on
the inside of the assembly.
2. Spring Isolators: As indicated or scheduled. Include adjustment bolt to permit leveling of
equipment after installation. Attach to lower assembly with a rubber isolation pad. Locate
spring isolators so they are accessible for adjustment at any time during the life of the
installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof.
3. Water Seal: Elastomeric seal conforming to UL Class A roofing materials, attached to the
upper support frame, extending down past the wood nailer of the lower support assembly,
and counterflashed over the roof materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for
compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install and anchor vibration-, sound-, and seismic-control products according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Anchor interior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator
baseplates to structural floors as required.
C. Anchor exterior mounts, isolators, hangers, and snubbers to vibration isolation bases. Bolt isolator
baseplates to structural supports as required.
D. Fill concrete inertia bases, after installing base frame, with 21-MPa concrete, and trowel to a smooth,
hard finish. Cast-in-place concrete is specified in Division 3.
E. Install pipe connectors at connections for equipment supported on vibration isolators.
3.3 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Vibration Isolation Bases: Mount equipment on structural-steel bases or concrete inertia bases.
B. Snubbers: Install the required number of seismic snubbers on each spring-mounted piece of
equipment. Locate snubbers as close as possible to the vibration isolators and bolt to supporting
structure.
C. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At trapeze anchor locations,
shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent
equipment or building structure.
D. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with ductile-iron clamps to hanger
rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze.
Requirements apply equally to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.
E. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal
operations.
B. Adjust thrust restraints for a maximum of 6 mm of movement at start and stop.
C. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating weight.
D. Adjust air spring leveling mechanism.
E. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
F. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
G. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
H. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations to resist

seismic forces.
I. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-control devices.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

SECTION 15075 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
B. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each identification mate-
rial and device.
C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Reproduce on standard-size bond paper. Tabulate valve
number, piping system, system abbreviation as shown on tag, room or space location of valve, and
variations for identification. Mark valves intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
Furnish copies for maintenance manuals specified in Division 1 aside from mounted copies.
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size,
length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces
where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 15 Sections. If more
than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Contractor's option.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal permanently fastened to equipment with data engraved or stamped.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 / Page 1 of 5

1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and
power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data.
2. Location: Accessible and visible.
C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, color-coded, pressure-sensi-

tive, vinyl type with permanent adhesive.
D. Pipes, Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each
location.
E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Engineer.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both direc-
tions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
F. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:
1. Green: Cold-air supply.

2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Hazardous Material Exhausts: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
5. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and exhaust;
duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
G. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl tape, at

least 0.08 mm thick.
1. Width: 40 mm on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 150 mm; 65 mm for larger
pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 6-mm letters for piping system abbreviation and 13-mm
sequenced numbers. Include 4-mm hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.8-mm thick, polished brass, or aluminum.

2. Size: 40-mm diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain; beaded chain; or S-hooks.
J. Access Panel Markers: 2-mm thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and
numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 3-mm center hole for attachment.
K. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for each
page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness glass.
L. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-lam-

inate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine sub-
core, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for me-
chanical fastening.
1. Engraving: Engraver's standard letter style, of sizes and with terms to match equipment
identification.
2. Thickness: 3 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

M. Plastic Equipment Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
4. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet criteria above.
5. Hazardous Equipment: Use colors and designs recommended by ASME A13.1.
6. Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible. Include the following:
a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.
c. Design capacity.
d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, and
speed.
7. Size: 65 by 100 mm for control devices, dampers, and valves; 115 by 150 mm for equipment.
N. Plasticized Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with mat finish suitable for writing.
1. Size: 85 by 145 mm.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommets and wire.
3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or DO NOT
OPERATE.
O. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in mechani-
cal identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters, and terms indi-
cated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of
same name are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow.
B. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes smaller than 150 mm OD by following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 20 mm wide,
lapped a minimum of 40 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference
of pipe.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes 150 mm in diameter and larger by following method:
1. Taped to pipe or insulation with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 40 mm wide,
lapped a minimum of 75 mm at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference
of pipe.
D. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms;
accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, ceilings, and plenums; and exterior noncon-
cealed locations according to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark
each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 6-m intervals along each run.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers.
3.2 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-
fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and
lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections
of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with cap-
tions similar to those indicated in the following:
C. Tag Material: Brass or aluminum.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 40 mm, round.

2. Hot Water: 40 mm, round.
3. Fire Protection: 40 mm, round.
4. Sprinkler: 40 mm, round.
5. Gas: 40 mm, round.
6. Steam: 40 mm, round.
E. Tag Color: According to the following:

1. Cold Water: Blue.
2. Hot Water: Yellow.
3. Fire Protection: Red.
4. Sprinkler: Red.
5. Gas: Yellow.
6. Steam: White.
F. Letter Color: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: Black.

2. Hot Water: Black.
3. Fire Protection: White.
4. Sprinkler: White.
5. Gas: Black.
6. Steam: Black.
G. Install mounted valve schedule in each major equipment room.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SIGNS AND MARKERS
A. Install engraved plastic-laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of mechan-
ical equipment. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas
outlets.
2. Fire department hose valves and hose stations.
3. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.
4. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills, and absorption units.
5. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
6. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and similar equip-
ment.
7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
8. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units, VAV boxes, fan coil units, controls
and components.
9. Tanks and pressure vessels.
10. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar equipment.
B. Plasticized Tags: Install within concealed space, to reduce amount of text in exposed sign outside
concealment, if equipment to be identified is concealed above acoustical ceiling or similar conceal-
ment.
1. Identify operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in unoccupied spaces,
including machine rooms, by installing plasticized tags.
C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; show-
ing service and direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum
intervals of 15 m in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling
system.
A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.

SECTION 15081 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes semirigid and flexible duct, plenum, and breeching insulation; insulating
cements; field-applied jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and

requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
3. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
4. Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liner.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless-
steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220. Adhesives,

coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers,
shall have a maximum flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25 and a smoke-developed classification
(SDC) of 50. Flame-contributed classification (FCC) shall be as specified for the application. These
maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.
C. Adhesives, coatings, and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state. Adhesives, coatings,
and sealants shall have published or certified temperature ratings suitable for the entire range of
working temperatures normal for the surfaces to which they are to be applied.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied,
if any), for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:
1. Removable insulation sections at access panels.

2. Application of field-applied jackets.
3. Applications at linkages for control devices.
DUCT INSULATION 15081 / Page 1 of 10

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample material.
1. Manufacturer's Color Charts: Show the full range of colors available for each type of field-
applied finish material indicated.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
E. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully a craft training program certified
by an agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those specified

in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and sealer
and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed rating

of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed rating
of 150 or less.
C. Mockups: Before installing insulation, build mockups for each type of insulation and finish listed
below to demonstrate quality of insulation application and finishes. Build mockups according to
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Include the following mockups:
a. One 3-m section of rectangular straight duct.

b. One 90-degree square elbow and one 90-degree radius elbow.
c. One branch takeoff.
d. One transition fitting.
e. Four support hangers.
2. Build mockups with cutaway sections to allow observation of application details for
insulation materials, mastics, attachments, and jackets.
3. Build mockups in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Engineer.
4. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting insulation application.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging
the completed Work.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM
or other approved specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin on
segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Manson.
b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
d. Knauf FiberGlass GmbH.
e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
f. Schuller International, Inc.
g. St. Gobain.
2. Calcium Silicate Insulation:
a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

b. Pabco.
c. Schuller International, Inc.
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft
paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 48kg/m3.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density : 24kg/m3.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type II.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, maximum moisture vapor transmission 0.00 perms, (measured
before factory application or installation), minimum puncture resistance 50 Beach units on all
surfaces. Minimum tensile strength, 6.1 N/mm width. Jackets used on insulation exposed in
finished areas shall have white finish suitable for painting without sizing.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft paper
and aluminum foil (FSK).
C. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with
ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire
surface in contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation and 0.8
mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.
2. Moisture Barrier: 0.025-mm thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.
D. Stainless-Steel Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets of stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666,
Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming to
indicated sizes.

2. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.
2.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape. Woven
glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 270 g/sq. m.
1. Tape Width: 100 mm.
B. Bands: 19 mm wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.5 mm thick.

2. Galvanized Steel: 0.13 mm thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.18 mm thick.
4. Brass: 0.25 mm thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.13 mm thick.
C. Wire: 2.0-mm, nickel-copper alloy; 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 1.6-mm, soft-
annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation
thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 45 kg
for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use accessories
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously
through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends
with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to

less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder
mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair punctures, tears,
and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with outward
clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and partitions,
except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper sleeves for
fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at top
of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation ends
with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and anchor
pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square foot,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of
duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each way,
and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.

5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 50 mm
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment

with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing
as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 50 mm on longitudinal seams and end joints. Secure
with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 450 mm o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with
150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides
of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated to
receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor pins
and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100 percent
coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, along longitudinal centerline of
duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm. Space 400 mm o.c. each way,
and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 50 mm
from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation segment
with 13-mm staples, 25 mm o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive tape having same facing
as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface with
150-mm wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides
of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 150 mm o.c.
3.5 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation according to the manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Secure single layer of insulation to duct with stainless-steel bands. Tighten bands without
deforming the insulation material.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm. Secure
inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire. Secure outer layer with
stainless-steel bands.

3. On exposed applications, without metal jacket, finish insulation with a skim coat of mineral-
fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed insulation. When dry, apply flood coat
of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25
mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to
achieve smooth finish.
3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-
applied jackets.
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 50-mm overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 1.6-mm thick coats of jacket manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.7 FINISHES
A. Glass-Cloth Jacketed Insulation: Paint insulation finished with glass-cloth jacket as specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
C. Color: Final color as selected by Engineer. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection
of the completed Work.
3.8 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.

2. Indoor exposed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
3. Indoor concealed exhaust air ductwork connected to recovery AHUs.
4. Indoor exposed exhaust air ductwork connected to recovery AHUs.
5. Outdoor exposed supply and return ductwork.
6. Outdoor exposed exhaust ductwork connected to recovery AHUs.
7. Indoor exposed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
8. Indoor concealed range-hood exhaust ductwork.
9. Indoor exposed oven and dishwasher exhaust ductwork.
10. Indoor concealed oven and dishwasher ductwork.
11. Boiler breeching exhaust pipe.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
1. Fibrous-glass ducts.
2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
3. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections.
5. Vibration-control devices.
6. Testing agency labels and stamps.
7. Nameplates and data plates.
3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Supply- and treated Outside-air ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber blanket.

2. Thickness: 25 mm.
3. Number of Layers: One.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; aluminum jacket where exposed to
view or in mechanical rooms.
5. Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
B. Service: Return- and Exhaust-air ducts.

C. Service: Untreated Outside-air ducts.

5. Vapor Retarder Required: No.
D. Service: Rectangular, range-hood exhaust ducts.
1. Material: Calcium silicate.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Stainless steel jacket. Provide a minimum 2 hour fire rated duct
enclosure from the point where the duct exits the cooking area (wall or ceiling) and to the
point where the duct exits the building (exterior wall or roof).
E. Service: Rectangular, dishwasher exhaust ducts.
1. Material: Mineral-fiber board.

view.
3.10 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Service: Supply-air ducts.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: Aluminum.
a. Aluminum Thickness: 0.8 mm.

b. Corrugation Dimension: 64 by 16 mm.
B. Service: Return-air ducts.


3.11 BOILER BREECHING AND CONNECTOR APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Exposed.

3. Number of Layers: Two.

B. Service: Concealed.

3. Number of Layers: Two.


SECTION 15082 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes blanket, board, and block insulation; insulating cements; field-applied jackets;
accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation materials and application for ducts and
plenums.
2. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. Field application for each equipment type.

2. Removable insulation sections at access panels.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and field-applied jacket. Identify each Sample, describing
product and intended use. Submit 300-mm square sections of each sample material.
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, interpreting, and
certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and
jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, NFPA 225, or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and
EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15082 / Page 1 of 9

agency.

of 50 or less.
of 150 or less.
a. One chilled-water centrifugal pump.

b. One small tank, vessel or heat exchanger.
c. One balancing or pressure regulating valve.
the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for insulation application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.

g. St. Gobain.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.
4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:
a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

b. Pabco.
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 48 kg/m3.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

2. Density: 24 kg/m3.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: ≤ 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density : 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction : Up to 27 ∆L for 20mm thick insulation.
D. Cellular-Glass Insulation: Inorganic, foamed or cellulated glass, annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed
cells, incombustible.
1. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

2. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.
3. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

E. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation: Block insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure.

Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type II, Grade 1.
F. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible,

inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant, all purpose, kraft paper
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll stock ready for shop or field
cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
D. Aluminum Jacket: Deep corrugated sheets manufactured from aluminum alloy complying with
ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), and having an integrally bonded moisture barrier over entire
surface in contact with insulation.
1. Finish and Thickness: Stucco embossed finish, 0.6 mm thick for indoor installation and 0.8
mm for outdoor installation unless otherwise noted.

D. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for insulation
thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface

temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of 45 kg
for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length of
equipment.
for each equipment system.
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation continuously
through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal ends
with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.

L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing insulation to

less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on equipment scheduled to receive vapor retarders. Overlap insulation
facing at seams and seal with vapor-retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing
as insulation. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-
retarder seal.
O. Insulate the following indoor equipment:
1. Chilled-water air separators.

2. Chilled-water expansion tanks.
3. Chilled-water centrifugal pump housings.
4. Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.
5. Heating hot-water and steam air separators.
6. Heating hot-water expansion tanks.
7. Heating hot-water heat exchangers.
8. Steam-to-water converters, not factory insulated.
9. Condensate receivers, not factory insulated.
10. Deaerators, not factory insulated.
11. Steam flash tanks.
12. Boiler feed unit tanks.
13. Chilled water, steam and hot water valves and accessories.
P. Insulate the following outdoor equipment:
1. Aboveground water storage tanks.
Q. Omit insulation from the following:
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
3.4 INDOOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blankets, Board, and Block Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive
and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates for 100 percent
coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to the equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joint. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesive-attached anchor pins and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as
follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. On tank and vessel, 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c. in
both directions.
c. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
d. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and dome heads of tanks and
vessels.
5. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing
7. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel bands.
8. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
9. Apply insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors and other elements that
require frequent removal for service.
10. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Tanks and Vessels: Apply insulation over
entire surface of tanks and vessels according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-
applied jackets.
adhesive.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
vapor-retarder mastic.
C. PVC Jackets: Apply jacket with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels for
horizontal applications. Secure and seal seams and end joints with manufacturer's welding adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along the seam and joint edge.
D. Aluminum Jackets: Secure jackets according to jacket manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect pumps and tanks randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove insulation and covers from two chilled-water pumps or one percent of chilled-water
pumps, whichever is greater.
3. Remove insulation and covers from two small tanks or one percent of small tanks, whichever
is greater.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance

with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these
Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on pumps and tanks uncovered for inspection according to these
Specifications.
3.8 EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of this
Section.
3.9 INTERIOR TANK AND VESSEL INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Equipment: Chilled-water air separators and compression tanks.
1. Operating Temperature: 2 to 24 deg C (35 to 75 deg F).

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric
3. Insulation Thickness: 25mm
4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC.
6. Finish: None.
B. Equipment: Domestic hot-water storage tanks, not factory insulated.

2. Insulation Material: Cellular glass, with jacket



6. Finish: None.
C. Equipment: Heating hot-water and steam air separators and compression tanks.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber blanket.


6. Finish: None.
D. Equipment: Heating hot-water heat exchangers, steam-to-water converters, and deaerators.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium silicate.


6. Finish: None.

SECTION 15083 - PIPE INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed, rigid and flexible pipe insulation; insulating cements; field-applied
jackets; accessories and attachments; and sealing compounds.
1. Division 2 Section "Hydronic Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground

piping outside the building.
2. Division 2 Section "Steam Distribution" for loose-fill pipe insulation in underground piping
outside the building.
3. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and
requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
4. Division 15 Section "Duct Insulation" for insulation for ducts and plenums.
5. Division 15 Section "Equipment Insulation" for insulation materials and application for
pumps, tanks, hydronic specialties, and other equipment.
6. Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection
saddles.
A. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack
surfaces to which they are applied in either the wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless-
steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free.
B. Thermal-insulation system materials shall be noncombustible, as defined by NFPA 220. Adhesives,

coatings, sealants, facings, jackets, and thermal-insulation materials, except cellular elastomers,
shall have a flame-spread classification (FSC) of 25, and a smoke-developed classification (SDC)
of 50. These maximum values shall be determined in accordance with ASTM E 84 and NFPA 255.
Coatings and sealants shall be nonflammable in their wet state.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1. Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at pipe hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
2. Attachment and covering of heat trace inside insulation.
3. Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
PIPE INSULATION 15083 / Page 1 of 15
4. Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
5. Removable insulation at piping specialties and equipment connections.
C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket. Identify each Sample, describing product and
intended use. Submit Samples in the following sizes:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 300 mm square.
3. Jacket Materials: 300 mm long by DN50 (NPS 2).
D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to Engineer, indicating,
interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments,
cements, and jackets with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed a craft training
program certified by an agency acceptable to Engineer.

in this Section according to ASTM E 84, UL-723, NFPA 225 or ANSI A.2.5, by a testing and
agency.

of 50 or less.
of 150 or less.
a. One 3-m section of DN50 (NPS 2) straight pipe.

b. One 90-degree elbow.
c. One tee fitting.
d. One DN50 (NPS 2) valve.
e. Four support hangers, including hanger shield and insert.
f. One strainer with removable portion of insulation.
g. One reducer.


the completed Work.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 15
Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of steam or electric heat tracing.
1.8 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing and
testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

b. Fiberglass Ltd.
c. Johns-Manville.
g. St. Gobain.
2. Cellular-Glass Insulation:
a. Pittsburgh-Corning Corp.
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

b. Rubatex Corp.
4. Closed-Cell Phenolic-Foam Insulation:

a. Kooltherm Insulation Products, Ltd.

b. Pabco.
6. Sealant, mastic coating and adhesives:
a. Foster Product Corporation.
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:
1. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, all-
purpose, vapor-retarder FSK jacket.
a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

b. Density: 64 kg/m3.
2. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
3. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and grades:
a. Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass-fiber insulation.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor

applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
5. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 195.
6. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C 196.
7. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449M/C 449.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.

Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Adhesive: Solvent base, contact adhesive, as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer.
2. Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
3. Thermal Conductivity: ≤ 0.038 W/mK at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).
4. Density: 65 to 80 kg/m3.
5. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.15 perm-inch.
6. Noise Reduction up to 27 ∆L for 20 mm thick insulation.
C. Calcium Silicate Insulation: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous

calcium silicate with a nonasbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
D. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used
in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

A. General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant all purpose, kraft paper
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 0.5 mm thick; roll stock ready for shop or field
cutting and forming.

2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 0.5-mm thick,
high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers,
end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories
for the disabled.
E. Aluminum Jacket: Aluminum roll stock, ready for shop or field cutting and forming to indicated
sizes. Comply with ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), 3003 alloy, H-14 temper.
1. Finish and Thickness: Smooth finish, 0.25 mm thick.

3. Elbows: Preformed, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows; same material, finish,
and thickness as jacket.
F. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316; 2.5 mm thick; and roll stock ready for shop
or field cutting and forming to indicated sizes.

2. Elbows: Gore type, for 45- and 90-degree elbows in same material, finish, and thickness as
jacket.
3. Jacket Bands: Stainless steel, Type 304, 19 mm wide.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will adversely
affect insulation application.
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping,
including fittings, valves, and specialties.
for each piping system.
that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying insulation over
fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs at least 300 mm from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends. Seal tapered
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:

2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip and
spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 40 mm. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 100 mm o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.

2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 50 mm below top of
roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate insulation
flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations of
fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-
Penetration Firestop Systems."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor
supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.4 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 4.5 to 6 m to form
a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 150
mm o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 25 mm, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections of
pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's
attachement and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation to
valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to stainer
basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and vapor-
retarder mastic.
5. For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with canvas jacket
and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
3.5 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Cement
to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same thickness as
pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit
access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check
valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to stainer basket.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe
surface.
3.6 CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION APPLICATION
1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with stainless-steel bands at 300-mm intervals and
tighten without deforming insulation materials.
2. Apply two-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 75 mm. Secure
inner layer with 1.6-mm, soft-annealed, stainless-steel wire spaced at 300-mm intervals.
Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 300-mm intervals.
3. Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to surface of installed
insulation. When dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass
cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 25 mm. Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over
glass cloth or tape. Thin the finish coat to achieve smooth finish.
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block insulation of the same material and
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Finish flange insulation the same as pipe insulation.

2. When premolded sections of insulation are not available, apply mitered sections of calcium
silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with stainless-steel wire.
3. Finish insulation of fittings the same as pipe insulation.
1. Apply mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, arrange insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Finish valve and specialty insulation the same as pipe insulation.
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-
applied jackets.
adhesive.
B. Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
4. Apply jackets with 40-mm laps at longitudinal seams and 75-mm wide joint strips at end
joints.
5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with
C. Apply PVC jacket where indicated, with 25-mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal
with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
D. Apply metal jacket where indicated, with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.
Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant
recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and
at end joints.
3.8 FINISHES
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the

3.9 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following systems,
materials, and equipment:
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
7. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
8. Steam traps and value assemblies.
A. Inspection: Perform the following field quality-control inspections, after installing insulation
materials, jackets, and finishes, to determine compliance with requirements:
1. Inspect fittings and valves randomly selected by Engineer.

2. Remove fitting covers from 20 elbows or 1 percent of elbows, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.
3. Remove fitting covers from 20 valves or 1 percent of valves, whichever is less, for various
pipe sizes.
B. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals noncompliance

with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials according to these
Specifications.
C. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to these
Specifications.
3.11 INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and field-
applied jackets.
B. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material, thickness,
and jacket requirements.
3.12 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Service: Domestic hot and recirculated hot water.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber; except for pipe drops to fixtures within walls, use flexible
elastomeric, 13 mm thick.
3. Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a. Pipe, DN18 (3/4-inch NPS): 18 mm.

b. Pipe, DN25 (1-inch NPS) to DN50 (2-inch NPS): 25 mm.
c. Pipe, Larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS): 35 mm.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Foil and paper where concealed; PVC jacket where exposed to view
or in mechanical rooms.
6. Finish: None.
B. Service: Domestic cold water.

2. Insulation Material: Flexible elastomeric.

6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater piping directly under roof slab.

3. Insulation Thickness: 35 mm.
6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Condensate drain piping.

2. Insulation Material: Closed cell elastomeric.

6. Finish: None.
E. Service: Exposed sanitary drains and domestic water supplies and stops for fixtures for the disabled.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: PVC with accessible angle valve insulation cover.
6. Finish: None.
F. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.



6. Finish: None.
G. Service: Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping.

4. Field-Applied Jacket: None.

6. Finish: None.
H. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

2. Insulation Material: Mineral fiber.
6. Finish: None.
I. Service: Steam and condensate.
1. Operating Temperature: 232 deg C (450 deg F) and lower.

6. Finish: None.
J. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.


6. Finish: None.
K. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.

3. Insulation Thickness: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick.
4. Field-Applied Jacket: Stainless steel.

6. Finish: None.
3.13 EXTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for aboveground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill insulation,
for belowground piping, is specified in Division 2 piping distribution Sections.
B. Service: Domestic water.



6. Finish: None.
C. Service: Refrigerant suction.


6. Finish: None.
D. Service: Chilled-water supply and return.



6. Finish: None.
E. Service: Heating hot-water supply and return.

3. Insulation Thickness: 38mm.


6. Finish: None.
F. Service: Steam and condensate.

3. Insulation Thickness: 50mm.

6. Finish: None.
G. Service: Diesel-engine coolant.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.

6. Finish: None.
H. Service: Diesel-engine exhaust.

2. Insulation Material: Calcium Silicate.
3. Insulation Thickness: two layers, each layer 50 mm thick..

6. Finish: None.

SECTION 15110 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general duty valves common to several mechanical piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and temperature
classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions
and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include list indicating valve and its
application.
B. Listing of Product Installation shall be submitted for valve assemblies indicating at least 5 installed
units, similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of 5
years.
C. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and
repairing.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Products Requirements", under "Source Limitations" Paragraph.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for
power piping.
1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.
C. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
D. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
VALVES 15110 / Page 1 of 7

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.
6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature.
If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels
and stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Valves:
a. Center Line, Mark Controls Corporation.

b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division.
c. Hammond Valve Corporation.
d. Keystone Valve USA, Inc.
e. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc.
g. NIBCO Inc.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
i. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.
j. Victaulic Company of America.
2.2 BASIC, COMMON FEATURES
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Non-rising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of rising
stems.
B. Internal and external parts of all cast-iron and ductile-iron valves installed under ground or above
ground, and or exposed to outdoors shall be factory coated with 7.5 mm (300 micron) fusion bonded
epoxy coating.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this
Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
D. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special operator
features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.

2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves DN150 (6 inches) and smaller, except for plug
valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Employer with 1 wrench for every 10 plug
valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves DN100 (4 inches) and larger, installed 2400 mm (96
inches) or higher above finished floor elevation.
4. Gear-Drive Operators: For quarter-turn valves DN200 (8 inches) and larger.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to
receive insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
H. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
I. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
J. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below
450 deg C (840 deg F) for gate, globe, and check valves; below 216 deg C (421 deg F) for
ball valves.
K. All valves shall be in an accessible location. If not, suitable means of access shall be provided.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) cold
working pressure (CWP), or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body
and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon alloy rising stem, teflon-impregnated packing with
bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron
handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, rising stem, teflon-
impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections; and with cast-
iron handwheel.
2.4 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, DN100 (4 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP,
ASTM B 584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, full port;
blowout proof; stainless steel stem offset from the disc centerline for full 360 degree seating; teflon
seats and seals; threaded or soldered end connections:
1. Operator: Lever operators with lock.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
2.5 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves: Lubricated, MSS SP-78, 1200-kPa (175-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and
bonnet, cast-iron plug, Buna N, Viton, or teflon packing, flanged or grooved end connections:
1. Operator: Square head with 1 wrench for every 10 valves.
2. Operator: Worm and gear with handwheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger.
3. Operator: Worm and gear with chain wheel, sizes DN150 (6 inches) and larger, 2400 mm
(96 inches) or higher above floor.
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP,
or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber,
bronze, or teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem, teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut,
threaded or soldered end connections; aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel with memory stops;
and with measuring ports.
B. Globe Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP,
ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc,
brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower,
flanged end connections; and with cast-iron handwheel with memory stops; and with measuring
ports.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves: MSS SP-67, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, 1035- kPa (150-psi) maximum pressure
differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-
replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals, lug, or grooved style:
1. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.
2. Operator for Sizes DN50 (2 Inches) to DN150 (6 Inches): Lever handle with latch lock.
3. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) to DN600 (24 Inches): Gear operator with position
indicator.
4. Operator for Sizes DN200 (8 Inches) and Larger, 2400 mm (96 Inches) or Higher above
Floor: Chain-wheel operator.
2.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-
psi) CWP, or Class 150, 2070-kPa (300-psi) CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-
bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered
end connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi)
CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-slam, bronze
disc, flanged or grooved end connections.
C. Air Cushioned Check Valves, DN 150 and Larger: Cast iron, ASTM A126, AWWA C508 having
integral flanges, stainless steel shaft, lever and weight, air cushioned side mounted cylinder, cast
iron disk, double clevis connected to ductile iron disc arm, flanged or grooved connection.
D. Wafer Check Valves: Class 125, 1380-kPa (200-psi) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, non-slam,
bronze disc/plates, stainless-steel pins and springs, Buna N seals, installed between flanges.
E. Lift Check Valves: Class 125, ASTM B 62 bronze body and cap (main components), horizontal or
vertical pattern, lift-type, non-slam, bronze disc or Buna N rubber disc with stainless-steel holder
threaded or soldered end connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special
packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible
by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,
length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for
service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
G. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 1500 mm (60 inches) above finished floor elevation.
H. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.
3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.
3.3 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a
bright finish. Clean valve socket.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open ball, gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate
tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder until
it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder
starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.4 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal
threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
3.5 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat
and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper
shutoff and retention.
3.6 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded
ends for heating hot water and low-pressure steam service.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN65 (2-1/2 Inches) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use ball, and butterfly valves for shutoff duty; globe valves for throttling duty.
Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system.
2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension.
3. Plug Valves: Neoprene-faced plug, Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze or teflon
disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: aluminum bronze disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 125, with rubber seat.
7. Check Valves: Class 125, swing or wafer type as indicated.
C. Heating Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Viton or teflon packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze or cast-iron body to suit piping system, and bronze disc.
5. Butterfly Valves: aluminum bronze disc; EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
6. Bronze Swing Check: Class 150, with composition seat.
7. Check Valves: Iron swing, wafer, or lift type, as indicated. Swing check shall be Class 150
with bronze seat ring.
D. Steam and Condensate Return Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 300, bronze body; or Class 250, cast-iron body.
2. Globe Valves: Class 300, bronze body with teflon disc; or Class 250, cast-iron body.
3. Check Valves: Class 300, bronze body swing check with composition seat; Class 250, cast-
iron body swing check with bronze seat ring; or Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check.
E. Chilled-Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Gate Valves: Class 125, cast-iron body.

2. Ball Valves: Class 150, 4140-kPa (600-psi) CWP, with stem extension and memory stop.
3. Plug Valves: Buna N packing.
4. Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze or teflon disc; or Class 125, cast-iron
body.
5. Butterfly Valves: aluminum bronze disc; EPDM sleeve and stem seals.
6. Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body swing check with rubber seat; Class 125, cast-iron
body swing check; Class 125, cast-iron body wafer check; or Class 125, cast-iron body lift
check.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final
adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

SECTION 15121 - PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pipe expansion fittings and loops for mechanical piping systems.
A. Compatibility: Products suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and
temperatures.
B. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of expansion fitting indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: For thermal expansion of piping systems and selection and design of
expansion fittings and loops.
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each indicated. Show dimensions and methods of
assembly.
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and anchorage.
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Schedule: Indicate manufacturer's number, size, location, and features for each expansion fitting
and loop.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for
expansion fittings and loops by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally registered and

qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as
those performed for installations of expansion fittings and loops that are similar to those
PIPE EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS 15121 / Page 1 of 5

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Expansion Joints and Compensators:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. Mercer Rubber Co.
d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.
e. Flexicraft Industries.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.
h. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Expansion Joint Div.
2. Flexible Ball Joints:
a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
3. Guides:
a. Adsco Manufacturing Corp.

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
c. B-Line Systems, Inc.
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.
e. Grinnell Corp.
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
g. Metraflex Co.
2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with end fittings
and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Configuration: Single- and double-bellows type, with base, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Joints for Copper Piping: Single- and two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
3. Joints for Stainless-Steel Waterway: Single-ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless-steel-pipe
end connections, and steel shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Single- and two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
B. Expansion Compensators: 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum pressure rating, with internal guides,
antitorque device, and removable end clip for positioning.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for Copper Piping: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows and brass shroud.
4. Joints for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel shroud.
C. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber, and pressure rated for
1200 kPa at 116 deg C (175 psig at 240 deg F) minimum.
1. Configuration: Full-faced, integral, steel-flanged-end connections; external control rods; and

steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes.
2. Types: Single and double sphere.
D. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined
by long-radius 180-degree return bend with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner
hoses, and braided outer sheaths.
1. Joints for Copper Piping: Copper fittings with solder-joint end connections.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with
4800 kPa at 21 deg C (700 psig at 70 deg F) and 3450 kPa at 232 deg C (500 psig at
450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
b. DN65 to DN100 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4): Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
stainless-steel sheaths with 2890 kPa at 21 deg C (420 psig at 70 deg F) and 2170 kPa
at 232 deg C (315 psig at 450 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
2. Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings.
a. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
c. Joints for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
d. Joints for DN65 to DN150 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6): Stainless-steel hoses and double-
braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 1900 kPa at 21 deg C (275 psig at 70 deg F) and
1380 kPa at 315 deg C (200 psig at 600 deg F) minimum pressure ratings.
e. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid,
2.3 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Slip Expansion Joints: Carbon-steel, packing-type pipe expansion joint designed for repacking
under pressure and pressure rated for 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400 deg F) minimum with
compound limit stops, flanged or weld ends to match piping system, drip connection if used for
steam piping systems, and flanged-end connections, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Packing: Asbestos-free polytetrafluoroethylene.

2. Double-Slip Type: With base.
B. Flexible Ball Joints: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing, designed for
360-degree rotation and angular deflection, and 1725 kPa at 204 deg C (250 psig at 400 deg F)
minimum pressure rating; comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II,
"Materials Specifications," and with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and
design of pressure-containing parts and bolting.
1. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.

2. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
3. Joints for DN150 (NPS 6) and Smaller: 30-degree angular deflection minimum.
4. Joints for DN200 (NPS 8) and Larger: 15-degree angular deflection minimum.

2.4 GUIDES
A. Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping
and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.
C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.
D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened
portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland cement
concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.
1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy resin suitable
for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.
2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.
F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 21 MPa minimum. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.
G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged nonshrink and nonmetallic grout;
suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.
C. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.
3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION
A.Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb
tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.
B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.
1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 GUIDE INSTALLATION
A. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.
B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.
3.4 ANCHOR INSTALLATION
A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and
to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.
B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure.
Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.
C. Construct concrete anchors of cast-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required,

and include embedded fasteners.
D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written instructions if expansion
fittings are indicated.
E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in
concrete.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-
repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

SECTION 15122 - METERS AND GAGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes meters and gages for mechanical and fire protection systems and water meters
installed outside the building.
B. Utility-Furnished Products: Water meters will be furnished to site, ready for installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter, gage,
fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include schedule indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, fittings, and
location for each meter and gage.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of meters and gages certifying accuracies under
specified operating conditions and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: For brackets for duct-mounting thermometers.
E. Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include data for the following:
1. Flow-measuring systems.
2. Flowmeters.
3. Thermal-energy flowmeters.
4. Water meters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Thermometers:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.
c. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
METERS AND GAGES 15122 / Page 1 of 10

d. Ernst Gage Co.

e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Palmer Instruments, Inc.
g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
i. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
2. Pressure Gages:
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div.

b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Ashcroft Commercial Sales Operation.
c. Dresser Industries, Inc.; Instrument Div.; Weksler Instruments Operating Unit.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
e. Marsh Bellofram.
f. Noshok, Inc.
g. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
h. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
3. Test Plugs:
a. Flow Design, Inc.

b. MG Piping Products Co.
c. National Meter.
d. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
e. Sisco Manufacturing Co.
f. Trerice: H. O. Trerice Co.
g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
4. Flow Elements:
a. ABB, Inc.; ABB Instrumentation.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).
d. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
e. Dieterich Standard Co.
f. Flow Design, Inc.
g. Gerand Engineering Co.
h. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
i. Leeds & Northrup.
j. Scott Fetzer Co.; Meriam Instrument Div.
k. Taco, Inc.
5. Flowmeters:
a. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Tulsa, OK).

b. Bailey-Fischer & Porter Co.
c. Baird Controls, Inc.
d. Data Industrial Corp.
e. George Fischer Signet, Inc.
f. Hersey Measurement Co.
g. Onicon, Inc.
h. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Measurement Div.
6. Thermal-Energy Flowmeters
a. Data Industrial Corp.

b. ONICON Incorporated.

c. Thermo Measurement Ltd.
7. Flow Indicators:
a. Dover Corp.; OPW Engineered Systems.

b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.
c. Emerson Electric Co.; Brooks Instrument Div.
d. Ernst Gage Co.
8. Water Meters:
a. ABB Water Meters, Inc.

b. Badger Meter, Inc.; Industrial Div. (Milwaukee, WI).
c. Grinnell Corp.; Mueller Co.; Hersey Products Div.
d. Hersey Measurement Co.
e. ISTEC Corp.
f. Schlumberger Industries, Inc.; Water Div.
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Scale Range: Temperature ranges for services listed are as follows:
1. Domestic Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 240 deg F, with
2-degree scale divisions).
2. Domestic Cold Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to 100
deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions).
3. Hot Water: 0 to 115 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (30 to 240 deg F, with 2-degree
scale divisions).
4. Chilled Water: minus 18 to plus 38 deg C, with 1-degree scale divisions (0 to 100 deg F,
with 2-degree scale divisions).
5. Steam and Condensate: 10 to 205 deg C, with 3-degree scale divisions (50 to 400 deg F,
with 5-degree scale divisions).
B. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum
of 1.5 percent of range span.
2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASTM E1-07.
B. Case: Die cast and aluminum finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 230 mm
(9 inches) long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360-degree
adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled with magnifying lens.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.
2.4 DIRECT-MOUNTING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS

A. Description: Vapor-actuated, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for separable socket; of length to suit installation.
2.5 REMOTE-READING, FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: Vapor-actuated, remote-reading dial type.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
D. Scale: Progressive, satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Tubing: Bronze, double-braided, armor-over-copper capillary; of length to suit installation.
F. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.
2.6 BIMETAL DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200; direct-mounting, universal-angle dial type.
B. Case: Stainless steel with 125-mm- (5-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
D. Element: Bimetal coil.
E. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Stainless steel for separable socket, of length to suit installation.
2.7 INSERTION DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Description: ASME B40.200, bimetal type.
B. Dial: 25-mm (1-inch) diameter.
C. Case: Stainless steel.

D. Stem: Dustproof and leakproof 3-mm- (1/8-inch-) diameter, tapered-end stem with nominal length
of 125 mm (5 inches).
2.8 SEPARABLE SOCKETS
A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold fixed
thermometer stem.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than thickness
of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for uninsulated piping.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.9 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold test
thermometer.
1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.
of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.
4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.
5. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.
6. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.
2.10 DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES
A. Description: Flanged-fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded end for attaching
thermometer.
of exterior insulation.
2. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 50 mm (2 inches), but not less than thickness
of insulation lining.
2.11 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Description: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon-tube type with bottom connection; dry
type, for all purpose use. Liquid-filled-case type, for booster sets and pumps.
B. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 115-mm- (4-1/2-inch-) diameter, glass lens.
C. Connector: Brass, DN8 (NPS 1/4).
D. Scale: White-coated aluminum with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle 50 percent of scale.
F. Range: Comply with the following:

1. Vacuum: 100 kPa of vacuum to 103 kPa of pressure (30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of
pressure).
2. Fluids under Pressure: Two times the operating pressure.
2.12 PRESSURE-GAGE FITTINGS
A. Valves: DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass or stainless-steel needle type.
B. Syphons: DN8 (NPS 1/4) coil of brass tubing with threaded ends.
C. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, DN8 (NPS 1/4) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal
disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.
2.13 TEST PLUGS
A. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in DN8 (NPS 1/4) or DN15 (NPS 1/2) fitting as
required.
B. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.
C. Pressure Rating: 3450 kPa (500 psig) minimum.
D. Core Insert: Self-sealing valve, suitable for inserting 3-mm (1/8-inch) OD probe from dial-type
thermometer or pressure gage.
E. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: Minus 7 to plus 93 deg C (20 to 200 deg F),
chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.
F. Core Material for Air and Water: Minus 35 to plus 136 deg C (Minus 30 to plus 275 deg F),
ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
G. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.
H. Test Kit: Pressure gage and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, pressure gage and
carrying case.
1. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the system's operating
conditions.
2.14 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEMS
A. System includes calibrated flow element, separate meter, hoses or tubing, valves, fittings, and
conversion chart compatible with flow element, meter, and system fluid.
1. Flow range of flow-measuring element and meter covers operating range of equipment or
system where used.
2. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons
(liters).
B. Permanent Meters: Suitable for wall or bracket mounting. Include 150-mm- (6-inch-) diameter, or
equivalent, dial with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flow element.
1. Scale: Liters per second (Gallons per minute).

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of center 60 percent of range.
C. Include complete operating instructions with each meter.
D. Venturi Flow Elements: Differential-pressure-design, flow-element fitting made for installation in

piping.
1. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel; with brass fittings and attached tag
with flow conversion data. Include ends threaded for DN50 (NPS 2) and smaller elements
and flanged or welded for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger elements.
2. Pressure Rating: 1725 kPa (250 psig).
3. Temperature Rating: 121 deg C (250 deg F).
E. Pitot-Tube Flow Elements: Differential-pressure design with probe made for insertion into piping.
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with brass fittings and
attached tag with flow conversion data.
2.15 TURBINE FLOWMETERS
A. Description: Insertion type; measures flow directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with integral
direct-reading scale.
2. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa (150 psig) minimum.
3. Temperature Rating: 82 deg C (180 deg F) minimum.
4. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in liters
(gallons).
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.
2.16 VORTEX-SHEDDING FLOWMETERS
A. In-Line Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation between pipe flanges; measures flow
directly in liters per second (gallons per minute).
1. Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and direct-reading scale.

(gallons).
5. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 7/10 percent for liquids and 1-1/4 percent for gases.
B. Insertion Vortex-Shedding Flowmeter: Made for installation in pipe; measures flow directly in liters
per second (gallons per minute).
1. Construction: Stainless-steel probe, with integral transmitter and direct-reading scale.

(gallons).
5. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent for liquids and 1-1/2 percent for gases.

2.17 FLOW INDICATORS
A. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in piping systems.
1. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and plastic pelton-wheel
indicator.
2.18 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETERS
A. Instruments include turbine-wheel or flow-sensor element and meter, two temperature sensors,
transmitter, solid-state calculator with integral battery pack, integral stop valves, strainer, and
magnetic trap.
1. Construction: Bronze body.

3. Temperature Range: 0 to 121 deg C (32 to 250 deg F).
4. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatt hours or joules
(British thermal units).
5. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.
6. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.
2.19 WATER METERS
A. Description: As per Miyahuna specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 METER AND GAGE INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions for
applications where used.
3.2 THERMOMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
B. Install in the following locations:
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler and chiller.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems.
3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat-recovery unit.
5. Inlet and outlet of each hot water storage tank.
6. Hot water return pipes.
7. Outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.
8. Each duct thermometer support flange.
C. Install remote-reading dial thermometers in control panels with tubing connecting panel and
thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

D. Install separable sockets in vertical position in piping tees where fixed thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with socket extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill sockets with oil or graphite and secure caps.
E. Install thermometer wells in vertical position in piping tees where test thermometers are indicated.
1. Install with stem extending to center of pipe.

2. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.
F. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges: Install in wall of duct where duct thermometers are indicated.
Attach to duct with screws.
3.3 PRESSURE-GAGE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure gages in piping tees with pressure-gage valve located on pipe at most readable
position.
B. Install dry-type pressure gages in the following locations:
1. Upstream and downstream of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Building water-service entrance.
3. Chilled-water and condenser-water inlets and outlets of chillers.
C. Install liquid-filled-type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump, including fire and
booster pumps.
D. Install pressure-gage needle valve and snubber in piping to pressure gages.
1. Exception: Install syphon instead of snubber in piping to steam pressure gages.
3.4 FLOW-MEASURING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters in accessible and most readable positions in piping systems.
B. Install flow-measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil
in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install differential-pressure-type flow elements with minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and
downstream from element as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flowmeters in accessible locations.
E. Install permanently mounted meters for flow elements on walls or brackets in accessible locations.
F. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install flowmeters and components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 THERMAL-ENERGY FLOWMETER INSTALLATION
A. Install meters in hydronic supply piping. Install thermal well in return line for remote sensor. Mount
meter on wall if accessible; if not, provide bracket to support meter.
3.7 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance.
2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.
3. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.
4. Connect thermal-energy-flowmeter transmitters to meters.
B. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and devices.
C. Ground electrically operated meters.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
D. Install electrical connections for power and devices.
E. Electrical power, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
C. Clean windows of meters and gages and clean factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and
broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating,
and chilled-water cooling; makeup water for these systems; and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15 Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are made on threads
(metric dimensions)
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical delivery
conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use and
without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non alloy and ferritic alloy steels with specific
inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings and
accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
8. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
9. API American Petroleum Institute
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Manual and Quality plan for Contractor and its related Sub Contractors including:
1. Inspection Test Plan

2. Organization Chart, CV’s and certificates for each personal including NDT Company and
Third Party Company; Third party Engineers shall have minimum 10 years experience.
3. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop
curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and
automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of piping Isometric & spools, pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe
support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the
HYDRONIC PIPING 15181 / Page 1 of 18

building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, welding map and expansion joints
and loops.
C. Proposal Welding Procedure Specification (PWPS)
D. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) supported by Procedure Qualification Record (PQR).
E. Welder Qualification Certificates.
F. Original Mill Certificates for piping ,fitting, filler metal,…etc
G. Calibration Certificate for Equipments and Gagues.
H. Insulation and Coating procedures .
I. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
1. Test procedures used (NDT Procedures, Hydrostatic& leak test procedures, etc).
2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
J. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Surface preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate application of
150 um polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding with pre-insulated pipes
manufacturer.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications” and ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable.
Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material specified, welding process and position of
welds required during fabrication of the piping. Welder’s Qualification Test to be performed on
site and attended by Contractor Welding Inspectors, Third Party and Engineer prior to commencing
piping fabrication.
C. Non destructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds in accordance to ASME B31.1 or
ASME B31.9 as applicable. A Non destructive test (NDT) shall be performed and the related reports
shall be submitted after getting the approval and stamping of third party inspection company. Prior
prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer on both NDT & Third Party Inspection
companies.
D. All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The Contractor shall
employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1, NDT personal certified as Level 2
minimum in the NDE methods utilized (independent of the contractor fabricating or installing the
piping) to visually examine all welds in accordance with inspection and examination requirements
of ASME B 31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable. Any welds failing the visual or NDE inspection
shall be ground out or cutout, re-welded and radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. The
CWI shall submit a written report signed and stamped from the approved third party for each weld
to the Engineer.
E. Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per ASME
requirements, minimum of 5% of Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer, shall be
radio graphed at the expense of the contractor. The certified welding inspector shall examine the
films and provide a written report to the Engineer. All welds not meeting the requirements of ASME
B 31.1 or ASME B31.9 latest edition as applicable will be ground out, re-welded and re-radio
graphed at the expense of the Contractor. If any 10% of the randomly selected radio graphed welds
fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and repaired at the expense of the contractor.
F. 10 % of Fillet Joints shall be tested by Dye Pentrent Test Or Magnetic Test
G. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 as applicable for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with other
construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for fire-stopping specified in Section "Through-Penetration Fire stop
Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name
of the manufacture.
B. Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is
protected from the elements.
C. End caps weather supplied by the piping manufacturer or fabricated by the contractor are to be
placed at the ends of the piping sections to keep debris and reptiles from entering inside the pipe
while it is placed in storage.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that
fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
a. Tyco Fire Products LP.

b. Grinnell Corporation.
c. Victaulic Company.
2. Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Flow Design, Inc.
c. Gerand Engineering Company.
d. Griswold Controls.
e. Bell & Gossett
f. Taco, Inc.
3. Pressure-Reducing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Apollo valves.
d. Bell & Gossett.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
f. Watts Water Technologies Company.
4. Safety Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Apollo valves.
d. Kunkle Valve Division.
e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
a. Flow Design, Inc.

b. Griswold Controls.
6. Expansion Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett.
d. Taco, Inc.
7. Air Separators and Air Purgers:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett.
d. Taco, Inc.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
B. Chilled Water (above ground), Heating Water (above ground), and Vent Piping:
1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with
threaded ends.
2. Steel pipes DN 65 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
3. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600 ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, or ASTM A106/A106M Grade
B, ERW, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled
Joints.
4. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam and beveled
ends for butt welding or roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
5. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based on ASME B31.1
to verify that wall thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure:
C. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up Piping: As specified for Domestic water piping. Refer to
section 15411 “Water Distribution Piping”.
D. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:
1. From air handling units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent welded joints.
2. From fan coil or other terminal units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent welded joints.
E. Chemical Feed Piping for Chilled Water Treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC),
Schedule 80, ASTM F441.
F. Diesel Engine Cooling Water: For DN 50 (NPS 2)and smaller, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with
threaded joints; for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2)and larger, use Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded joints.
2.4 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:
A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping system accessories
shall be cellular glass conforming to ASTM C552, calcium silicate conforming to ASTM C533 or
polyurethane matching the pipe insulation. Insulation shall be pre-molded, precut or job fabricated
to fit and shall be removable and reusable. Thickness shall match adjacent piping.
B. Metal jackets shall be provided for all pipe insulation in manholes. Insulation bands shall be 19 mm
wide 0.13 mm stainless steel.
C. Buried fittings and accessories shall be factory fabricated and may have field foamed polyurethane
insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected with a covering matching the pipe casing.
Shrink sleeves shall be provided over casing connection joints.
2.5 JOINTS:
A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings shall be
provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall be made with either welding tees
or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the main and reinforced against external strains.
B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly square and tight.
Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all gaskets shall be as thin as the finish
of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25 through 300 mm (1
through 12 inch) flanges and 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm (14 inches) and larger.
C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the male
threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.
D. Brazed and soldered joints: Brazed and soldered joints for copper pipe and fittings shall conform to
CDA A 4015. Silver solder or brazing alloys, ASTM B32, melting above 593 degrees C (1100
degrees F) shall be utilized.
E. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and protected against
corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints between nonmetallic and metallic
carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by the piping system manufacturer. The transition pieces
shall be factory fabricated and shall be designed so that no field chemical welding of the carrier pipe
will be required. Transitional joint connections to manhole steel piping shall be made inside the
manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped manholes where joints shall be outside the manhole
wall.
F. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.
G. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with the written
instructions of the manufacturer.
2.6 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. General
1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or ASTM
A53/A53M Grade B, suitable for butt welding, ERW and thickness as per matching pipe.
2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, socket welded fittings
shall be to ASME B16.11.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms and chiller house.
4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping only.
1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME B16.4, may
be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close
nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose thread, with hose
cap nut.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings are optional for
water piping only.
1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or ASTM
A53/A53M Grade B ERW.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows
shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11.

4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick full face
neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges, with
Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade B.
D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets may be
used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel half-couplings,
ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer shall be used with
roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron, ASTM
A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more track-head,
square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or steel,
ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, designed to accept grooved mechanical
couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
2.7 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466.
1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el.
B. Chemical feed piping for chilled water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), Schedule
80, ASTM F439.
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.
2.9 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.
C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/ A
47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel;

or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept
grooved end couplings.
D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber

gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or
lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.10 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Section "Valves."
B. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
C. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate and globe valves
with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.
D. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline is located 2400
mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
E. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
F. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, used for balancing, shut off and measuring of pressure
drop. Balancing valves shall be provided with two measuring nipples to have the possibility to
measure the differential pressure (water flow indirectly) through the balancing valve and a tight shut
off function with a hidden memory of the setting. Each valve shall be provided with a label including
at least the valve reference number, valve’s diameter, design flow, setting after balancing and
pressure drop in setting and design position. All valves shall be supplied with Prefab insulation
material sourced from the valve manufacturer, made of Polyurethane, volume weight 50-60
Kg/cubic m.
G. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze body, fitted with a
red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, 1380-kPa (200 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded end connections.
H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-pattern globe valve
style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet bolts chromed steel and digital hand
wheel, 1380-kPa (200 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating
temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections.
I. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet pressure
check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and
stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set
at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
J. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal
working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV: Heating Boilers, bear ASME stamp.
K. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with testing lever.
Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8, bear ASME stamp.

L. Automatic Dynamic Flow-Control Valves: Brass or ferrous metalbody, factory set to maintain
constant flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a
readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve shall
have an identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone identification,
valve number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following design:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 93 deg C (200 deg F) with
stainless-steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F) with
corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly easily removable for
inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control valve, with
stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves, and
designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F).
M. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check valve and
balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve with spring-loaded weighted
disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge flow and shut-off.
Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure. Unit shall be installed on
discharge side of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the stem up. Unit shall be cast iron
body construction suitable for maximum working pressure of 1380 kPa (200 PSI) and maximum
operating temperature of 149 °C (300 °F), bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring.
N. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in accordance with MSS SP-80-2008.
Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above with a threaded end connection.
Valve shall be provided with a water hose nipple adapter.
O. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS)ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa (400-psig)
minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7garden-hose thread and cap.
2.11 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Air Vents:
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1206-kPa (175-psig) working
pressure; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver
or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8) discharge connection and DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet
connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; 116 deg C (240 deg F)
operating temperature; with DN 8 (NPS 1/4) discharge connection and DN 15 (NPS 1/2)
inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded end connections
B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 1380-kPa (200-psig) working pressure and
121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to
maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible bladder securely sealed into tank. Provide sight
glass and include drain fitting and taps for pressure gauge and air-charging fitting. Support vertical
tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test

tank with taps and supports installed and labeled according to the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 1380-kPa
(200-psig) minimum working pressure and 191 deg C (375 deg F) maximum operating temperature;
perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released air into expansion tank;
tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller;
flanged connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; threaded blowdown connection. Provide
units in sizes for full-system flow capacity. Applicable to central plants.
D. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1380-kPa (200-psig) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A126, Class B),
flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, threaded connections for DN 50 (NPS 2) and
smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
E. Basket Strainers: 1380-kPa (200-psig) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A126,
Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain
connection.
F. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1380-kPa (200-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F)
maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end connections to
match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch) misalignment.
G. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges drilled to
align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 121 deg C (250 deg F)
and pressures up to 1380 kPa (200 psig).
H. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1380-kPa (200-psig) minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting
consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged
ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
2.12 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of design
flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing taps
upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout valves to
facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted with an
integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves and
quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing ports may be
pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A system comprised of two valves of bronze and stainless steel
metallurgy designed for 1380 kPa pressure at 121 degrees C, with thermal insulation sleeve.
F. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain venturi and dual
quick connect valves with integral check valves and color coded safety caps for
pressure/temperature readout.
G. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick connect valve for
pressure/temperature readout.

H. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.

2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate factor and
design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
I. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect connections.
J. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves showing
flow rate versus pressure differential.
K. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed flow
devices.
L. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm diameter, or 450 mm long
scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct reading in lps with three valve manifold and two
shut-off valves.
2.13 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe movement
which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-built or field-fabricated
guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion and direct the axial pipe movement
into the expansion joints.
B. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association

Standards.
C. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor failure if one or
both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.
D. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.
E. Expansion Compensators:
1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.

2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.

F. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on each
expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design pressure
and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the identification
number on the contract drawings.
G. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and to
restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum of 15
percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors. Field-built
guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.
2.14 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water), initial
mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115 mm (4-1/2 inches)
in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with black graduations and pointer,
clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate
normal working pressure.
B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in water
service.
C. Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range.
1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to plus 700 kPa
(100 psig).
2.15 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with retained
safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where shown, or in lieu
of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:
1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage adapter probe
for extra long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, , –—100 kPa (30
inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree accuracy, 25 mm
(one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.
2.16 THERMOMETERS
A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150 mm (6
inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.
C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard. Required ranges
in degrees C (F):
1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Chilled water and heating water pipes inside building: Black steel pipes.
B. Exterior chilled water and heating water pipes: Black steel pipes with Aluminum jacket.
C. Chilled water and heating water pipes in plant rooms: Black steel pipes with Aluminum jacket.
D. Condensate drain pipes: uPVC pipes.
E. Refer to section 15083 “Pipe Insulation” for Jacketing requirements.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe valves.
B. Locate balancing, isolation and shutoff valves over back-of-house areas to allow remote, accessible
service not visible to guests.
C. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to each
piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected to the branch line, on both
sides of 2 way control valves; and in chilled water supply, chilled water return, hot water supply and
hot water return lines at the base of risers (including fan coil risers).
D. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each
piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
E. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element and
elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
F. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow
direction.
G. Install safety valves as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve
discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the 2010 ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1, for installation requirements.
H. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to regulate

system pressure.
I. Install 2 way modulating control valves on air handling units; and 3 way control valves on AHUs at
the end of major branches.
J. Install 2 way control valves on fan coil units; and 3 way control valves on FCUs at the end of the
risers.

K. Install strainers with drain valve at each air handling unit coil for drain down and at the base of each
return riser.
L. Thermo wells: Provide at both sides of equipment and at temperature control devices.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Refer to Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping installation
requirements.
B. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
C. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20 (NPS 3/4)
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and elsewhere as required
for system drainage.
D. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with
the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff coming
out the top of the main pipe.
G. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-
line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for
strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
H. Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and bolts for clamping and
attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces shall be installed in the most
effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles where required. Supports, anchors,
or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the structure or adjacent construction during
installation or by the weight of expansion of the pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of
vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each
penetrated surface, to provide essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings
of pipe anchors shall be submitted for approval before installation. .
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with
requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer, supported on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
D. PVC and RTRP (GRE) Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's
written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end.
Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free
solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter,
using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading
is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves
in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall
thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks
on pipe after assembly.
K. Mechanical and Heat Fusion Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer’s written
instructions.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere
as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at
heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install dip-tube fittings in boiler outlet. Install piping to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward
slope toward tank. Connect boiler-outlet piping.
D. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression
tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blow down piping with gate valve; extend
to nearest drain.
E. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is
properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9- and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or
other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical
runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE"
value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific requirements for
welding joints in hydronic piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and approval by

welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “ Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted for

review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may be required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for welding
activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been
completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely
(automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.

8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.10 PAINTING
A. A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in equipment rooms
and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned, primed and painted.
B. B. Refer to Section “Painting” for painting requirement.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-
mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

SECTION 15182 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for systems up to 1030 kPa (150
psig), inside the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. HP Systems: High-pressure systems operating at 695 kPa (100 psig) or more.
B. MP Systems: Medium-pressure systems operating at more than 104 kPa (15 psig), but at less than
695 kPa (100 psig).
C. LP Systems: Low-pressure systems operating at less than 104 kPa (15 psig).
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Steam and condensate piping for this Project is a two-pipe, mechanical flow, upfeed system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve and steam trap indicated, including rated
capacities and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe
support assemblies, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their attachment to the
building structure. Include dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
D. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the following:
1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For steam traps, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in
operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 15182 / Page 1 of 11

A. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Section IX AMENDED by
ASME Section IX Addenda A , ASME Section IX Addenda B.
B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with the 2010 ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code -
Section VIII, Division 1.
C. All piping shall be stored and kept free of foreign material and shall be internally and externally
cleaned of all oil, dirt, rust. Deliver and store valves and pipe hangers in shipping containers with
labeling in place.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, fire-suppression-
system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Sections.
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor assemblies.
Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Safety Valves:
a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Kunkle Inds. Inc.; Kunkle Valve Division.
c. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Watts Regulators.

b. Hoffman Specialty.
c. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
d. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
3. Steam Traps:

b. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
c. Hoffman Specialty.
4. Air Vents and Vacuum Breakers:

b. Hoffman Specialty.
c. Johnson Corp. (The).
5. Steam Meters:
a. EMCO Flowmeters.
b. ISTEC Corp.
c. Preso Meters Corp.
6. Condensate Meters:
a. Niagara Meters.
b. ISTEC Corp.
A. General: Refer to Part 3 piping application articles for applications of pipe and fitting materials.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: ASTM A53/A53M, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
B. Steel Pipe, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): ASTM A53/A53M, Type S
(seamless), Grade A, Schedules 40 and 80, black steel, plain ends.
C. Steel Pipe, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): ASTM A53/A53M, Type E
(electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 30, black steel, plain ends.
D. Steel Pipe, DN 500 (NPS 20): ASTM A53/A53M, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S
(seamless), Grade B, Schedule 20, black steel, plain ends.
1. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733-03, made of ASTM A53/A53M, Schedules 40 and 80,
black steel; seamless for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and electric-resistance welded for
DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300.
G. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.

H. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
I. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
J. Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets
of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F)
maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to
match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch) misalignment.
L. Welding Materials: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II - Part C for
welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
M. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.4 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."
B. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
2.5 SAFETY VALVES
A. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code.
B. Bronze Safety Valves: Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet; forged copper-alloy disc; fully
enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; factory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
C. Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc with bronze nozzle; fully enclosed,
cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; raised-face flanged
inlet and threaded outlet connections; factory set and sealed.
1. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying with
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.
D. Stop-Check Valves: Class 250, malleable-iron body and bonnet, cylindrical disc, removable liner
and machined seat, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, polytetrafluoroethylene-impregnated
packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections, and cast-iron handwheel.
2.6 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B. Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and positive
shutoff. Valves shall have cast-iron body with threaded connections for valves DN 50 (NPS 2) and
smaller and flanged connections for valves DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; and hardened stainless-
steel trim, replaceable head and seat, main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-
arresting device, cover over pilot diaphragm, and non-asbestos gaskets.
2.7 STEAM TRAPS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Class 125, bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and screw-
in cap; balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel bellow element; and renewable, hardened
stainless-steel head and seat.
B. Thermodynamic Traps: Stainless-steel body and screw-in cap; maximum operating pressure of
4140 kPa (600 psig); stainless-steel disc and seat; threaded ends.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A126-04, cast-iron body and bolted cap; renewable, stainless-
steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat; maximum operating
pressure of 860 kPa (125 psig); balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel thermostatic bellow
element.
1. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 25 deg C (45 deg F) of superheat and resisting
water hammer without sustaining damage.
D. Inverted Bucket Traps: Cast-iron body and cap, pressure rated for 1725 kPa (250 psig); stainless-
steel head and seat; stainless-steel valve retainer, lever, and guide pin assembly; and brass or
stainless-steel bucket.
1. Contractor Options:
a. Strainer: Integral stainless-steel inlet strainer within the trap body.

b. Air Vent: Stainless-steel thermostatic vent.
2.8 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS
A. Float Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, seamless brass float, balanced-pressure thermostatic bellows,
and replaceable stainless-steel seat, float, and head.
2.9 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Vacuum Breakers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) steam working pressure, 185 deg C (365 deg F) maximum
operating temperature, brass or stainless-steel body, and stainless-steel retainer, spring, and ball;
with plain or threaded outlet.
2.10 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1725-kPa (250-psig) working steam pressure; ASTM A126-04, Class B cast-
iron body; stainless-steel screen, No. 20 mesh for DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and manufacturer's
recommended perforations for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; tapped blowoff plug. Threaded
connections for strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller and flanged connections for strainers DN 65
(NPS 2-1/2) and larger.
2.11 FLASH TANKS

A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
for 1035-kPa (150-psig) rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with tappings for vents, low-
pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate inlet, air vent, safety valve, and
legs.
2.12 METERS
A. Steam Meters: Pipeline sensor of modified venturi design, of [stainless-steel] construction, for
insertion in pipeline between flanges, plus or minus 1 percent accuracy over full-scale deflection,
producing pressure differential proportional to square of flow rate.
B. Condensate Meters: Brass body with threaded connections for meters DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller
and flanged connections for meters DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger; positive displacement turbine;
magnetic coupling counter; suitable for temperatures up to 121 deg C (250 deg F) and for 1725 kPa
(250 psig) working pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints using
Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel pipe, with
welded joints using Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe, with
D. Steam Piping, DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 20
wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded joints using
Class 125 malleable-iron fittings.
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel
flanges.
3.2 MP AND HP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Steam Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, with threaded joints using
B. Steam Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 40 steel pipe, with
C. Steam Piping, DN 350 through DN 450 (NPS 14 through NPS 18): Schedule 30 steel pipe, with
D. Steam Piping DN 500 (NPS 20): Schedule 20 steel pipe, with welded joints using Schedule 20
wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.

E. Condensate Piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, with threaded joints using
F. Condensate Piping, DN 65 through DN 300 (NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12): Schedule 80 steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150 wrought-steel
flanges.
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Ball valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe valves.
B. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at inlet connection to each
steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated.
3.4 LP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Convectors and finned-tube radiation.
B. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, laundry equipment, kitchen
equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
3.5 MP AND HP STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS
A. Thermostatic Traps: Convectors and finned-tube radiation.
B. Inverted Bucket Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and laundry equipment.
C. Float and Thermostatic Traps: Kitchen equipment, heat exchangers, and heating coils.
D. Thermodynamic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, and heat tracer lines.
3.6 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
B. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
C. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of
valves.
D. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20 (NPS 3/4)
threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system
drainage.
E. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.

F. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of
condensate flow.
G. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree fittings in
main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe. Use of 90-degree tee fittings is
permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If length of branch takeoff is less than 3 m, pitch
branch line down toward mains at a 0.4 percent grade.
I. Install unions in piping DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller adjacent to each valve, at final connections of
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
J. Install flanges in piping DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger at final connections of each piece of
equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
K. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
L. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, traps,
and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball valve with cap in blowdown
connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff valve and cap in
blowdown connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
M. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
N. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers,
and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends, and expansion joints.
1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding
90 m where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a maximum of 45 m where
pipe is pitched up in direction of steam flow.
2. Size drip legs at vertical risers same size as pipe and extend beyond rise. Size drip legs at
other locations same diameter as main. In steam mains DN 150 (NPS 6) and larger, dirt leg
size can be reduced, but to no less than DN 100 (NPS 4).
3. Install gate valve at drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blowdowns to allow removal of dirt
and scale.
4. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
3.7 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION
A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment, but not more
than 1200 mm from connected equipment.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, install gate valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install
union, check valve, sight glass, and gate valve downstream from trap.
3.8 PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install pressure-reducing valves in readily accessible location for maintenance and inspection.
B. Install bypass piping around each pressure-reducing valve, with globe valve equal in size to area of
pressure-reducing valve seat ring, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install ball valves around each pressure-reducing valve.

D. Install unions around each pressure-reducing valve having threaded-end connections.
E. Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of each pressure-reducing valve and ahead of shutoff
valve. Install pressure gages downstream from globe valve on pressure-reducing valve bypass.
1. On two-stage pressure-reducing stations, install drip trap and pressure gage upstream from
second stage pressure-reducing valve.
F. Install strainers upstream for each pressure-reducing valve.
G. Install safety valves downstream from each pressure-reducing valve station.
3.9 STEAM METER INSTALLATION
A. Install lengths of straight pipe upstream and downstream from meters according to steam meter
manufacturer's instructions.
3.10 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install safety valves according to ANSI/ASME B31.1b. Pipe safety valve discharge without valves
to atmosphere outside building. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain
connection to nearest floor drain.
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer, supported
on a trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

11. DN 300 (NPS 12): Maximum span,4.5 m; minimum rod size, 22 mm.
12. DN 350 (NPS 14): Maximum span, 4.5 m; minimum rod size, 25 mm
D. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
A. Ream ends of pipes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
is specified.
D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and
E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.13 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass and close to coil inlet connection.
E. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
F. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.
A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9-2008 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air. Use
drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.

3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or
other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical
runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE"
value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
welding joints in steam and condensate heating piping:

welding engineer.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted for

3.15 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system balancing
has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
3. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
3.16 CLEANING
A. Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including pipes,
tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified. Include pressure drop,
based on manufacturer’s test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe and tube
sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between
piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and installation
of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure
proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and any other information
required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation and
maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME
Section IX AMENDED by ASME Section IX Addenda A, ASME Section IX Addenda B, "Welding
and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
REFRIGERANT PIPING 15183 / Page 1 of 10

1. ANSI/ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components"

2. ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components and

Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled.
A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Refrigerants:
a. Atofina Chemicals, Inc..

b. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.
c. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.
d. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.
2. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.

b. Eaton Corporation; Industrial Control Div.
c. Emerson Electric Company; Alco Controls Div.
d. Henry Valve Company.
e. Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division.
f. Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Sporlan Division.
2.2 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B annealed temper.

D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M,Type A annealed temper.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
A. Brazing Filler Metals: ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.5 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275 deg F)
working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and bonnet, phosphor
bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel, stainless-steel spring, nylon seat
disc, with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 135 deg C (275 deg F) working
temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper gasket, back seating,
rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 149 deg C
(300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, PTFE seat, and
stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-through pattern, with
solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating pressure, 149 deg C
(300 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-brass bolted
bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall be straight-through
or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper stubs, brass
caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature rating, 2760-
kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-through
pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1 solenoid enclosure
with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or cast
bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V dc standard
coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot operator,
stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and
ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 750; thermostatic-adjustable, modulating

type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end connections; with
sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line, and external equalizer line.

K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor unloading;
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure; forged-brass or steel

body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout plug, with
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure; steel shell with
stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C (200 deg F)

operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with
color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel shell, flange ring,
and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant with
integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F)
maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end
connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper tubing;
forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size and ductile iron
for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel bolts, with silicon
bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on flanges and bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or stainless-steel

core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end connections, and synthetic covering;
dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with fusible plug, sized
for refrigeration capacity.
2.7 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: ARI 495-2005, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa (400-
psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII; 2760 kPa (400 psig) with tappings for liquid
inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level indicator.
2.8 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethance/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for
Refrigeration Systems.”
B. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.
C. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install
valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
D. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between
pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit
installation of full-thickness insulation.
E. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
F. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been
eliminated.
G. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed
to mechanical injury.

I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward
away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical
runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,
unless expressly indicated.
L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
M. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS).
N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion valves,
and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial movement
of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
P. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
R. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and
packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near
bulb of expansion valve.
S. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate electrical
requirements and connections.
T. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not
mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-
line pressure at bulb location.
U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards
for Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 AND 34
PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Provide according to ANSI/ASME B31.5 and ANSI/MSS SP-69.
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes.
Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88M-05.
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

G. Support vertical runs at each floor.
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s “Brazing Handbook,” Chapter “Pipe and Tube”
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe.
2. Use Type Bag, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
D. Fill pipe and fittings with nitrogen during brazing to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet,
for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser
systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff valve and
expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at evaporators,
and elsewhere as indicated.
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid
valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps. Do not
mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-
line pressure at bulb location.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,

“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems”.
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and on
leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic expansion
valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before each
solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic compressors,

and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down
compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines
from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system shuts
down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long piping runs, sized
to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb
vibration.
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for electrical connections.
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-kPa (27-psig)
vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no
leakage.
B. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and
safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
welding joints in refrigerant piping:

welding engineer.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted for
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.11 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If vacuum holds
for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2 psig).
5. Complete charging of system, using newer filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-
operating charge.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating
suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design

temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates
and pressures are established.

SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:
1. End-suction pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pumps shall be designed using hydraulic criteria based upon actual model developmental test data.
Manufacturer shall certify that pumps have been hydraulically tested at the factory.
B. Head-capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut-off. Curves shall be relatively flat for
closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so that the design capacity falls to the
left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to the right in operation, without
approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation and unstable operation. Select pumps
for open systems so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive
head available (NPSHA). Deviations within 3 percent of maximum efficiency are permissible,
provided the lesser efficiency is not less than the scheduled efficiency.
C. The head for pumps submitted for pumping through chilled water coils, hot water coils and
evaporators shall be increased, if necessary, to match the equipment approved for the project.
D. Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size to be non-overloading at any point on the head-capacity
curve including one pump operation in a parallel pumping installation.
E. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the
casing or less than 15 percent than the published minimum diameter of the casing will be rejected.
F. Acceptable maximum impeller diameter calculations shall not be based on percentage of impeller
diameter range for a given casing. Shop Drawings will be approved only if complete performance
curves for all impeller sizes for a given casing are included in the submittal.
G. Where parallel-pump operation is indicated, pumps selected shall have characteristics specifically
suitable for the service without unstable operation.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 15185 / Page 1 of 8

H. When net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations are made, inlet-storage head shall be
considered at empty point and the centerline pump location shall include not less than a 150 mm
concrete base.
I. Pumps of the same duty condition, classification, and accessories, or with specified accessory
deviation, shall be identical and the product of one manufacturing source.
J. Pumps from more than one manufacturing source shall be provided only when a single
manufacturing source is unable to meet all Specification requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings for pumps shall be submitted in accordance with Part 3,
"Execution," of this Section.
B. Product Data: The following shall be submitted for pumps in accordance with paragraph entitled
"General Requirements," of this Section.
1. Equipment and performance data including certified performance curves and rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller
dimensions; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating
point on curves.
2. Equipment foundation data.
C. Test Reports: The following tests shall be submitted from the manufacturer prior to shipping the
pump from the factory:
1. Hydraulic Tests.
2. Efficiency Tests.
3. Vibration Tests.
4. Output Efficiency.
5. Surface Hardness Tests.
6. Deflection Tests.
D. Certificates: Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this section.
1. Base-mounted centrifugal pumps.

2. Line-mounted pumps.
3. Accessories.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals
A. Design analysis and calculations shall show NPSH calculations for centrifugal pumps.
B. Equipment and performance data consisting of pump curves gallons (liters) per minute versus total
head in feet (meters) per rpm shall be provided for each type of centrifugal pump.
C. Equipment foundation data shall be submitted for centrifugal pumps.

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and
nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One set of mechanical seals for each pump.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Pumps:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett.
c. Burks Pumps, Inc.; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
d. Gould Pumps, Inc.
e. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
f. PACO Pumps.
g. Patterson Pump Co.
h. Peerless Pump Co.
i. Taco Incorporated.
j. WILO SE.

B. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall
not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall
be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
A. Certificates for pumps and accessories shall show conformance with the referenced standards
contained in this section. Pumps provided shall conform to ISO 5199 and ISO 2858 standards for
centrifugal pumps and to requirements specified herein.
B. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.
C. Pump casings shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, seasoned cast iron with a design working pressure of
minimum 1.5 times system’s operating pressure, or the minimum specified rating whichever is
greater. Casings shall be single or double volute with flanged piping connections conforming to
ASME B16.1, MSS SP-51, MSS SP-86 and ISO 7005-2 Class 125 psi.
D. Motors: Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed
motors. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B, except Design
C where required for high starting torque or equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 60034
parts 1 to 30. Include built-in, thermal-overload protection, grease-lubricated ball bearings and
terminal blocks. Select each motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance
curve.
E. Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to IEEE 112,
Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors"
according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Pump impeller assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1.
G. Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling or closed coupling.
Flexible member shall be a tire shape in shear, or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of
chloroprene materials and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric
connector and shall not transmit sound, vibration, or end thrust.
H. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel bedplate, multiribbed for maximum rigidity,
with adequate number of grout holes and grout air vents, and with drip rim and drain tapping.
I. Mechanical seals shall be balanced or unbalanced, as necessary to conform to specified service

requirements. Mechanical seals shall be constructed in a manner and of materials particularly
suitable for the temperature service range and chemical analysis of water being pumped. Materials
of construction shall include AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel, solid tungsten-carbide
rotating-seal face, and Buna-N vinylidene-fluoride-hexafluoropropylene, EPT, or
tetrafluoroethylene seals. Seal construction shall not require external source cooling for pumped-
fluid service temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250 deg. F). Seal pressure rating shall be suitable
for maximum system hydraulic conditions.
J. Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball or roller type with full provisions for the mechanical and hydraulic
radial and thrust loads imposed by any normal service condition. Bearings shall be manufactured
from vacuum-degassed or processed-alloy steel. Thrust bearings shall be secured to the shaft by

threaded collar and locknut. Double-row ball or roller bearings shall be self-aligning. Bearings
shall have an L-10 rated life of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be provided
with grease supply and relief fittings located at bottom of bearings.
K. Factory finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint shall be applied to factory-assembled and tested units
before shipping. Special coating shall be applied for pumps exposed to outdoor and other corrosive
environment.
2.3 CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, back-pull-out,

radially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure subject to suit
system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of volute, and
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung,
single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft extension with bronze sleeve and neoprene slinger; for flanged
connection pumps.
5. Shaft: Stainless-steel shaft close coupled to motor shaft; for threaded connection pumps.
6. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and
flexible bellows and gasket.
7. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with supporting legs as integral part of motor
enclosure.
2.4 FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted,

back-pull-out, radially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure
subject to suit system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C
(225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of volute,
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, and integral feet or other means on
volute to support weight of casing and attached piping. Casing shall allow removal and
replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung,
single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and
flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed without
removing pump or motor.
7. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
8. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing, coupling
guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed motors.
9. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.

2.5 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating, cast-iron body and
end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers;
bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or field-fabricated support.
B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating, cast-iron body,
pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve
features.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation.
1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with HI1.4.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before setting. Do
not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with
small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 19 to 38 mm between pump
base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling
faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after grout
has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-1.2
“Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions”, and HI1.3 "Rotodynamic
Centrifugal Pumps for Design and Application”.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place.
After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.
D. Install non-slam check valve and throttling or globe valve on discharge side of pumps or install
triple-duty valves, contractor’s option, on discharge side of pumps.
E. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of end-suction pumps.
F. Install basket type strainer and shut off valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of pumps between pump casing and valves.
H. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping around each
pump.
I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
J. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
K. Ground equipment.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and the
Contract Documents.
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction marked on
pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids are free
to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound or drag, until
cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where applicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept at
operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.
10. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves open, steps
are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.
F. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for detailed requirements for
testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15186 - STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes condensate pumps for low-pressure steam systems.
A. Head-capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut-off. Curves shall be relatively flat for
closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so that the design capacity falls to the
left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to the right in operation, without
approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation and unstable operation. Select pumps
for open systems so that required net positive suction head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive
head available (NPSHA). Deviations within 3 percent of maximum efficiency are permissible,
provided the lesser efficiency is not less than the scheduled efficiency.
B. Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size to be non-overloading at any point on the head-capacity
curve including one pump operation in a parallel pumping installation.
C. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the
casing or less than 15 percent than the published minimum diameter of the casing will be rejected.
D. Acceptable maximum impeller diameter calculations shall not be based on percentage of impeller
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings for pumps shall be submitted in accordance with Part 3,
"Execution," of this Section.
1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other
anchorages.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
B. Product Data: The following shall be submitted:
1. Equipment and performance data including certified performance curves and rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final impeller
dimensions; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating
point on curves.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS 15186 / Page 1 of 5

C. Test Reports: The following tests shall be submitted from the manufacturer prior to shipping the
pump from the factory:
1. Hydraulic Tests.
2. Efficiency Tests.
3. Vibration Tests.
4. Output Efficiency.
5. Surface Hardness Tests.
6. Deflection Tests.
D. Certificates: Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance with the
referenced standards contained in this section.
1. Base-mounted centrifugal pumps.

2. Accessories.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals
A. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test steam condensate pumps to comply with HI 1.1-1.2,
"Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions," and HI 1.3, " Rotodynamic
(Centrifugal) Pump Applications," and HI 14.6, "Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance
Acceptance Tests."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
B. Store steam condensate pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.7 COORDINATION
Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Steam Condensate Pumps:

a. Federal Pump Corp.
b. ITT Corporation; Domestic Pump Division.
c. Skidmore Pump.
e. Weil Pump Company, Inc.
f. Weinman; Div. of Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.
2.2 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, packaged, electric-drive pump units; with receiver, pumps,

controls, and accessories suitable for operation with low-pressure steam condensate.
B. Configuration: Floor-mounting, duplex unit with receiver and float switches; rated to pump 100
deg C (212 deg F) steam condensate.
1. Receiver: Floor-mounting, close-grained cast iron or welded steel; with externally adjustable
float switches and flanges for pump mounting.
2. Pumps: Regenerative turbine; close coupled; permanently aligned; bronze fitted, low NPSH;
and with mechanical seals and independent pump control circuit for each pump; and base or
flange mounted on receiver.
3. Factory Wiring: Between pumps and float switches, for single external electrical connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation.
B. Examine rough installation of steam condensate piping.
3.2 STEAM CONDENSATE PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to HI 1.4 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Install pumps on concrete bases. Anchor pumps to bases using inserts or anchor bolts.
E. Install thermometers and pressure gages.

3.3 CONNECTIONS
C. Install inlet strainer and valved bypass to drain at system return connection.
D. Install check valve, shutoff valve, and throttling valve at pump discharge connections for each pump
unit.
E. Install pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping connections.
F. Install full-size vent piping, terminating in 180-degree elbow at point above highest steam system
connection outside building, or as indicated.
G. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
H. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
I. Ground equipment.

3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and commissioning.
B. Verify that steam condensate pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions and the
Contract Documents.
D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Clean strainers.
F. Set steam condensate pump controls.
G. Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation.
H. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
2. Set float switches to operate at proper levels.
3. Set throttling valves on pump discharge for specified flow.
4. Check motors for proper rotation.
5. Test pump controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
6. Replace damaged or malfunctioning pump controls and equipment.
I. Start steam condensate pumps according to manufacturer's written startup instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain steam condensate pumps. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15189 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Heating, hot-water piping (closed-loop system).

2. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
3. Heating, steam and condensate piping.
4. Steam and condensate piping for humidifiers.
1.3 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One manual bypass feeder and one automatic dosing system on each system
with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment manually through bypass feeder when required or indicated by
test and automatically through electronic solid-state controller and feeding pumps.
B. Closed-Loop, Heating Steam and Condensate Piping: Lead-lag switch controls the sequence of
boilers and introduces the chemical to the boiler through a bypass feeder.
1. Chemical feed pump introduces sequestering agent and base from solution tank into
feedwater line close to each boiler, with minimum of one pump per boiler. Use agitator as
required.
2. Pump oxygen scavenger feed from solution tank into feedwater tank. Use agitator as
required.
3. Feed carbon dioxide, neutralizing amine from solution tank directly into feedwater line close
to boiler, or filming amine into steam header. Use agitator as required.
4. Conductivity controller samples boiler water on timed cycle and operates solenoid blowdown
valve.
C. Open-Loop Systems for Humidifiers: PVC tubing with hole to feed chemical.
1. Conductivity controller samples sump water when activated by pump and operates solenoid
bleed-off valve in line to drain.
A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of scale and
biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a hazard to
operating personnel or the environment.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 15189 / Page 1 of 8

B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project site,
HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics,
operating personnel capabilities, and specified requirements.
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling to sustain
the following water characteristics:
a. pH: 8.5 to 10.5.

b. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year
penetration:
1) Ferrous: 0 to 2.
2) Brass: 0 to 1.
3) Copper: 0 to 1.
c. Total Iron as Fe++ to be less than 1.0 ppm.

d. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 degrees F) and 52 deg. C
(125 deg. F.).
e. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by
fouling factor 0.0005.
f. Microbiological Limits:
1) Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000
oragnisms/mL.
2) Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100
organisms/mL.
3) Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
4) Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
5) Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
2. Steam and Condensate Piping System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion,
total suspended solids, and fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Boiler Water TDS: Not more than 3500 ppm.

b. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).
c. Total Alkalinity: 500 to 1200 mg/L Calcium Carbonate.
d. Hydroxide Alkalinity: 200 mg/L, minimum.
e. Bicarbonate Alkalinity: 250 mg/L, minimum.
f. pH: 10.5 to 11.5.
3. Small, Open Systems for Humidifiers: Maintain system essentially free of scale, total
suspended solids, and fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).

b. pH: 7.5 to 8.5.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Pumps.
2. Chemical solution tanks.
3. Agitators.
4. Control equipment and devices.
5. Test equipment.

6. Chemicals.
7. Filters.
8. Chemical feeders.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project
site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical treatment
equipment required for this Project.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Chemical: Furnish quantity approval to 100 percent of amount installed for one year
operation.
2. Chemical: Furnish sufficient chemicals based on entire volume of chilled water system
including external chilled water distribution network served by this system.
3. Chemical: For system volume refer to Expansion Tanks Schedule shown on mechanical
drawings.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum conditions in
the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the cooling, chilled-
water piping, heating, hot-water piping, steam and condensate piping and equipment. Services and
chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, including
the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.

6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. HVAC Water-Treatment Products:

a. Anderson Chemical Co., Inc.
b. Aquazur.
c. Betz Dearborn, Inc.
d. Harmsco Industrial Filters.
e. Metro Group., Inc.; Metropolitan Refining Div.
f. Nalco Chemical Co.
g. Pulsatrol Control System.
h. Stewart-Hall, Div. of the Rectorseal Corp.
i. Vivendi.
2.2 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel shutoff valve
on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: 19 L (5 gal.).
2. Working Pressure: 1210 kPa (175 psig).
B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe, weight, charging syringe, and clip.
C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended chemical with
25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.

2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V, 50 Hz, single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.
D. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque

polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level switch.
2. Capacity: 189 L (50 gal.).
E. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.
1. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V, 50 Hz, single-phase motor.

2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
F. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for
connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.

G. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment,
built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light, output to control circuit,
and recorder.
H. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive; impulse
contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1. Rotating-disc type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 860 kPa (125 psig).
2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
3. At least six-digit totalizers.
4. 220-V ac.
I. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclosure with
220-V, continuous-duty coil.
J. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full range, and
mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
K. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing with heat
fusion.
L. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and polytetrafluoroethylene
seats and seals.
M. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element.
2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for testing pH,
total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity and for calcium
hardness field tests.
B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with piping, valves,
and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in
the test coupon assembly.
1. Two- station rack for closed-loop systems.
2.4 CHEMICALS
A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with
piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove
grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH,
corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
E. Heating Steam and Condensate Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce hardness and
prevent feedline congestion and to provide alkalinity, oxygen scavenger, carbon-dioxide neutralizer,
and filming amines.

F. Open-Loop Piping Chemicals Serving Humidifiers: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling, corrosion
inhibitor, and biocide nonoxidizing.
2.5 HOT-WATER/CHILLED-WATER FILTRATION UNIT
A. Filtration Unit: Stainless-steel housing and polypropylene filter with polypropylene core.
B. Replaceable Filter Media: Compatible with antifreeze and water-treatment chemicals.
C. Filter Media for Sediment Removal Service: Rated at 98 percent efficiency for 20-micrometer
particulate.
D. Pressure Drop through the Filter Cartridge: Not to exceed 5 psig (35 kPa) at design-flow rate when
clean, and 15 psig (104 kPa) when filter is dirty.
E. Size: Constantly filter 1 percent of system’s total circulation.
2.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
A. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically feeding chemicals and bleeding the
system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations. Automatic chemical feed systems
shall automatically feed chemicals into the chilled water based on varying system conditions.
Chilled water quality at selected locations as directed by The Engineer shall be automatically
monitored by the system.
B. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled materials of construction including ferrous, and red
and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling. Corrosion rate
of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year penetration; ferrous, 0 to 2; copper and
brass, 0 to 1. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 deg. F) and 52 deg. C (126 deg. F). Heat
exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by fouling factor 0.0005.
C. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved proprietary compound
suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which will cause or enhance bacteria/corrosion
problems or mechanical seal failure due to excessive total dissolved solids. Shot feed manually.
Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment laboratory, taking into consideration
residual and temperature effect on pump mechanical seals.
D. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range of 8.0 to 10.0.
E. Pot Feeder: Bypass type for chemical treatment schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge) heads, 20 mm system
connections and large neck opening for chemical addition. Feeders shall be 7.6 L (2 gallon)
minimum size for hot water heating systems and 18.9 L (5 gallon) for chilled water systems.
F. Filtration Unit For Closed Loop Systems: Stainless-steel housing and polypropylene filter with
polypropylene core, filter media shall be compatible with glycol and water-treatment chemicals used
in the system. Filter media for sediment removal service shall be rated at 98 percent efficiency for
20-micrometer particulate and shall be sized to constantly filter 1 percent of system’s total
circulation. Maximum pressure drop of 13.8 kPa at design flow rate when clean, and maximum
pressure drop of 172 kPa when dirty. A constant flow rate valve shall be provided in the piping to
the filter. Inlet and outlet pressure gages shall be provided to monitor filter condition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical treatment
needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
B. The chilled and condenser water shall be analyzed a minimum of once a month from the date of
substantial completion until the final handover by the installer water treatment company.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping containers. Store in
designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and hazardous spills.
D. Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge systems according to the
manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Engineer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 16 Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.
D. Ground equipment.

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned,
flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for
water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results
are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it
has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has
been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow
test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results are
obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five weeks, and prepare
certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where applicable, comply
with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.
3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two separate water
analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining water quality within
performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit
written reports of water analysis.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least eight hours of training.

2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts inventory and
supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

SECTION 15191 - FUEL OIL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes diesel fuel piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AST: Aboveground storage tank.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe
and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
E. FPM: Vinylidene fluoride-hexafluoropropylene copolymer rubber.
F. FRP: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic.
G. UST: Underground storage tank.
A. Maximum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 3-psig (21-kPa) fuel-oil supply pressure at oil-fired

appliances.
B. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise indicated, minimum pressure requirement

for fuel oil piping is 1035 kPa (150 psig).
C. Seismic Performance: Factory-installed support attachments for AST shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫دة ا‬
‫زل‬ ‫”ا و‬
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
FUEL OIL PIPING 15191 / Page 1 of 19

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,
and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Also include, where applicable, rated
capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
1. Piping specialties.
2. Valves: Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected
models.
3. Each type and size of fuel-oil storage tank. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
4. Fuel-oil storage tank accessories.
5. Fuel-oil storage tank piping specialties.
6. Fuel-oil storage tank pumps.
7. Fuel-oil transfer pumps.
8. Fuel maintenance system.
9. Liquid-level gage system.
10. Leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility fuel-oil piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations,
sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment
guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location
of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50).

2. For fuel-oil storage tanks and pumps, include details of supports and anchors.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For fuel-oil piping and equipment indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of anchors and seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
3. Detail fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, and
attachments of the same to building structure.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping is shown and
coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks are shown and coordinated
with other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For ASTs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
assembled components or on calculation.
H. Welding certificates.
I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
K. Maintenance Data: For fuel oil transfer pumps to include in emergency operation and maintenance
manuals.
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency and marked for intended location and application.
D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel oil piping materials, installation,
inspection, and testing.
E. Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code," and NFPA 31, "Installation
of Oil Burning Equipment," for fuel oil piping materials, components, installations, inspection, and
testing.
A. Lift and support fuel-oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or supporting points, as shown on
Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks unless empty.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging the coating and to protect from
direct sunlight.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of fuel-oil storage tanks and flexible, double-containment piping and related equipment
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Storage Tanks: Failures include, but are not limited to structural failures including cracking,
breakup, and collapse when used for storage of fuel oil at temperatures not exceeding 150
deg F (66 deg C):
2. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over

Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Oil Shutoff Valves:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.

b. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; A Subsidiary of American Meter Company.
a. Anderson, Greenwood & Co.; Kunkle Valve Div.

b. Fulflo Specialties Co.
c. IMI Cash Valve, Inc.
d. Webster Heating.
3. Oil Safety Valves:
a. Suntec Industries, Inc.

b. Webster Heating.
c. Anderson Greenwood; Division of Tyco Flow Control.
4. Fuel Oil Transfer Pumps:
a. Tuthill Corp.; Tuthill Pump Div.

b. Viking Pump, Inc.
c. Webster Heating.
d. DESMI INC./Rotan Pumps.
e. Haight Pumps; Division of Baker Mfg.
f. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corporation.
g. Suntec Industries Incorporated.
5. Metallic Connectors:
a. American Flexible Hose Co., Inc.

b. Flexicraft Industries.
c. FLEX-ING, Inc.
d. Hose Master, Inc.
e. Metraflex Company (The).
f. Proco Products, Inc.
g. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
h. Unaflex.
6. Pressure Relief Valves:
a. Anderson Greenwood; Division of Tyco Flow Control.

b. Fulflo Specialties, Inc.
c. Webster Fuel Pumps & Valves; a division of Capital City Tool, Inc.
7. Emergency Shutoff Valves:
a. Ameron International; Fiberglass Pipe Group.

b. Conley Corporation.
c. EMCO Wheaton; a Gardner Denver Company.

d. Environ Products, Inc.
e. OPW.
8. Mechanical Leak Detector:
a. FE Petro, Inc.
b. Red Jacket Pumps; a division of Veeder-Root.
9. Fuel Oil Tanks:
a. Containment Solutions, Inc.

b. Xerxes Corporation.
10. Piping Specialties:
a. EBW, Inc.
b. Environ Products, Inc.
c. Morrison Bros. Co.
d. OPW.
e. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corporation.
f. Universal Valve Company.
11. Submersible Fuel Oil Pumps:
a. FE Petro, Inc.
b. Red Jacket Pumps; a division of Veeder-Root.
12. Liquid-Level Gage System
a. Caldwell Systems Corporation.

b. Clawson Tank Company.
c. EBW, Inc.
d. Highland Tank & Manufacturing Company, Inc.
e. INCON, Inc.
f. King Engineering Corp.
g. Krueger Sentry Gauge.
h. Pneumercator Inc.
i. Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corporation.
j. Rochester Gauges, Inc.
k. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.
l. Uehling Instrument Company.
m. Venture Measurement Company, LLC.
13. Leak Detection and Monitoring System
a. Caldwell Systems Corporation.

b. Containment Solutions, Inc.
c. EBW, Inc.
d. Gems Sensors Inc.
e. Highland Tank & Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. INCON, Inc.
g. In-Situ, Inc.
h. MSA; Instrument Div.
i. Perma-Pipe, Inc.
j. Pneumercator Inc.
k. Raychem Corp; Tyco Electronics Corporation.

l. Tuthill Corporation; Tuthill Transfer Systems; Sotera Systems.

m. Veeder-Root; a Danaher Corporation Company.
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 40, black.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, for butt and socket welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or ASME B16.21
nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,

adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
A. Flexible Connectors: Comply with UL 567.
1. Metallic Connectors:
a. Listed and labeled for aboveground and underground applications by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze or stainless-steel, wire-
reinforcing protective jacket.
c. Minimum Operating Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
d. End Connections: Socket, flanged, or threaded end to match connected piping.
e. Maximum Length: 30 inches (762 mm.)
f. Swivel end, 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum operating pressure.
g. Factory-furnished anode.
B. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
C. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.
2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).
7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for fuel oil.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.5 MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See valve schedule in Part 3 for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply
with UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: minimum 150 psig (1035 kPa).

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule.
5. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: minimum 150 psig (1035 kPa).

2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in the valve schedule.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in the valve schedule.
2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES
A. Pressure Relief Valves: Comply with UL 842.
1. Listed and labeled for fuel-oil service by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
4. Seat and Seal: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
7. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
8. Relief Pressure Setting: 60 psig (414 kPa).
B. Oil Safety Valves: Comply with UL 842.
jurisdiction.
2. Body: Brass, bronze, or cast steel.
3. Springs: Stainless steel.
4. Seat and Diaphragm: Nitrile rubber.
5. Orifice: Stainless steel, interchangeable.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Baked enamel.
7. Manual override port.
9. Maximum Outlet Pressure: 3 psig (21 kPa).
C. Emergency Shutoff Valves: Comply with UL 842.
jurisdiction.
2. Single poppet valve.
3. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
4. Disk: FPM.
5. Poppet Spring: Stainless steel.
6. Stem: Plated brass.
7. O-Ring: FPM.
8. Packing Nut: PTFE-coated brass.
9. Fusible link to close valve at 165 deg F (74 deg C).
10. Thermal relief to vent line pressure buildup due to fire.
11. Air test port.
12. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
D. Mechanical Leak Detector: Comply with UL 842.
jurisdiction.
2. Body: ASTM A 126, cast iron.
3. O-Rings: Elastomeric compatible with fuel oil.
4. Piston and Stem Seals: PTFE.
5. Stem and Spring: Stainless steel.
6. Piston Cylinder: Burnished brass.
7. Indicated Leak Rate: Maximum 3 gph (3 mL/s) at 10 psig (69 kPa).
8. Leak Indication: Reduced flow.

2.7 DUPLEX FUEL-OIL TRANSFER PUMP SETS
A. Description: Comply with HI M109.
jurisdiction.
2. Type: Positive-displacement, rotary type.
3. Impeller: Steel gear with crescent.
4. Housing: Cast-iron foot mounted.
5. Bearings: Bronze, self-lubricating.
6. Shaft: Polished steel.
7. Seals: Mechanical.
8. Base: Steel.
9. Pressure Relief: Built in.
10. Discharge Check Valve: Built in.
B. Drive: V-belt with guard, gear reducer, or direct close coupled.
C. Controls:
1. Run pumps to maintain minimum manifold pressure with outdoor-air temperature less than
60 deg F (16 deg C).
2. Run pumps on seven-day schedule.
3. Stage pumps on pressure at a common supply manifold.
4. Alternate pumps to equalize run time.
5. Alarm motor failure.
6. Manual reset dry-run protection. Stop pumps if fuel level falls below pump suction.
7. Deenergize and alarm pump locked rotor condition.
8. Alarm open circuit, high and low voltage.
9. Indicating lights for power on, run, and off normal conditions.
10. Interface with automatic control system to control and indicate the following:
a. Start/stop pump set when required by schedule, fuel-fired appliance operation, day
tank level control, or weather conditions.
b. Operating status.
c. Alarm off-normal status.
D. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055.
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will
not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices
and connections specified in electrical Sections.
E. Piping Furnished with Pumps: Steel with ferrous fittings and threaded or welded joints.
F. Strainers Furnished with Pumps: Duplex, basket type with corrosion-resistant-metal-screen baskets.
G. Capacities and Characteristics: as per design requirements.
2.8 SUBMERSIBLE FUEL-OIL PUMPS
A. Description: Comply with UL 79, UL 87, and UL 343.

jurisdiction.
2. Impeller: Turbine.
3. Housing and Volute: Cast iron.
4. Bearings: Bronze, self-lubricating.
6. Shaft: Polished steel.
7. Suspension Piping: Telescoping to accommodate tank diameter and depth of bury.
8. Base: Steel.
9. Pressure Relief: Built in.
10. Discharge Check Valve: Built in.
11. Drive: Direct, close coupled.
B. Controls: Pump controller panel complying with UL 353 and UL 508C and with interlock and
terminals for connections to fuel-oil-burning equipment and diesel-driven emergency generators.
1. Run pumps to maintain minimum manifold pressure with outdoor-air temperature less than
60 deg F (16 deg C).
2. Run pumps on seven-day schedule.
3. Stage pumps on pressure at a common supply manifold.
4. Alternate pumps to equalize run time.
5. Alarm motor failure.
6. Manual reset dry-run protection. Stop pumps if fuel level falls below pump suction.
7. Deenergize and alarm pump locked rotor condition.
8. Alarm open circuit, high and low voltage.
9. Indicating lights for power on, run, and off normal conditions.
10. Interface with automatic control system to control and indicate the following:
a. Start/stop pump set when required by schedule, fuel-fired appliance operation, day
tank level control, or weather conditions.
b. Operating status.
c. Alarm off-normal status.
C. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055.
2. Thermal-Overload Protection: Motor-winding temperature sensor.
3. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices
and connections specified in electrical Sections.
D. Capacities and Characteristics: as per design requirements.
2.9 FRP FUEL-OIL AST
A. Description: Horizontal, FRP UST; UL 1316, double wall, with interstitial space and integral,
hydrostatic, leak-detection and monitoring system.
B. Construction: Fabricated with fiberglass-reinforced polyester resins; suitable for operation at

atmospheric pressure.
C. Capacities and Characteristics: as per design requirements.

2.10 FUEL-OIL AST ACCESSORIES
A. Tank Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter; bolted, flanged, and gasketed; centered
on top of tank.
B. Tank Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter; bolted, flanged, and gasketed; on top and
at side of tank.
C. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top of tank, for fill, supply, return, vent, sounding, and gaging.
Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.
D. Striker Plates: Inside tank, on bottom below fill, vent, sounding, gage, and other tube openings.
E. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation.
F. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder inside tank, anchored to top and bottom, and located as indicated.
Include reinforcement of tank at bottom of ladder.
G. Supply Tube: Extension of supply piping fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above
tank bottom and cut at a 45-degree angle (1:1 slope).
H. Sounding and Gage Tubes: Extension of fitting into tank, terminating 6 inches (150 mm) above tank
bottom and cut at a 45-degree angle (1:1 slope).
2.11 FUEL-OIL STORAGE TANK PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Fitting Materials: Cast iron, malleable iron, brass, or corrosion-resistant metal; suitable for fuel-oil
service.
1. Surface, Flush-Mounted Fittings: Waterproof and suitable for truck traffic.

2. Aboveground-Mounted Fittings: Weatherproof.
B. Locking Fill Boxes: Flush mounting, with locking-type inner fill cap for standard padlock and
threaded fill-pipe connection.
C. Supply and Sounding Drop Tubes: Fuel-oil supply piping or fitting, inside tank, terminating 6 inches
(150 mm) above bottom of tank, and with end cut at a 45-degree angle (1:1 slope).
D. Pipe Adapters and Extensions: Compatible with piping and fittings.
E. Suction Strainers and Check Valves: Bronze or corrosion-resistant metal components.
F. Foot Valves and Antisiphon Valves: Poppet-type, bronze or corrosion-resistant metal components.
G. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
H. Metal Manholes: 22-inch- (560-mm-) minimum diameter frame and cover. Furnish manhole units
of adequate size for access to fittings if size is not indicated.
I. Monitoring Well Caps: Locking pipe plug and manhole.

2.12 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM
A. Description: Calibrated, liquid-level gage system complying with UL 180 with floats or other
sensors and remote annunciator panel.
B. Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-tank-level alarms, fuel
indicator with registration in gallons (liters), and overfill alarm. Include gage volume range that
covers fuel-oil storage capacity.
C. Controls: Electrical, operating on 220 V ac.
2.13 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Hydrostatic System: Comply with UL 1238.
1. Calibrated, leak-detection and monitoring system with brine antifreeze solution, reservoir
sensor, and electronic control panel to monitor leaks in inner and outer tank walls.
2. Include fittings and devices required for testing.
3. Controls: Electrical, operating on 220 V ac.
2.14 FUEL OIL
A. Fuel Oil: ASTM D 396, Grade No. 2.
B. Diesel Fuel Oil: ASTM D 975, Grade No. 2-D, general-purpose, high volatility.
2.15 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (152 mm) wide and 4 mils
(0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30
inches (762 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for fuel-oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written
instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger
in both directions than supported unit.
embedded.
6. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install underground fuel-oil piping buried at least 18 inches (457 mm) below finished grade.
1. If fuel-oil piping is installed with less than 12 inches (305 mm) of cover to finished grade,
install in containment piping.
B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining, to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
C. Install double-containment, fuel-oil pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent downward toward fuel-
oil storage tank sump.
D. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward fuel-oil storage tank sump.
E. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls for liquid-tight joints.
F. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping connections to AST.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction in rigid pipe.
H. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
I. Install pressure gage on suction and discharge from each pump.
3.5 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout
are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
I. Comply with requirements for equipment specifications in plumbing and HVAC Sections for
roughing-in requirements.
J. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, or utility spaces; above ceilings; below grade or
floors; and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
K. Prohibited Locations:
1. Do not install fuel-oil piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes,
chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
2. Do not install fuel-oil piping in solid walls or partitions.
L. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
M. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
N. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at final connection to each piece of equipment
and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
O. Do not use fuel-oil piping as grounding electrode.
P. Install basket strainer on inlet side of fuel-oil pump.
Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.
S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual fuel-oil shutoff valves on branch connections to fuel-oil appliance.
B. Install valves in accessible locations.
C. Protect valves from physical damage.
D. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping systems.
E. Identify valves as specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

F. Install oil safety valves at inlet of each oil-fired appliance.
G. Install pressure relief valves in distribution piping between the supply and return lines.
H. Install one-piece, bronze ball valve with hose end connection at low points in fuel-oil piping.
I. Install manual air vents at high points in fuel-oil piping.
3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
is specified.
D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
1. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

2. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and
where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket
concentrically positioned.
3.8 FUEL-OIL AST INSTALLATION
A. Install tank bases and supports.
B. Connect piping and vent fittings.
C. Install ground connections.
D. Install tank leak-detection and monitoring devices.
E. Install steel ASTs according to STI R912.
F. Install insulated and concrete-vaulted, steel ASTs according to STI R942.
G. Fill storage tanks with fuel oil.
A. Pipe hanger and support and equipment support materials and installation requirements are specified
in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: Maximum span, 71 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size,
3/8 inch (10 mm).
2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 71 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10
mm).
3. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 71 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).
4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 118 inches (3000 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13
mm).
5. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 118 inches (3000 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).
6. NPS 4 (DN 100): Maximum span, 118 inches (3000 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch (16
mm).
C. Support vertical steel pipe at each floor and at spacing not greater than 15 feet (4.5 m).
3.10 FUEL-OIL PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Submersible Pumps:
1. Suspend pumps from supply piping and anchored to bottom of tank.
B. Transfer Pumps:
1. Install pumps with access space for periodic maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, and accessories.
2. Set pumps on and anchor to concrete base.
C. Install two-piece, full-port ball valves at suction and discharge of pumps.
D. Install mechanical leak-detector valves at pump discharge.
E. Install suction piping with minimum fittings and change of direction.
F. Install vacuum and pressure gage, upstream and downstream respectively, at each pump to measure
the differential pressure across the pump.
3.11 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building where indicated.
3.12 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install leak-detection and monitoring system. Install alarm panel inside building where indicated.
1. Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks: Install probes or use factory-installed integral probes
in interstitial space.
2. Double-Containment, Fuel-Oil Piping: Install leak-detection sensor probes in fuel-oil storage
tank containment sumps and at low points in piping or sensor cable probes in interstitial
space of double-containment piping.
3. Install liquid-level gage.

3.13 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
B. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment having threaded pipe connection.
C. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
D. Connect piping to equipment with ball valve and union. Install union between valve and equipment.
E. Install flexible piping connectors at final connection to burners or oil-fired appliances that must be
moved for maintenance access.
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplates and
signs on or near each service regulator, service meter, and earthquake valve.
1. Text: In addition to identifying unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of
operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards
and improper operations.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Tanks: Minimum hydrostatic or compressed-air test pressures for fuel-oil storage tanks that
have not been factory tested and do not bear the ASME code stamp or a listing mark
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
a. Double-Wall Tanks:
1) Inner Tanks: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
2) Interstitial Space: Minimum 3 psig (20.7 kPa) and maximum 5 psig (34.5 kPa),
or 5.3-in. Hg (18-kPa) vacuum.
b. Where vertical height of fill and vent pipes is such that the static head imposed on the
bottom of the tank is greater than 10 psig (69 kPa), hydrostatically test the tank and
fill and vent pipes to a pressure equal to the static head thus imposed.
c. Maintain the test pressure for one hour.
2. Piping: Minimum hydrostatic or pneumatic test-pressures measured at highest point in

system:
a. Fuel-Oil Distribution Piping: Minimum 5 psig (34.5 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes.
b. Suction Piping: Minimum 20-in. Hg (68 kPa) for minimum 30 minutes.

c. Isolate storage tanks if test pressure in piping will cause pressure in storage tanks to
exceed 10 psig (69 kPa).
3. Inspect and test fuel-oil piping according to NFPA 31, "Tests of Piping" Paragraph; and
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Test liquid-level gage for accuracy by manually measuring fuel-oil levels at not less than
four different depths while filling tank and checking against gage indication.
5. Test leak-detection and monitoring system for accuracy by manually operating sensors and
checking against alarm panel indication.
6. Start fuel-oil transfer pumps to verify for proper operation of pump and check for leaks.
7. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
8. Bleed air from fuel-oil piping using manual air vents.
D. Fuel-oil piping and equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.16 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain fuel oil pump sets. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least four hours of training.
3.17 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Containment Conduit, where needed for pipes less than 12 inches (305 mm) deep: Steel pipe with
wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel
piping.
B. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.
3.18 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Aboveground fuel-oil piping shall be the following:
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Steel pipe, steel or malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel pipe, steel fittings, and welded or flanged joints.
3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL FUEL-OIL SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:
1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following:
1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:

SECTION 15194 - FUEL GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fuel gas piping, specialties, and accessories within the building.
A. Gas System Pressures: Three pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 13.8 kPa (2.0 psig)
but not more than 34.5 kPa (5.0 psig), and is reduced to secondary pressures of more than 3.45 kPa
(0.5 psig) but not more than 13.8 kPa (2.0 psig), and is reduced again to pressures of 3.45 kPa (0.5
psig) or less.
B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Liquefied Petroleum Gas, LPG:
a. Nominal Heating Value: 100.0 MJ/cu. m (2675 Btu/cu. ft.).

b. Nominal Specific Gravity: 1.6.
C. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:
a. Piping and Valves: 125 psig (862 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
2. For Piping Containing Liquid:
a. Piping between Shutoff Valves: 350 psig (2413 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
b. Piping Other Than Above: 250 psig (1723 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
c. Valves and Fittings: 250 psig (1723 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig (34.5 kPa) unless otherwise indicated.
D. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
E. Seismic Performance: Vaporizers and storage container supports shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫دة ا‬
‫زل‬ ‫”ا و‬.
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
FUEL GAS PIPING 15194 / Page 1 of 30

A. Welding: Piping shall be welded in accordance with qualified procedures using performance
qualified welders and welding operators. Procedures and welders shall be qualified in accordance
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. Welding procedures qualified by others,
and welders and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted by
ASME B31.1. The Engineer shall be furnished with a copy of qualified procedures and a list of
names and identification symbols of qualified welders and welding operators. The welder or
welding operator shall apply his assigned symbol near each weld he makes as a permanent record.
B. Standard Products: Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and shall essentially duplicate items that have
been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Asbestos or products containing
asbestos shall not be used. Manufacturer's descriptive data and installation instructions shall be
submitted for approval for compression-type mechanical joints used in joining dissimilar materials
and for insulating joints. Valves, flanges and fittings shall be marked in accordance with MSS SP-
25.
C. Provide an interface panel to communicate and transmit data between the gas system and BMS. The
interface panel shall be capable of communication with the specified BMS system.
1.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A. Testing and commissioning shall be performed by a third party specialist agency with a minimum
10 years experience in testing and commissioning of LPG systems to perform the testing and
commissioning activities of LPG system along with leak detection, testing and commissioning and
interface with fire alarms, BMS and hood exhaust fire extinguishing systems.
B. Installer Qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of the specialist agency. Submit
information on 3 recently completed projects. Submit list of proposed equipment
C. Report: Provide complete signed and certified testing and commissioning report to the Engineer
showing all test measurements, calculations and list of instruments used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties
2. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected
models.
4. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and meter
bars and supports.
5. Pressure regulators. Include pressure ratings and capacities.
6. Dielectric fittings.
7. Storage containers.
8. Transport truck unloading specialties.
9. Pumps.
10. Vaporizers.
A. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations,
sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment
guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location
of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: [1/4 inch per foot (1:50)].

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure
regulator assembly.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For LPG piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and
coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that vaporizer, air mixer, storage container
supports, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15071
"Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:
H. Welding certificates.
I. Field quality-control reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel gas specialties and accessories to include in emergency
operation, and operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components and Devices: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by
testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
D. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."
E. FM Standard: Provide components listed in FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide" if specified to
be FM approved.
F. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified

Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.
G. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if specified
to be UL listed.
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from drips in existing gas piping
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Handle cautiously to avoid spillage
and ignition. Notify fuel gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by Installer with proper
precautions and do not leave on premises from end of one day to beginning of next day.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,
and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store pipes and tubes with protective PE coating to avoid damaging coating and protect from direct
sunlight.
D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight.
1.9 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished
surfaces.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Portable multi-gas detector; Provide two portable multi-gas detectors at any LPG distribution site to
be used for periodic testing at the facility. As a minimum, the following characteristics need to be
ensured;
1. Simultaneously monitor and display up to five atmospheric hazards.
2. Adaptable to a variety of applications, with an extensive selection of user-settable field

options
3. Passcode function to prevent unauthorized modifications of the instrument’s settings
4. Characteristics;
a. Temperature: -4 to +122°F / -20 to +50°C
14 to +104°F / -10 to +40°C (PID)
b. Alarms: Visual, vibrating, audible (95 dB)
Low, High, STEL, TWA, OL (over limit)
c. Tests: Sensor integrity, circuitry, battery and audible/visual alarms
on activation, battery (continuous)
d. Ratings: EMI/RFI: Complies with EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
IP 65/66
e. Certifications and Approvals: Class I, Div. 1, Gr. A, B, C, D
American Bureau of Shipping - Toxic & PID
models

ATEX: CE II 1 G
Ga Ex ia IIC T4*
CE II 2 G - IR model only
Ex d ia IIC T4*
IECEx: Ga Ex ia IIC T4*
Ex d ia IIC T4* - IR model only
f. Warranty: Full two year warranty including sensors
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Appliance Connector Valves, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) and Smaller:
a. American Valve.
b. B&K Industries, Inc.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
d. Jomar International, Ltd.
e. McDonald: A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
f. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
g. Newman Hattersley, Ltd.; Specialty Valve Div.
h. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
2. Gas Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller:
a. BMI Canada, Inc.

b. Crane Valves.
c. Grinnell Corp.
d. Jomar International, Ltd.
e. McDonald: A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
f. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.
g. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
h. Nibco, Inc.
3. Plug Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger:
a. Flow Control Equipment, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Co., Inc.
c. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.
d. Olson Technologies, Inc.; Homestead Valve Div.
e. Walworth Co.
4. Automatic Gas Valves:
a. ASCO General Controls.

b. ASCOLECTRIC, Ltd.
c. Automatic Switch Co.
d. Dungs: Karl Dungs, Inc.
e. Eaton Corp.; Controls Div.
f. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
g. GPS Gas Protection Systems, Inc.
h. Honeywell, Inc.
i. Johnson Controls, Inc.
5. Electrically Operated Gas Valves:
a. ASCO General Controls.

b. Atkomatic Valve Co., Inc.
c. Automatic Switch Co.
d. Dungs: Karl Dungs, Inc.
e. Eclipse Combustion Inc.
f. Goyen Valve Corp.
g. Magnatrol Valve Corp.
h. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Climate & Industrial Controls Group; Skinner Valve Div.
6. FM-Listed Earthquake Valves:
a. Quakemaster Seismic Safety Systems.
7. UL-Listed Earthquake Valves:
a. Energy Pacific.
b. Safe T Quake Corp.
c. Seismic Safety Products, Inc.
d. Seismic Valve Co., Inc.
e. Trembler-Tech, Inc.
f. Westcoast Seismic Protection Co., Ltd.
8. Service Meters:
a. American Meter Co.

b. Badger Meter, Inc.; Utility Products Div.
c. Equimeter, Inc.
d. National Meter.
e. Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div.
9. Service-Meter Bars:

b. Lyall: R. W. Lyall & Co., Inc.
c. McDonald: A. Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
d. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div.
e. National Meter.
f. Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div.
10. Service-Meter Bypass Fittings:
a. Lyall: R. W. Lyall & Co., Inc.

b. Williamson: T. D. Williamson, Inc.
11. Pressure Regulators:

b. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
c. Equimeter, Inc.
d. Fisher Controls International, Inc.
e. Maxitrol Co.
f. National Meter.
g. Richards Industries, Inc.; Jordan Valve Div.
h. Schlumberger Industries; Gas Div.
12. Appliance Pressure Regulators:
a. Canadian Meter Co., Inc.

b. Eaton Corp.; Controls Div.
c. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Co.
e. SCP, Inc.
13. Pumps:
a. Blackmer; a Dover Resources company.

b. Corken, Inc.; a unit of IDEX Corporation.
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
2.3 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and
threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including
bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and
spiral-wound metal gaskets.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground, and stainless steel
underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,

adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:
a. Stainless-steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.
c. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
d. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel
pipe to steel pipe.
e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped
with anode.

A. Flexible Piping Joints:
1. Approved for LPG service.

2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.
3. Minimum working pressure of 250 psig (1723 kPa) and 250 deg F (121 deg C) operating
temperature.
4. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of
minimum 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.
5. Maximum 36-inch (914-mm) length for liquid LPG lines.
B. Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa).
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)
C. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.
1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.

2. Nitrile seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
D. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-
1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
E. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.
B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

2.6 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and
UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: 250 psig (1723 kPa) minimum.

3. Socket ends for brazed joints.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch (25
mm) and smaller.
6. Valves 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG"
indicated on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply
with ASME B16.33.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG"
permanently marked on valve body.
D. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with
ASME B16.38.

2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.
E. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL
9. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

2. Plug: Bronze.
3. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
4. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
5. Pressure Class: 125 psig (862 kPa).
G. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.

2. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
3. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
4. Stem Seal: Compatible with LPG.
5. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
H. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126 Class B.

2. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.
3. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.
4. Stem Seal: Compatible with LPG.
5. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
I. Valve Boxes:
1. Cast-iron, two-section box.

2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.
3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in
diameter.
4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.
5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head and
with stem of length required to operate valve.
2.7 MOTORIZED GAS VALVES
A. Hydrostatic Relief Valves: Comply with NFPA 58.
1. Operating Pressure: 350 psig (2413 kPa)

2. Body: Brass.
3. Spring: Stainless steel.
4. Disc and Seat: Nitrile.

5. Brass body and stainless-steel, spring-operated valve with resilient rubber disc seat and
protective cap.
6. Factory set and tested.
7. Listing: Valves listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Valve shall reseat after relieving pressure.
B. Automatic Gas Valves: Comply with ANSI Z21.21.
1. Body: Brass or aluminum.

2. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber.
3. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel.
4. Normally closed.
5. Visual position indicator.
6. Mechanical operator for actuation by appliance automatic shutoff device.
C. Electrically Operated Valves: Comply with UL 429.
1. Pilot operated.
2. Body: Brass or aluminum.
3. Seats and Disc: Nitrile rubber.
4. Springs and Valve Trim: Stainless steel.
5. 220-V ac, 50 Hz, Class B, continuous-duty molded coil, replaceable.
6. NEMA ICS 6, Type 4, coil enclosure.
7. Normally closed.
8. Visual position indicator.
2.8 GAS SHUT-OFF VALVE FOR KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
A. Master gas control valve:
1. Bronze body, packless, single Buna- N seat, explosion proof, solenoid operated, normally
closed, UL listed, automatic reset, 0 psi operating pressure differential, 80-90 V DC.
B. Control station:
1. Push-button station mounted in 2-gang box, key operated, normally open switch and a
normally closed push-button mounted in a stainless-steel faceplate for flush installation
inscribed with "GAS VALVE CONTROL" on top, "OPEN" over keyhold, "CLOSE" over
push-button, 230 V.
C. Relay panel:
1. Momentary contact operated relay and rectifier mounted in NEMA Type 1 enclosure, 2 pole
normally open, 3 wire control, with 230 V coil. Interconnect with the ventilator hood fire
protection system. When the hood sprinklers activate, the main gas solenoid valve shall be
closed by the flow switch located in the kitchen ventilator hood control panel.
2.9 EARTHQUAKE VALVES
A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.
1. Permits remote shut-off of fuel gas flow to kitchens.

2. Type: Manually opened, electrically held open, automatic closing upon power interruption.
Pneumatic operator is not permitted.
3. Performance: Shall shut bubbletight within 1 second after power interruption.
4. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

5. Maximum Operating Pressure: [7 psig (48 kPa)].
6. Cast-aluminum body with stainless-steel internal parts.
7. Nitrile-rubber, reset-stem o-ring seal.
8. Valve position, open or closed, indicator.
9. Composition valve seat with clapper held by spring or magnet locking mechanism.
10. Level indicator.
11. End Connections: Threaded for valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for valves
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
12. Earthquake Sensor: UL listed, mechanical device which automatically breaks 120 Volt
electrical circuit to safety shut-off valve when earthquake occurs allowing valve to
automatically close. Valve shall close within 5 seconds after sensor is subjected to horizontal
sinusoidal oscillation having a peak acceleration of 2.94 m/sec2 (0.3G) and a period of 0.4
seconds. The valve shall not shut off when the sensor is subjected for 5 seconds to horizontal,
sinusoidal oscillations having: a peak acceleration of 3.92 m/sec2 (0.4G) with a period of 0.1
second; a peak acceleration of 0.78 m/sec2 (0.08G) with a period of 0.4 second; peak
acceleration of 0.78 m/sec2 (0.08G) with a period of 1.0 second. Sensor shall be corrosion-
resistant for outside location.
2.10 GAS DETECTION PANEL AND DETECTORS
A. Electronic, DDC control type flame proof, wall mounted gas detection and alarm unit with remote
gas detectors.
B. LCD display unit, 4 channels with 3 separate alarm levels per channel. Built-in relay modules with
compatible control logic for kitchen hood fire extinguishing system, main fire alarm control panel
and BMS.
C. Battery back-up, 230 V AC, 50 HZ, with 24 V DC built in transformer. 4 – 20 MA, output signal
per channel.
D. Gas detectors shall be electronic type, flame and explosion proof type construction in IP 66 or IP 55
enclosures. Complete with mounting brackets. Detectors shall be compatible with Gas Detection and
Alarm Unit.
2.11 SERVICE METERS
A. Diaphragm-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1 or ANSI B109.2 as applicable.
1. Case: Die-cast aluminum.

2. Connections: Steel threads.
3. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric.
4. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating.
5. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure.
6. Meter Index: Liters.
7. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant.
8. Remote meter reader compatible.
10. Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.5-inch wg (124 Pa).
11. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent.
B. Service-Meter Bars:

1. Malleable- or cast-iron frame for supporting service meter.

2. Include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o-ring seal, and factory- or field-installed
dielectric unions.
3. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service-meter bar dimensions match service-meter
connections.
C. Service-Meter Bypass Fittings:
1. Ferrous, tee, pipe fitting with capped side inlet for temporary LPG supply.
2. Integral ball-check bypass valve.
2.12 PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Single stage and suitable for LPG.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for regulators
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
5. All pressure regulators with upstream pressure exceeding 2 psi shall be provided with factory
mounted overpressure safety device according to ANSI Z21.80/CSA 6.22. Pressure regulators
with separate overpressure protection devices shall be factory preassembled and supplied to
the field as a unit.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve
port.
5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed 150
percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve
port.
5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed 150
percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.

9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.

10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).
D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
6. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
7. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa).
A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B. Dielectric Unions:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C. Dielectric Flanges:
1. Description:
a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C).
d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-
joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1. Description:
a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
2.14 GAS TANK
A. Description: Factory fabricated, complying with requirements in NFPA 58 and ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code and bearing the ASME label. Tanks shall be rated for 250-psig (1723-kPa)
minimum working pressure.
1. Construction: Welded, fine grain, high strength, normalized steel plate of 434 MPa to 517
MPa tensile strength and 276 MPa minimum yield strength. Tank nozzles and accessories
shall be best quality drop forged steel. Tank to be shot blasted and painted at factory with 1
coat anti-corrosion primer and 2 coats flat white machine epoxy enamel.
2. Inspection: Welds shall be X-ray controlled. Tank shall be inspected by official, government
recognized inspectors for raw material, manufacturing operations, X-raying and final
hydrostatic and pneumatic tests. Test certificate shall be submitted with tank.
3. Liquid outlet and vapor inlet and outlet connections shall have shutoff valves with excess-
flow safety shutoff valves and bypass and back-pressure check valves with smaller than
0.039-inch (1-mm) drill-size hole to equalize pressure. Liquid-fill connection shall have
backflow check valve.
a. Connections: Color-code and tag valves to indicate type.
1) Liquid fill and outlet, red.

2) Vapor inlet and outlet, yellow.
4. Level gage shall indicate current level of liquid in the container. Gages shall also indicate
storage container contents; e.g., "Butane," "50-50 LPG Mix," or "Propane."
5. Pressure relief valves, type and number as required by NFPA 58, connected to vapor space
and having discharge piping same size as relief-valve outlet and long enough to extend at
least 84 inches (2130 mm) directly overhead. Identify relief valves as follows:
a. Discharge pressure in psig (kPa).

b. Rate of discharge for standard air in cfm (L/s).
c. Manufacturer's name.
d. Catalog or model number.
6. Container pressure gage.

7. Regulators: Tank shall be supplied complete from the factory with first and second stage
regulators. Regulators to be sized for tank capacity and shall; be provided with necessary
strainers and vents and securely mounted to tank.
8. For outdoor installation, exposed metal surfaces mechanically cleaned, primed, and painted
for resistance to corrosion.
9. Sunshade: Tank shall be provided from the factory with incorporated sunshade of approved
design, with steel cradle supports welded to tank.
10. Protection: Filler valve, service valve, and pressure gage shall have a special hood to protect
them from mechanical damage. Other components and accessories shall be protected at the
factory against damage during shipment or installation.
11. Ladders for access to valves more than 72 inches (1830 mm) aboveground.
12. Stainless-Steel Nameplate: Attach to aboveground storage container or to adjacent structure
for underground storage container.
a. Name and address of supplier or trade name of container.

b. Water capacity in gallons and liters.
c. Design pressure in psig (kPa).
d. Statement, "This container shall not contain a product having a vapor pressure in
excess of 215 psig (kPa) at 100 deg F (37.8 deg C)."
e. Outside surface area in sq. ft. (sq. m).
f. Year of manufacture.
g. Shell thickness in inches (mm).
h. Overall length in feet (m).
i. OD in feet (m).
j. Manufacturer's serial number.
k. ASME Code label.
13. Straps and anchors for tie-down slab.
14. Asphalt-based coating for corrosion protection.

15. Container connections and valves protected in manway at top of storage container.
16. Manway equipped with ventilation louvers.
2.15 TRANSPORT TRUCK UNLOADING FACILITY
A. Description: Comply with requirements in NFPA 58.
1. Support structure consisting of a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) steel channel or 6-by-4-inch

(150-by-100-mm) rectangular steel tubing, a minimum of 36 inches (914 mm) above and
below grade.
2. Liquid-fill and vapor-return, quick-disconnect fittings.
3. Liquid and vapor shutoff valves with hydrostatic relief valves mounted between the quick-
disconnect fittings and shutoff valves.
4. Excess-flow safety shutoff valve in vapor-return line.
5. Backflow check valve in liquid-fill line.
6. Remote emergency shutoff valve station with underground cable to the vapor emergency
shutoff valve.
2.16 PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, duplex, positive-displacement, belt drive.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Ductile-iron casing with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet.
2. Internal Pressure Relief Valve: For pump protection in addition to the external pressure relief
valves.
3. Impeller: Carbon or composite vane in cast-iron rotor.
4. Pump Shaft: Carbon steel.
5. Seal: Mechanical with Buna-N o-ring.
6. Pump Bearings: Ball bearings with grease fittings.
7. Baseplate: Bent carbon-steel channel or structural channel.
C. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Motors"
2. Motor Speeds: Single.
3. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.
4. Class I, Division 1, Group D requirements per NFPA 70.
D. Factory-Installed Piping and Specialties:
1. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B; Schedule 40 black steel with welded fittings
and joints or Schedule 80 for threaded malleable-iron fittings and joints.
2. Piping Specialties for Each Pump:
a. Bypass valve.
b. Isolation valves.
c. Unions for each connection.
d. Check valve.
e. Basket strainer.
f. Pressure gages for suction and discharge connections.
g. Hydrostatic relief valve.
h. Pilot-operated, pressure-regulating valve.
E. Braided-jacket flexible connectors for suction and discharge connections.
F. Pump and Piping Finish: For outdoor installation, exposed metal surfaces mechanically cleaned,
primed, and painted for resistance to corrosion.
G. Controls:
1. Explosion-proof controls enclosure.

2. Magnetic starter package with automatic alternator.
3. Pressure-activated start and stop.
4. Lag pump starts if lead pump fails.
5. Audible and visual indication of pump failure.
H. Capacities and Characteristics: as per design requirements
2.162.17 VAPORIZERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested vaporizer with heat exchanger sealed
pressure-tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent, liquid fuel supply and
vapor connections, and controls. Assembly shall be FMG labeled and comply with NFPA 58 and
NFPA 70.
B. Fabricate base and attachment to vaporizers with reinforcement strong enough to resist vaporizer
movement during a seismic event when steel base is anchored to a concrete base.
C. Casing:
1. Mineral-fiber insulation, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) thick, surrounding the heat
exchanger.
2. Integral one-piece skid with forklift access holes.
3. Lifting lugs on top of vaporizer.
4. Flue rain cap and bird screen.
5. Sheet metal jacket with screw-fastened closures and baked-enamel protective finish.
6. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.
7. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4, enclosure housing control panels for
LPG-fired vaporizers. Explosion-proof control compartment construction required for
electric vaporizers.
D. LPG Liquid and Vapor Circuit Specialties:
1. Y-type strainer with drain valve at inlet.

2. Vaporizer coil safety pressure relief valve.
3. Vaporizer coil blowdown valve.
4. Vapor outlet isolation valve.
5. Pressure gages, a minimum of 2-1/2 inches (63 mm) in diameter, at liquid inlet and vapor
discharge. Gages shall have operating-temperature ranges so normal operating range is at
approximately 50 percent of full range.
6. Inlet safety solenoid valve to close with off-normal operation alarm.
7. Backflow check valve in bypass around inlet safety solenoid valve.
8. Liquid carryover or float-type safety shutoff switch.
9. LPG Vapor Filter: Steel shell designed and manufactured per ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1; factory mounted on vaporizer discharge. Shells larger
than 5 inches (125 mm) shall be ASME "U" stamped. Fill with stainless-steel, woven-mesh
coalescing element to remove 99 percent of particles larger than 10 microns. 250-psig (1723-
kPa) minimum working pressure. Finish with corrosion-resistant coating for an exterior
application. Include factory-mounted and -piped, differential pressure gage with gage cocks
in and out, and minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) full-port, ball-type drain valve.
E. Indirect-Type, Direct-Fired Heat Exchanger:
1. Description: ASME-rated and -stamped, LPG, vaporizer vessel with a replaceable,

immersion-type, electric heating element.
2. Heating Element Operating Controls:
a. Operating controls shall maintain safe operating conditions. Safety controls limit
operation of the element. Microprocessor-based control system integrates safety and
operating controls.
b. Operating Vapor-Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to control heating
element.
c. High-Pressure Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above
maximum design pressure.
d. Alarm Bell and Rotary Beacon: Factory mounted on control panel with silence
switch; shall sound alarm for out-of-normal conditions.
e. Control Transformer: 115-V maximum control voltage.
F. Building Management System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building
management system to monitor and control set points and display vaporizer status and alarms.
G. Capacities and Characteristics: as per design requirements
2.172.18 CONCRETE BASES
A. Description: Precast, reinforced concrete base, made of 21 MPa minimum, 28 day compressive
strength concrete, and measuring 100 mm thick and 100 mm larger in each dimension than
supported item, unless otherwise indicated.
2.182.19 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT PIPING
A. Belowground piping carrying fuel shall be secondarily contained, unless otherwise indicated.
Piping system shall be of double-wall construction with the internal pipe being the product pipe and
the exterior pipe being fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) containment pipe as defined herein.
B. Piping system shall be a factory manufactured piping system designed in accordance with ASME
B31.3 and NFPA 30. The containment piping shall allow for complete inspection of the product
piping before the containment piping is sealed.
C. Containment piping shall be chemically compatible with the type of fuel to be handled. Containment
piping shall be non-corrosive, dielectric, non-biodegradable, and resistant to attack from microbial
growth. Containment piping shall be capable of withstanding a minimum 35 kPa air pressure.
Containment piping shall be evenly separated from the primary pipe using pipe supports which are
designed based on pipe size, pipe and fuel weight, and operating conditions.
D. The supports shall be constructed of the same material as the primary pipe and shall be designed so
that no point loading occurs on the primary or exterior pipe. Supports shall be permanently attached
to the product pipe either by tack welding or by an adhesive. The exterior piping and supports shall
allow for normal draining as well as the installation of any necessary leak detection equipment or
cables. Supports shall be designed and installed to allow for pipe movement of both the product
piping and the exterior piping without causing damage to either. Containment piping shall be
capable of withstanding H-20 highway loading.
2.192.20 GAS DETECTION SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers shall appear on all major components.
2. Connection Diagrams shall be submitted showing a complete conduit and wiring layout for
the equipment to be furnished, including AWG size and type of wire, and number of
conductors and connections to the equipment.
3. As-Built Drawings shall provide current factual information including deviations and
amendments to the drawings, and concealed and visible changes in the work.
4. Manufacturer's Catalog Data shall be submitted for the combustible gas and oxygen deficient
atmospheres detection systems including special tools necessary for the maintenance of the
equipment. Spare parts data shall be submitted consisting of one set of fuses of each type
and size required, and a hydrogen gas calibration kit.
5. Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists shall include manufacturer's style or catalog numbers,
specification and drawing reference numbers, independent testing laboratory reports, and
related descriptive matter on the devices to be installed.
B. Electromagnetic Compatibility: Electrical and electronic systems shall be designed to operate

without causing electromagnetic interference to, or malfunctioning due to electromagnetic
interference from, other systems or equipment.
C. Control Unit
1. General Requirements: Control unit shall be 4 channel, operating over a temperature range
of 0 to 51 degrees C. Each control unit shall be capable of monitoring 4 detectors. Control
unit shall be housed in a weatherproof cabinet suitable for wall mounting. Relays shall be
solid state type. Rectifiers shall be solid state type.
2. Control Circuits: Circuits shall be solid state, with plug-in type circuit boards, in a housing
suitable for non-hazardous locations.
3. Power Supply Component: Transformer, rectifier, resistors, charger, batteries and other
required power-supply components shall be incorporated in the control unit, or a separate
power-supply unit may be furnished and installed as approved for the application.
4. Indicator Light and Reset: Each control unit shall have buttons for test, and indicator lights
for Power, Malfunction, and Alarm. Indicator lamps shall be color coded as follows: Power
(green), Malfunction (yellow) and Alarm (red). Zero, Alarm, and Calibration settings shall
be adjustable.
5. Malfunction Circuits: Sensing circuits shall be monitored by individual malfunction circuits.

Open circuit shall activate malfunction light and operate relays for remote warning signal
and lights.
6. Alarm Unit shall be arranged to operate alarm relays, activating audible and visible alarms,
and continue operation until reset by a keyed switch in the unit cabinet. Reset key shall not
be removable until conditions have returned to normal. Cabinet shall be locked by the same
key used to reset the alarm relays. Audible alarm and red rotating alarm beacon shall be
provided as indicated or directed by The Engineer.
D. Detectors:

1. General: samples of detectors shall be submitted for approval.
2. Circuit Design: Detector circuit design shall be suitable for the types and numbers of
detectors, as approved, and detector circuit current shall not exceed ratings of the individual
detectors and associated relays.
3. Combustible Gas Detector: Combustible gas detector shall be diffusion type catalytic sensor
in a housing suitable for the environment, and shall be intrinsically safe for use in Class I,
Division 1. Output signal shall be 4-20 mA. Operating range shall be minus 40 to 74 degrees
C.
4. Oxygen Detector: Oxygen detector shall be a paramagnetic cell. Minimum shelf life shall
be 6 months. Output signal shall be 4-20 mA. Operating range shall be 4 to 33 degrees C,
10 to 100 percent relative humidity. Measurement shall be adjustable through a range of 0
to 25 percent oxygen-in-air, and actuation level shall be set at 19.5 percent oxygen.
E. Power Supply: Primary power supply shall be a 230-volt, 50 Hz source. An alternate source of
power, arranged to become energized automatically within at least ten seconds upon loss of normal
power, in accordance with NFPA 110 shall be provided.
F. Control system shall be equipped with all necessary interface communication to BMS on Bacnet
protocol.
2.202.21 GAS SAMPLING SYSTEM
A. System description: a sequential sampling system for detection of LPG in the different spaces. The
system shall detecs inflammable gas and oxygen in air by applying the detection principle of
catalytic combustion method and galvanic cell method respectively and transmits representative
alarm by means of relay contacts.
B. General:
1. Name of the manufacturer and the serial numbers shall appear on all major components.
2. Connection Diagrams shall be submitted showing a complete conduit and wiring layout for
the equipment to be furnished, including type of wire, and number of conductors and
connections to the equipment.
3. Record Drawings shall provide current factual information including deviations and
amendments to the drawings, and concealed and visible changes in the work.
4. Manufacturer's Catalog Data shall be submitted for system components including special
tools necessary for the maintenance of the equipment.
5. Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists shall include manufacturer's style or catalog numbers,
specification and drawing reference numbers, independent testing laboratory reports, and
related descriptive matter on the devices to be installed.
C. The system shall comprise a wall mounting weatherproof steel cabinet housing the sampling pump,
pneumatics, solenoid valves, flame arrestors & system electronics. The gas samples shall be
sequentially extracted from each monitoring point and analysed LPG. The system shall include
automatic sensing and clearing of blocked lines together with internal inflammable gas detector to
monitor inside continuously.
D. Controller shall provide display of the gas concentration at each measuring point, with LED’s
indicating sampling and alarm status, and 3 alarm relays.
E. Sample lines: DN 8 316SS tubing.
F. Detectors:
1. General: samples of detectors shall be submitted for approval.
2. Circuit Design: Detector circuit design shall be suitable for the types and numbers of
detectors, as approved, and detector circuit current shall not exceed ratings of the individual
detectors and associated relays.
3. Inflammable Gas Detector: inflammable gas detector shall be Galvanic cell method type.
Measuring accuracy shall be within ±5% of full scale.
4. Oxygen Detector: Oxygen detector shall be Catalytic combustion method type. Measuring
accuracy shall be within ±0.7% of oxygen concentration.
G. Power Supply: Primary power supply shall be a 230-volt, 50 Hz source. An alternate source of
power, arranged to become energized automatically within at least ten seconds upon loss of normal
power shall be provided.
H. Control system shall be equipped with all necessary interface communication to BMS on Bacnet
protocol.
2.212.22 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils
(0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30
inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel gas to premises or section of piping.
B. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 to determine that LPG utilization devices
are turned off in piping section affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.
B. Install underground, LPG piping buried with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of cover below
finished grade. The minimum cover shall be increased to 18 inches (460 mm) if external damage to
the pipe from external forces is likely to result. Comply with requirements in Section 31200002300
"Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
1. If LPG piping is installed with less than 12 inches (300 mm) cover below finished grade,
install it in containment conduit.
C. Install underground, PE, LPG piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
F. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on vaporizers, air mixers, regulators, and valves may be
flanged or threaded to match the equipment.
G. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are
specified in Section 23051915122 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.""
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of LPG piping.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout
are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress
of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Do not conceal piping in walls and non-accessible ceilings. Install gas piping only in accessible
locations and surface mount at kitchen hoods.
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I. Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-
in requirements.
M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-
meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where
condensate is subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long
and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection
devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap and flame arrester.
O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,
and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed LPG piping and
piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded
joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate
with weatherproof vent cap.
1. Above Accessible Ceilings: LPG piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in
accessible spaces without containment conduit.
2. In Floors: Install LPG piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-
place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures
such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete
slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Install LPG piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be
open to space above cover for ventilation.
4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical
damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker
barriers.
5. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install LPG piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes,
chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.
b. Do not install LPG piping in solid walls or partitions.
Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.
R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to
each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
T. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.
U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are
specified in Section 23051915122 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping.""
W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 23051715051 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVACMechanical Piping."
X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements
for sleeve seals specified in Section 23051715051 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVACMechanical
Piping."
Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
3.5 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground.
B. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground.
C. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at
second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.
D. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.
E. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen
in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.
F. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from
service meters.
G. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.
H. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies.
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing,
aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for
servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
3.7 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

C. Threaded Joints:
1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID of pipe.
4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading
is specified.
D. Welded Joints:
1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding
operators.
2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and
where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Ch. 22, "Pipe and Tube."
F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for LPG service. Install
gasket concentrically positioned.
G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions
complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.
H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. DN 25 (NPS 1) and Smaller: Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 and DN 50 (NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2): Maximum span, 1.8 m; minimum rod size,
10 mm.
4. DN 65 to DN 90 (NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size,
13 mm.
5. DN 100 to DN 150 (NPS 4 to NPS 6): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 16 mm.
6. DN 150 (NPS 6) and larger: Maximum span, 4.5 m; minimum rod size, 16 mm.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding
conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72
inches (1830 mm) of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to
inlet of each appliance.
3.10 TRANSPORT TRUCK UNLOADING FACILITY
A. Install transport truck unloading in a cast-in-place concrete base, 48 inches (1220 mm) square by 36
inches (914 mm) deep. Set top of concrete base at least 6 inches (150 mm) above finished grade.
B. Install remote emergency shutoff station with cable release in an accessible location, a minimum of
25 feet (7.6 m) and a maximum of 100 feet (30 m) away from transport truck unloading.
C. Install at least two 6-inch- (150-mm-) diameter metal bollards set in and filled with concrete on both
sides of transport truck unloading. Bollard length shall be at least 48 inches (1220 mm) above and
below grade, with concrete encasement a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm) in diameter.
3.11 STORAGE CONTAINER INSTALLATION
A. Fill storage container to at least 80 percent capacity with LPG.
B. Install piping connections with swing joints or flexible connectors to allow for storage container
settlement and for thermal expansion and contraction.
C. Ground containers according to NFPA 780. Grounding is specified in Section 26411313100

"Lightning Protection for Structures.""
D. Set storage container on concrete ballast base large enough to offset buoyancy of empty storage
container immersed in water.
E. Install tie-down straps over container anchored in ballast base and repair damaged coating.
F. Backfill with a minimum coverage for underground or mounded storage containers according to
NFPA 58.
G. Backfill with pea gravel as required in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
G. Backfill with compacted soil or coarse sand (ASTM C33; fine aggregate) according to NFPA 58
and as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork" or as required by the local authority having
jurisdiction. The backfill shall be free from rocks and abrasives that may damage the tank coating.
The water should be prevented from accumulating above the basement slab and shall be drained.
H. Install cathodic protection for storage container. Cathodic protection is specified in

Section 26420013110 "Cathodic Protection."
3.12 VAPORIZER INSTALLATION
A. Install vaporizer with access space for periodic maintenance.
B. Set vaporizers on and anchor to concrete base.

C. Connect liquid line from pump set, and vapor supply to distribution piping.
D. Install backup connection from vapor space of container to inlet of pressure-regulating valve at
vaporizer discharge to bypass the vaporizer during maintenance. Install shutoff valves to change
source from vaporizer to storage container.
A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign
on or near each service meter, pressure regulator, and specialty valve.
1. Text: In addition to name of identified unit, distinguish between multiple units, inform
operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn
of hazards and improper operations.
2. Refer to Division 15 Section Mechanical Identification for nameplates and signs.
B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (305 mm) below finished grade,
except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.14 PAINTING
A. Use materials and procedures in Division 9 Section "Painting," "Exterior Paint Schedule" Article,
"Ferrous Metal" Paragraph, "Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish" Subparagraph.
B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).
d. Color: Gray.
C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars,
earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or
protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (gloss).
d. Color: Gray.
D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by
procedures to match original factory finish.
3.15 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger
in both directions than supported unit.
embedded.
6. Use 3000-psig (20.7-MPa), 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement.
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 and NFPA 54 and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are obtained.
E. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and specialties.
F. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
G. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
H. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.17 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and safety
devices.
3.18 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain LPG equipment.
3.19 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground LPG liquid piping shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40 steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings
with protective coating for steel piping.
B. Aboveground LPG liquid piping shall be the following:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings and
threaded and seal welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel
piping.
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and
welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for
steel piping.
C. Underground LPG vapor piping shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings
with protective coating for steel piping.
D. Aboveground LPG vapor piping shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical
couplings.
E. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
3.20 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following:
D. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded
or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.21 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa)
AND LESS THAN5 PSIG (34.5 kPa)
A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:
D. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat
underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
E. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded
or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.22 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Underground Vapor Piping:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, lubricated plug valves.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Cast-iron, lubricated plug valves.
3.23 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller at service meter shall be the following:
B. Valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger at service meter shall be the following:
1. Bronze plug valve.
C. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following:
D. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger shall be the following:
1. Bronze plug valve.
E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:

SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water distribution piping from locations indicated to fixtures and equipment
inside building.
1. Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters, thermometers, pressure gages, and
fittings.
2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building.
B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and water
distribution piping.
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.
D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic piping materials:
1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

2. NP: Nylon.
3. PB: Polybutylene.
4. PE: Polyethylene.
5. PP: Polypropylene.
6. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Service Entrance Piping: 1100 kPa (160 psig).
2. Water Distribution Piping: 2000 kPa (290 psig).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s literature and data for piping and fittings
WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 15411 / Page 1 of 10

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
C. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
C. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
potable-water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping.
D. Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1
through 9 for potable-water piping and components.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to
Employer.
1. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 12 of each type and size installed.
Include one extra gasket with each coupling.
2. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each type and size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:
1. AWWA C151/A21.51.
2. Cement lining in accordance with AWWA C104/A21.4
3. Push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
C. Plastic pipe and fittings shall bear the following markings in accordance with ASTM F441/F441M:
manufacturer's name, material designation code, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating
in psi or kilopascal, the ASTM F441/F441M and National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of
approval for potable water.
D. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F441/F441M, Schedules 40 and 80.
A.
General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.

2. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
C. Schedule 80, CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F437.
D. Schedule 80, CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F439.
A. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21,
nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
C. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and
Tubing: ASTM F 493.
1. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
D. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
2.4 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for special-duty valves.
C. CPVC Plastic Valves: CPVC plastic body material similar to CPVC plastic piping system with
seats, seals, and other components suitable for potable-water service. Comply with the following:
1. Ball Valves, DN80 (3-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Union type with socket or threaded ends.
2. Butterfly Valves, DN80 (3-Inch NPS) and Larger: Lug type with locking, lever handle.
3. Check Valves, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Ball type with socket ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN100 to DN300 (4- to 12-Inch NPS): Push-on-joint, ductile-iron pipe; standard-pattern,
push-on-joint fittings; and gasketed joints.
D. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:

1. DN40 (1-1/2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
CPVC, Schedule 80 threadedsocket fittings; and solvent cemented joints.
2. DN50 (2-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and CPVC,
Schedule 80 threadedsocket fittings; and solvent cemented joints.
3. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe
and CPVC, Schedule 80 threadedsocket fittings; and solvent cemented joints.
4. DN100 to DN150 (4- to 6-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
5. DN200 (8-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe; CPVC,
Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
6. DN250 and DN300 (10- and 12-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M-09, CPVC, Schedule 80
pipe; CPVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.
E. Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
2. DN65 to DN100 (2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS): ASTM F441/F441M, CPVC, Schedule 80 pipe and
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
C. Plastic gate, globe, ball, butterfly, and check valves may be used with plastic piping.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated for
service entrances into building. Refer to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water service
piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside
building at each service entrance pipe.
C. Ductile-Iron, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C600-05. Install buried piping
between shutoff valve and connection to water service piping with restrained joints. Anchor pipe
to wall or floor at entrance. Include thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A674-05 or ANSI/AWWA

C105/A21.5-05.
D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.
B. Install piping level without pitch.
3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

D. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606.
Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible
or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling
housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.
E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
F. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

G. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both
piping systems.
3.8 ROUGHING-IN FOR WATER METERS
A. Rough-in water piping for water meter installation according to utility company's requirements.
Water meters will be furnished by utility.
B. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Water
meters will be furnished by utility.
C. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 2 Section "Water Distribution" for water meters.
D. Rough-in water piping and install water meters according to utility company's requirements. Refer
to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for water meters.
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, and where indicated. Use ball valves for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and
smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each supply to
plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated. Use ball valves for piping DN50 (2-
inch NPS) and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
D. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each pump
and circulator, and where indicated. Use ball valve for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller and
butterfly valve for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and larger. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Plumbing Specialties" for balancing valves.
E. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of
each pump and circulator, and where indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties"
for calibrated balancing valves.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than
30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support pipe
rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for copper and steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN20 (3/4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3000 mm.
2. DN25 (1-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3000 mm.
3. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-mm minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3000 mm.
4. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm with 10-
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 3000 mm.
8. DN100 and DN125 (4- and 5-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3000 mm with 13-
9. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 3000 m with 16-mm minimum rod
F. Install hangers for CPVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 900 mm with 10-mm
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1500 mm.
2. DN32 to DN50 (1-1/4- to 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with 10-
3. DN65 to DN90 (2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with
13-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1800 mm.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to ANSI/MSS SP-69-2003 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and
connect to the following:
1. Booster Systems: Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures."
4. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 (2-1/2-
inch NPS) and larger.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.
A. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
B. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and
that piping is full of water.
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until it
has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has
been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow
to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
C. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.14 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not
prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651-05 or AWWA C652-02 or as
described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 mg/L
(50 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 mg/L
(200 ppm) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.15 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full
of water.
B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping
during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not operate
water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 550 kPa (80 psig) maximum, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.


SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sanitary drainage and vent piping, and storm drainage piping inside building
and to locations indicated.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from
building.
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building.
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building sewer
piping and inside drainage piping.
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from fixtures
and equipment throughout the building.
E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene polymer, rubber.
3. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
5. PP: Polypropylene
6. RTRP: Reinforced thermosetting resin pipe.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated or required to suit systems operating
pressures:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).

2. Storm Drainage Systems: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 690 kPa (100 psig).
DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING 15420 / Page 1 of 10

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of
withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code
2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For sovent drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
C. Test and Inspection Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, in Part3 of this Section.
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ANSI/ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer"
for plastic sewer piping.
D. Comply with International Plumbing Codes & Standards such as Uniform Plumbing Code "UPC"
and American Society of Plumbing Engineers "ASPE" data books.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to
Employer.
1. Rubber Gaskets for Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger:
8 of each class and size installed.
2. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 8 of each
type and size installed.
3. Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 6 of each
type and size installed.
4. Keyed Couplings, DN100 (4-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 4 of each type and size installed.
5. Keyed Couplings, DN125 (5-Inch NPS) and Larger: 2 of each type and size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service and Extra Heavy classes. Include ASTM
C564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each hub.
C. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2665-09, Schedule 40 or approved BS EN equivalent.
D. PP Mineral Reinforced Low Noise Pipe: DIN EN 1451 with sound level ≤ 10 dB(A) to EN 14366
and DIN 4102 B2 classification for fire resistance.
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: ASTM A74, Service and Extra Heavy classes, hub
and spigot. Include ASTM C564 rubber gasket, with dimensions required for pipe class, for each
hub.
C. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends conforming to ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10-08 or ANSI/AWWA
C153/A21.53-06. Include 2 gasketed ball-joint sections and 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections.
Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron
glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
D. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe patterns.
E. PVC Plastic, Tubular Fittings: ASTM F409 drainage pattern, with ends as required for application.
F. PP Push Fit Fittings with Elastomer Gasket: DIN EN 1451
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
B. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for commonly used joining
materials.
C. Adhesive primer for PVC fittings: ASTM F 656.
1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Solvent cement for PVC fittings: ASTM D 2564.
1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: ASTM A666 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at
least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
G. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C1173-08 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-resistant
metal band on each end.

1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:
a. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C564-08 rubber.

b. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477-08 elastomeric seal.
c. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
d. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket, made
to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe. Include the
following:
a. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C564-08 rubber.

b. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477-08 elastomeric seal.
c. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
2.4 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A674-05 or ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5-

05 polyethylene film, 0.20-mm minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
2.5 VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves. Use valves specified for "Domestic
Water Systems" applications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil and Waste Piping: Use the following:

1. DN32 to DN200 (1-1/4- to 8-Inch NPS): PP low noise pipe, PP and push fit fittings.
2. DN250 to DN375 (10- to 15-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class;
hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. DN32 to DN300 (1-1/4- to 12-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
E. Aboveground and underground Kitchens’ waste: Use the following:

1. DN32 to DN375 (1-1/4- to 15-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class;
F. Underground and Aboveground Vent Piping: Use the following:

1. DN32 to DN300 (1-1/4- to 12-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
G. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

1. DN50 to DN200 (2- to 8-Inch NPS): PP low noise pipe, PP and push fit fittings.
2. DN250 to DN375 (10- to 15-Inch NPS): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class;
H. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:

1. DN80 to DN300 (3- to 12-Inch NPS): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
I. Aboveground, Sewage Force Mains: Use the following:

1. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron, grooved-
end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings.
J. Underground, Sewage-Force-Main: Use the following:
1. DN50 to DN150 (2- to 6-Inch NPS): Ductile-iron pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical- or push-
on-joint fittings; rubber gaskets; and mechanical or push-on joints.
A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball, or butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Use globe valves.
B. Grooved-end butterfly valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping
installation.
3.5 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Division 2 Sections "Sanitary Sewerage" and "Storm Drainage" for sanitary and storm
sewer piping.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections
of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connections
of building storm drains and building storm sewers.
D. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
E. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
F. Ductile-Iron, Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C600-05. Install
buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sewer piping
outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports
at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A674-05 or ANSI/AWWA

C105/A21.5-05.
G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service entrance pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make
installation watertight. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
3.6 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-
sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in
direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings
if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows,
and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not make change in direction of flow greater than 90
degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are
connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and
alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install
required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and
other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.
D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN80 (3-inch
NPS) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS)
and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
E. Install force mains at elevations indicated.
F. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Install engineered, controlled-flow, storm drainage systems in locations indicated. Comply with
standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if slab is
without membrane waterproofing.
I. Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2665.
J. Install underground, PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2321. Provide concrete
protection for pipes installed at depth 1.2 m or less.
3.7 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling
and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D2665.
E. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM D402 for
safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
A. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each pump discharge and where indicated. Use ball valves
for piping DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller. Use butterfly valves for piping DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS)
and larger.
B. Check Valves: Install non-slam type, swing check valve on each pump discharge, downstream from
shutoff valve.
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe hanger and support devices. Install
the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.

2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 30 m
and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer than
30 m.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 30 m.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 30 m or longer. Support pipe
rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 10-mm minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
5. DN200 through DN300 (8- through 12-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1500 mm
with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 3-m lengths may be increased to 3 m. Spacing for fittings is
limited to 1500 mm.
F. Install hangers for steel and ductile-iron piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1. DN32 (1-1/4-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1800 mm; 10-mm minimum rod
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 4.5 m.
7. DN150 (6-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing,4500 mm with 19-mm minimum rod
G. Install hangers for PVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. DN40 and DN50 (1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS): Maximum horizontal spacing, 1200 mm with
10-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
with 22-mm minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 1200 mm.
H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition fitting to
join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated. Refer to Section "Plumbing
Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated. Refer to Section
"Plumbing Specialties."
4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each
connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections DN65 (2-1/2-inch NPS) and
larger.
C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the following:
1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.

2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.
D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
Engineer.
2. During installation, notify Engineer at least 24 hours before inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in presence of Engineer.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Engineer to observe tests specified
below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If Engineer finds that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required
corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by Engineer.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures,
as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each
test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 3.m of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 250 Pa (1-inch wg). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of Engineer or, in absence of such procedures, as
follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before
it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source
and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-based latex
paint.

SECTION 15430 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing specialties for the following:
1. Water distribution systems.

2. Soil, waste, and vent systems.
3. Storm drainage systems.
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following minimum
working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Water Distribution Piping: 2000 kPa (290 psig).

2. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
3. Storm Drainage Piping: 30 kPa (10-foot head of water).
4. Force-Main Piping: 690 kPa (100 psig).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each plumbing specialty indicated. Include rated capacities of selected
equipment and shipping, installed, and operating weights. Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions,
required clearances, and methods of assembly of components; and piping and wiring connections
for the following plumbing specialty products:
1. Vacuum breakers.
2. Backflow preventers.
3. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
4. Water pressure-reducing valves
5. Balancing valves.
6. Water filters.
7. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.
8. Strainers.
9. Outlet boxes and washer-supply outlets.
10. Hose stations.
11. Trap seal primer device
12. Trap seal primer systems.
13. Water hammer arresters.
14. Hose bibbs.
15. Air vents
17. Water meters.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 / Page 1 of 32
18. Digital re-circulating valves.

19. Drain valves.
20. Backwater valves
21. Cleanouts.
22. Floor drains.
23. Trench drains.
24. Channel drainage systems.
25. Garage drains.
26. Roof drains, including planter/flower bed drains
27. Balcony drains.
28. Air-admittance valves.
29. Roof flashing assemblies.
30. Flashing materials.
31. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.
32. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.
33. Grease interceptors.
34. Lint interceptors.
35. Oil interceptors.
36. Inspection and slow down chambers
B. Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For specialties to include in the emergency, operation and
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, dimensional requirements, and characteristics of
plumbing specialties and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other manufacturers'
products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Product Requirements."
B. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to specified
standards.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
E. Comply with NFPA 70, for electrical components.
F. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic potable-
water piping components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on plastic potable-water piping and "NSF-
dwv" on plastic drain, waste, and vent piping.
1.6 COORDINATION
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
B. Coordinate size and location of roof, slabs and structural elements penetrations.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to
Employer.
1. Water Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity not less than 200 percent of amount of each type
and size installed.
2. Operating Key Handles: Furnish one extra key for each key-operated hose bibb and hydrant
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or approved equal
a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.
c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
d. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Rain Bird Corporation.
f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2. Standard: ASSE 1001.

3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80), as required to match connected piping.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.
6. Finish: Rough bronze.
B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products.

d. Legend Valve.
e. MIFAB, Inc.
f. Prier Products, Inc.
h. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.
i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.
j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.
4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.
C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:


b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.
c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
d. Flomatic Corporation.
e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div.
f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
g. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.
4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig (35 kPa) maximum, through middle third of flow range.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
D. Spill-Resistant Vacuum Breakers:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

4. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.
2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers:

a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

d. Honeywell International Inc.
e. Legend Valve.
f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
g. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

4. Body: Bronze.
5. End Connections: Union, solder joint.
B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:



e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)
and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through, vertical-inlet, horizontal-center-
section, and vertical-outlet or vertical flow as necessary.
8. Accessories:
a. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with
flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
C. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:


f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
and larger.
7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.
8. Accessories:
a. ValvesNPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.
b. ValvesNPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with
flanged ends on inlet and outlet.
D. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers:



c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10).
5. Body: Stainless steel.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
E. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:


e. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).
f. Honeywell International Inc.
g. Legend Valve.
h. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
i. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.
j. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
k. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.
F. Carbonated-Beverage-Dispenser, Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:


b. Lancer Corporation.
c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 (DN 8 or DN 10).
6. End Connections: Threaded.
G. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:


c. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water (30-kPa) back pressure.
4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20).

5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm (0.19-L/s) flow.
H. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:


b. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
c. Flomatic Corporation.
d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-
procedure instructions.
2.3 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Description: ASSE 1021, fitting suitable for use with domestic dishwashers and for deck mounting;
with plastic body, chrome-plated brass cover; and capacity of at least 0.32 L/s (5 gpm); and inlet
pressure of at least 35 kPa (5 psig) at temperature of at least 60 deg C (140 deg F). Include 16-mm-
(5/8-inch-) ID inlet and 22-mm- (7/8-inch-) ID outlet hose connections.
B. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
1. Inlet Hose: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID and 48 inches (1200 mm) long.

2. Outlet Hose: 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID and 48 inches (1200 mm) long.
2.4 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A. Water Regulators:


c. Honeywell International Inc.
d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa).
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
NPS 3 (DN 65 and DN 80).
B. Water-Control Valves:

a. CLA-VAL.
b. Flomatic Corporation.
c. OCV Control Valves.
d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Control Valves (Watts ACV).
2. Description: Pilot-operated, diaphragm-type, single-seated, main water-control valve.

3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum with
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior epoxy coating. Include small pilot-control valve,
restrictor device, specialty fittings, and sensor piping.
4. Main Valve Body: Cast- or ductile-iron body with AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, interior
epoxy coating; or stainless-steel body.
a. Pattern: Globe-valve design.

b. Trim: Stainless steel.
and larger.
2.5 BALANCING VALVES
A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


b. Flo Fab Inc.
c. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div.
d. NIBCO Inc.
e. TAC.
f. TACO Incorporated.
2. Type: Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator.
3. Body: Brass or bronze.
4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2 (DN 50).
5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
B. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.
C. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves :


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
e. Hammond Valve.
f. Milwaukee Valve Company.
g. NIBCO Inc.
h. Red-White Valve Corp.
2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP.
4. Size: NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller.

5. Body: Copper alloy.
6. Port: Standard or full port.
8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.
10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.
2.6 WATER FILTERS
A. General: Cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable water of size and at flow rate and pressure
loss indicated. Include housing, fittings, filter cartridges, and cartridge end caps.
B. Wall-Mounting Type: Housing head section with threaded inlet and outlet, mounting bracket, and
removable lower section for 250-mm- (10-inch-) long filter cartridge.
1. Housing Material: Plastic, 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum operating pressure.
2. Cartridge: Activated-charcoal filter media, 250 mm (10 inches), 10-micron-particulate
removable rating.
3. Cartridge: Wound- or molded-fiber filter media, 250 mm (10 inches), 10-micron-particulate
removable rating.
4. Cartridge: Pleated-polypropylene filter media, 250 mm (10 inches), 10-micron-particulate
removable rating.
C. Floor-Mounting Type: Stainless-steel housing rated at 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum operating

pressure.
1. Base Section: Floor-mounting section with inlet and outlet connections and removable top
section for one or more 10-micron-particulate removable-rating cartridges.
2. Connections, DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Threaded.
3. Connections, DN65 (2-1/2-Inch NPS) and Larger: Flanged.
4. Cartridge: Activated-charcoal filter media.
5. Cartridge: Pleated-polypropylene filter media.
6. Cartridge: Stainless steel 316 mesh with 75 micron mesh size.
D. Ultra-Violet (UV) Sterilizing Unit:
1. Unit: To include 304 stainless-steel sterilizing chambers with removable head. UV lamps to
slide into high purity sleeves. Sleeves are attached to chamber head so that they may be easily
removed as a bundle for inspection or cleaning. Flow regulator on discharge line to maintain
flow to ensure an exposure dosage of 30,000 micro-watt-sec/cm². Sterilizer to include high
powered ballast, fuse, power safety switch, all inside white enamel housing with stainless-
steel cover and electrical cord rated for the design flow.
2. Unit: To include UV intensity sensor and meter with safe/unsafe zones to indicate UV below
effective range, mounted on sterilizer housing.
E. Multimedia Sand Filters:
1. Description: Factory-fabricated and -tested, simplex, duplex or triplex] multimedia, sand-

filter system of filter tank(s), media, piping, and controls for removing sediment particles
from water.
a. Tank Construction:
1) Fabricate and label steel filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

2) Fabricate and label FRP filter tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section X, if indicated.
3) Fabricate supports and base and attachment to tank with reinforcement strong
enough to resist filter movement during a seismic event when filter base is
anchored to building structure.
b. Pipe Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded according to

ASME B1.20.1.
c. Steel Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Steel, Class 150 flanges
according to ASME B16.5 or grooved according to AWWA C606.
d. FRP Tank Pipe Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Type A, integral;
Designation F, 150-psig (1.034-MPa) pressure category flanges of grade same as tank
material according to ASTM D 5421.
e. Service Valve(s): Diaphragm type hydraulically operated.
f. Piping: Galvanized steel pipe, galvanized cast-iron fittings and flanged, grooved, or
threaded joints.
g. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) copper water tube, copper-
alloy solder-joint fittings, and brazed, flanged, or grooved joints.
h. Piping: Schedule 80 ABS or PVC pipe and fittings with solvent-cemented joints.
i. Safety Valves: Automatic air vent.
j. Controls for Simplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for control of filter
system flow and backwash cycles; factory-wired for single, external electrical
connection.
k. Controls for Duplex and Triplex Tank System: Automatic, electric time clock for
control of filter system flow and backwash cycles; factory-wired for single, external
electrical connection. System operation shall be continuous with bypass piping and
not more than one tank in backwash cycle at same time.
l. Support: Skid mounting.
2. Capacity and Characteristics, as per design requirements:
a. Filter Design:
1) Filtration Efficiency: 98 percent removal of suspended particles 2 micrometers
and larger from feedwater of listed filtrate design concentrations.
b. Media Tanks: Single with controls, or Multiple with manifolded inlet, outlet, and
drain piping and controls.
c. Each Media Tank:
1) Material: FRP.
2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum, subject to suit system’s
operating pressure.
3) Distribution System: Factory-installed plastic.
d. Filter Media: Graded silica sand.
2.7 TEMPERATURE ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES
A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:


d. Honeywell International Inc.
e. Legend Valve.

f. Leonard Valve Company.

g. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
h. Symmons Industries, Inc.
i. TACO Incorporated.
j. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
k. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-
control handle.
8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.
B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:


b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Leonard Valve Company.
d. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.
5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
6. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.
7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and
adjustable, temperature-control handle.
8. Valve Finish: Polished, chrome plated.
9. Piping Finish: Chrome plated.
10. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with hinged, stainless-
steel door.
C. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


c. Honeywell International Inc.
d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.
e. Leonard Valve Company.
f. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.

4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.
5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

7. Finish: Chrome-plated bronze.
2.8 STRAINERS
A. Y-Pattern Strainers :
with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
and larger.
4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5. Perforation Size:
a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).
b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.062 inch (1.57 mm).
c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.125 inch (3.18 mm).
6. Drain: Pipe plug.
B. Drainage Basket Strainers: Non-pressure-rated, cast-iron or coated-steel body; with bolted flange
or clamp cover and drain with plug.
1. Basket: Bronze or stainless steel with 3.2- or 4.8-mm diameter holes and lift-out handle.
2. Female threaded ends for DN50 (2-inch NPS) and smaller, and flanged ends for DN65 (2-
1/2-inch NPS) and larger.
2.9 OUTLET BOXES
A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes:

following or approved equal.
a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.
c. IPS Corporation.
d. LSP Products Group, Inc.
e. Oatey.
f. Plastic Oddities.
g. Symmons Industries, Inc.
h. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
i. Whitehall Manufacturing; a div. of Acorn Engineering Company.
j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.
4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings
complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.
5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 (DN 15)
copper, water tubing.
6. Drain: NPS 2 (DN 50) standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

7. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- (1500-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses
with female, garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers.
8. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- (1200-mm-) long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose
with hooked end.
B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes :

a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. IPS Corporation.
c. LSP Products Group, Inc.
d. Oatey.
e. Plastic Oddities.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.
4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 (DN 15) or
smaller copper tube outlet.
5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 (DN 15)
copper, water tubing.
2.10 HOSE STATIONS
or approved equal.
1. ARCHON Industries, Inc.

2. Armstrong International, Inc.
3. Cooney Brothers, Inc.
4. DynaFluid Ltd.
5. Leonard Valve Company.
6. Strahman Valves, Inc.
7. T & S Brass.
B. Single-Temperature-Water Hose Stations:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1.

2. Cabinet: Stainless-steel enclosure with exposed valve handle, hose connection, and hose
rack. Include thermometer in front.
3. Hose-Rack Material: Stainless steel.
4. Body Material: Bronze.
5. Body Finish: Rough bronze, chrome plated.
6. Mounting: Wall, with reinforcement.
7. Supply Fittings: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) globe, or ball valve and check valve and NPS 3/4 (DN 20)
copper, water tubing. Omit check valve if check stop is included with fitting.
8. Hose: Manufacturer's standard, for service fluid, temperature, and pressure; 50 feet (15 m)
long.
9. Nozzle: With hand-squeeze, on-off control.
10. Vacuum Breaker:
a. Integral or factory-installed, nonremovable, manual-drain-type, hose-connection

vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer complying with
ASSE 1052.
b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlet.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device

a. MIFAB, Inc.
b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint.
7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome
finished.
2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS
A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

3. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L (DN 20, ASTM B 88M, Type B); copper, water
tubing.
4. Cabinet: Surface-mounted steel box with stainless-steel cover.
5. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power.
a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
6. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001.

7. Number Outlets: as shown on plans
8. Size Outlets: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
2.13 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Water-Hammer Arresters:
a. AMTROL, Inc.
b. Josam Company.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
h. Watts Drainage Products.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.
2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Metal bellows.
4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
2.14 HOSE BIBBS
A. Hose Bibbs:
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.
4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 (DN 15 or DN 20) threaded or solder-joint inlet.
5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).
7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker
complying with ASSE 1011.
8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.
9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.
10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.
11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.
12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.
13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.
14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.
15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.
2.15 AIR VENTS
A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:
1. Body: Bronze.
2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F
(60 deg C).
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) minimum pressure rating.
3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.
4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.
5. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) minimum inlet.
6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.
2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
or approved equal

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.
3. Flex Pression, Ltd.
4. Flex-Weld Incorporated.
5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.
6. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.
7. Metraflex, Inc.
8. Proco Products, Inc.
9. TOZEN Corporation.
10. Unaflex.
11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company.
B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and
ends brazed to inner tubing.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig (1725 kPa).

2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper
tube.
3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.
2.17 WATER METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:

a. AALIANT; a Venture Measurement product line.

b. ABB.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.
d. Carlon Meter.
e. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.
f. Schlumberger Limited; Water Services.
g. Sensus.
2. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C700.

b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure..
c. Application: up to DN 50.
d. Body Design: Nutating disc; totalization meter.
e. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility
company.
f. Case: Bronze.
g. End Connections: Threaded.
B. Turbine-Type Water Meters:

a. AALIANT; a Venture Measurement product line.

b. ABB.
c. Badger Meter, Inc.
d. Hays Fluid Controls.
e. Master Meter, Inc.

f. McCrometer, Inc.
g. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.
h. Schlumberger Limited; Water Services.
i. SeaMetrics Inc.
j. Sensus.
2. Description:
a. Standard: AWWA C701.

b. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
c. Application: DN 50 to DN250.
d. Body Design: Turbine; totalization meter.
e. Registration: In gallons (liters) or cubic feet (cubic meters) as required by utility
company.
f. Case: Bronze.
g. End Connections for Meters NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
h. End Connections for Meters NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
C. Remote Registration System: Encoder type complying with AWWA C707; modified with signal-
transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as required by
utility company.
2.18 DIGITAL RE-CIRCULATING VALVE
or approved equal
a. Armstrong.
B. Description:
1. Standard: ASSE 1017, CSA B125 and CE

2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig (1035-kPa) working pressure.
3. Power: 240 V AC
4. Body Construction: Polymer Electronics Enclosure
5. Valve Construction: Stainless Steel
C. Requirements:
1. Systems with a maximum simultaneous demand less than or equal to 3.8 l/ sec (60 gpm),
provide one DRV40R-BS-DS or an approved alternative acceptable and approved by Ritz
Carlton Operator.
2. Systems up to 7.2 l/sec (115 gpm), provide two DRV40R-BS-DS in parallel or one DRV80R-
BS-DS or an approved alternative acceptable and approved by Ritz Carlton Operator.
3. Systems up to 14.5 l/sec (230 gpm), provide two DRV80R-BS-DS in parallel or an approved
alternative acceptable and approved by Ritz Carlton Operator.
D. Additional Features:
1. +/- 2F temperature control
2. Automatic shut-off of inlet hot water flow upon:
a. Cold water supply failure
b. Power Failure
c. 2nd Level over temperature error
d. Setpoint: Programmable setpoint, hi/lo temp alert.
e. Integral Serial Port: Provide for BrainScan® – Building Automation Systems (BAS),
interface for Bacnet™, LonWorks™ and Web

f. Modbus: Provide Direct interface with BAS utilizing Modbus protocols.

3. Pre-piped Digital Mixing Center (DMC): Consider fully pre-piped DMC models (DMC40-
BS-DS, DMC40-40-BS-DS, DMC80-BS-DS, DMC80-80- BS-DS, DMC80-80-80BS-DS)
or an approved alternative acceptable and approved by Ritz Carlton Operator.
2.19 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760-kPa (400-
psig) minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated
brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 1380-kPa (200-psig) minimum
CWP or MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B 62 bronze body, with DN6 (1/8-inch NPS)
side drain outlet and cap.
2.20 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:

following or approved equal:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Size: Same as connected piping.
4. Body: Cast iron.
5. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.
6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless.
7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified
to hang closed.
8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-
installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.
2.21 CLEANOUTS
A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:


b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
g. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.
3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
4. Body Material: As required to match connected piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.
B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:


b. Oatey.
c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
i. Kusel Equipment Co.
j. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.
4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing.
5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
6. Clamping Device: Required.
7. Outlet Connection: Spigot.
8. Closure: Cast-iron plug.
9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with set-screws or other device.
10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Painted cast iron.
11. Frame and Cover Shape: Square.
12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty suitable for industrial kitchens application.
13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.
16. Housing: Stainless steel.
17. Closure: Stainless steel with seal.
18. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.
C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:


b. MIFAB, Inc.
2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.
4. Body: as required to match connected piping.
5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug.
6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

8. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame

and cover.
D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts:

following by approved equal:
a. Canplas LLC.
b. IPS Corporation.
c. NDS Inc.
d. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Body: PVC.
4. Closure Plug: PVC.
5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as drainage piping.
2.22 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

a. Commercial Enameling Co – CECO Sinks.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Prier Products, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.
4. Body Material: Gray iron.
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
6. Anchor Flange: Required.
8. Outlet: Side.
9. Backwater Valve: Not required.
10. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
11. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
12. Top or Strainer Material: Gray iron.
13. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Stainless steel.
14. Top Shape: Square.
15. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty suitable for industrial kitchens application.
16. Funnel: Not required.
17. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer
valve connection.
18. Trap Material: Cast iron.
19. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
20. Trap Features: Cleanout.
B. Plastic Floor Drains:


a. Canplas LLC.
b. IPS Corporation.
c. Josam Company; Josam Div.
d. Oatey.
e. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies.
f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Material: PVC.
4. Depth: ≤ 100mm
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
7. Outlet: Side.
8. Sediment Bucket: Not required.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Plastic.
10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Stainless steel.
11. Top Shape: Square.
12. Trap Material: Plastic drainage piping.
2.23 TRENCH DRAINS
A. Trench Drains:

b. MIFAB, Inc.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
4. Flange: Seepage.
6. Outlet: Side.
7. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
8. Grate Finish: Painted.
9. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.
10. Trap Material: Cast iron.
2.24 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Stainless-Steel Channel Drainage Systems:

a. Josam Company; Blucher-Josam Div.

2. Type: Modular system of stainless-steel channel sections, grates, and appurtenances;

designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling.
a. Standard: ASME A112.3.1, for trench drains.

b. Channel Sections: Interlocking-joint, stainless-steel with level invert.
1) Dimensions: as shown on drawings.
c. Grates: Manufacturer's designation "heavy duty," with slots or perforations, and of

width and thickness that fit recesses in channels.
1) Material: Gray iron.

2) Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to
channel sections.
d. Covers: Solid ductile or gray iron, of width and thickness that fit recesses in channels,
and of lengths indicated.
e. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise
indicated.
f. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system
manufacturer.
2.25 GARAGE DRAINS
A. Garage Drain:


b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for parking garage drains.

3. Heavy duty suitable for car trench loading, coated cast iron, (300 mm) diameter top drain,
4. Bottom outlet,
5. Seepage pan and combination flashing clamp and frame for heavy duty, deep flange slotted
grate.
6. Grate finish: Not required
2.26 METAL ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
a. Josam Company.
b. Marathon Roofing Products.
c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
e. Tyler Pipe.
f. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.

3. Body Material: Cast iron.
4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 14-inch (357-mm) diameter.

5. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
6. Flow-Control Weirs: Required.
7. Outlet: Bottom or Side as shown on drawings.
8. Extension Collars: Required.
9. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
10. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
11. Dome Material: Cast iron.
12. Perforated Gravel Guard: Required for planter/flower bed drain.
13. Vandal-Proof Dome: Not required.
14. Water Dam: 2 inches (51 mm) high for overflow drain.
2.27 BALCONY DRAINS
A. Plastic Balcony Drain:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
a. Josam Company.
b. Kessel
c. Marathon Roofing Products.
d. MIFAB, Inc.
e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
f. Tyler Pipe.
g. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
2. Standard: EN 1253.
3. Body Material: ABS.
4. Dimension of Body: Nominal 5-inch (125-mm) diameter and 90-mm maximum depth.
5. Outlet: 50mm Side.
6. Cover Material: Refer to landscape details.
7. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel.
2.28 AIR-ADMITTANCE VALVES
A. Fixture Air-Admittance Valves :

a. Ayrlett, LLC.
b. Durgo, Inc.
c. Oatey.
d. ProSet Systems Inc.
e. RectorSeal.
f. Studor, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1051, Type A for single fixture or Type B for branch piping.
3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
5. Size: Same as connected fixture or branch vent piping.
B. Stack Air-Admittance Valves :


a. Durgo, Inc.
b. Oatey.
c. Studor, Inc.
2. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks.

3. Housing: Plastic.
4. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm.
5. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.
2.29 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES
A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.
B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch- (2.4-mm-
) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) from pipe, with
galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.
1. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.
2.30 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and
thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness.
3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness.
B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. (3.7 kg/sq. m or 0.41-mm thickness).

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. (2.5 kg/sq. m or 0.27-mm thickness).
C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch
(1.01-mm) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 (Z275) hot-dip galvanized,
mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil (1.01-mm)
minimum thickness.
E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.
G. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.31 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:

a. ProSet Systems Inc.
2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug.
3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.
4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing
flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene
O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap
for plug.
6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.
2.32 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Open Drains:
1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-
iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required,
increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.
B. Deep-Seal Traps:
1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping
and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.
2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.
a. NPS 2 (DN 50): 4-inch- (100-mm-) minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: 5-inch- (125-mm-) minimum water seal.
C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:
1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer
valve connection.
2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet.
D. Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between
installed inlet and outlet piping.
2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect
waste piping.
E. Sleeve Flashing Device:
1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for
pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of

fitting that will extend 2 inches (51 mm) above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe
extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.
2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.
F. Stack Flashing Fittings:
1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof
membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
G. Vent Caps:
1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.
H. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:
1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead-coated

copper, or galvanized steel.
2. Design: To provide 1-inch (25-mm) enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside
of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.
I. Expansion Joints:

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.
3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.
4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.
J. Downspout Nozzles: Cast-bronze body with threaded inlet for pipe size indicated, and cast-bronze
wall flange with mounting holes.
1. Finish: Polished bronze.
2.33 GREASE INTERCEPTORS
A. Grease Interceptors:
a. Applied Chemical Technology, Incorporated.

c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.
e. Schier Products Company.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.
j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
k. Ashland Trap Distribution Co.
l. Bio-Microbics, Inc.
m. Canplas LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI-G101, for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and
greases from food-preparation or -processing wastewater.
3. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.
4. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.
5. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
7. End Connections: Hub.
8. Cleanout: Integral.
9. Mounting: Above floor.
10. Flow-Control Fitting: Required.
11. Operation: Automatic recovery.
2.34 LINT INTERCEPTORS
A. Acid Resistant Coated interior and exterior fabricated steel lint interceptor, non-skid secured cover
with removable lift handle, stainless lint intercepting secondary screen assembly with 3/32 in [2
mm] Square openings and permanent primary straining baffle with 3/8 in [10 mm] diameter
perforated holes. Regularly furnished with high inlet and low outlet.
2.35 OIL INTERCEPTORS
A. Oil Interceptors:
a. Applied Chemical Technology, Incorporated.

c. MIFAB, Inc.
d. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.
e. Schier Products Company.
h. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
j. Ashland Trap Distribution Co.
k. Town & Country Plastics, Inc.
2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from wastewater.
3. Body Material: Cast iron or steel.
4. Interior Lining: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
5. Exterior Coating: Corrosion-resistant enamel.
6. End Connections: Hub.
7. Cleanout: Integral.
8. Mounting: Recessed, flush with floor.
9. Flow-Control Fitting: Not required.
10. Oil Storage Tank: Coordinate with Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping.
2.36 INSPECTION AND SLOW DOWN CHAMBERS
A. Construction: In situ reinforced concrete, with 560 mm diameter opening on top, recessed to
accommodate cast iron manhole frame and cover, as shown on the Drawings.

B. Floors: form by hand with cement mortar to size and shape of sewer. Changes in sewer size are to
be gradual and even. Floors are to have gradual slope from sidewalls to central channel. Half pipe inverts
may be used in straight through manholes.
C. Inlets: main and side inlets are to have drop of 50 to 80 mm above invert of central channel.
D. Walls: plaster internally with two coats cement and sand (1:3) to total thickness of 15 mm.
E. Steps: galvanized pipe steps set in place during construction, properly embedded, beginning 600
mm above bottom and spaced at approximately 350 mm centers.
F. Leaks: caulk and repair if approved or remove entire work and rebuild at no extra cost.
G. Groundwater Level: keep below bottom of manhole until concrete has obtained adequate set.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to

manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water-supply connection to
mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and water systems as indicated. Comply
with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected
equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet
drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer.
C. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass. Install
pressure gages on inlet and outlet.
D. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure regulator, and solenoid valve, and
where indicated.
E. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
F. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum
of one percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.
G. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide
cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size
to remove valve cover for servicing.
H. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated.
I. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not
indicated, according to the following:
1. Size same as drainage piping up to DN100 (4-inch NPS). Use DN100 (4-inch NPS) for
larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
3. Locate at minimum intervals of 15 m for piping DN100 (4-inch NPS) and smaller and 30 m
for larger piping.
4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

J. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts
for piping below floors.
K. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall,
for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
L. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors with
waterproof membrane.
M. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
N. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 25-mm clearance
between vent pipe and roof substrate.
O. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
P. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with
grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 750 mm or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 6-mm total
depression.
2. Radius, 750 to 1500 mm: Equivalent to one percent slope.
3. Radius, 1500 mm or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 25-mm total
depression.
Q. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
R. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
S. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
T. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's written
installation instructions. Size outlets as indicated.
U. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining roofing.
Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
V. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
W. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting, according to Engineer's
requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
1. Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout on
outlet.
X. Install grease recovery units on floor. Include trapping, venting, and flow-control fitting according
to Engineer's requirements, and with clear space for servicing.
1. Install control panel for grease recovery unit as indicated.
Y. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if

supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
Z. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
AA. Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
BB. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate, or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated.
CC. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
DD. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is
indicated.
EE. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures and drains.
FF. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
GG. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing specialties.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in other
Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems.
3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment
specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping systems.
B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for connections.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes
indicated.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved trap, of
sizes indicated.
F. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories as indicated.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to
unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.
2. Grease Recovery Units: Connect inlet, outlet, and vent piping; controls; electric power; and
factory-furnished accessories.
G. Ground electric-powered plumbing specialties.

tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.

H. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require power.
Electric power, wiring, and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16 Sections.
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage
shapes are required.
B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required.
C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and
roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 2500 mm, and skirt
or flange extending at least 200 mm around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm around sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 200 mm
around specialty.
E. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing
fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into
cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated. Install drain
connection if indicated.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units, including
piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and components.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services.
B. Before startup, perform the following checks:
1. System tests are complete.

2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired.
3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
C. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position.
3. Remove and clean strainers.
4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear.
D. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed by

manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Energize circuits for electrically operated units. Start and run units through complete
sequence of operations.
E. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain interceptors and/or grease recovery units. Refer to Division 1.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim, faucets, other fittings, and related components.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls, floors, and
counters.
2. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet and bath accessories.
3. Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves used as supply stops.
4. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers and other specialties not
specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Accessible: Plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered,
and used by physically handicapped, disabled, and elderly people.
B. Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this
Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and
tailpieces, traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings, tube fittings, and general-duty valves are included
where indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing

fixtures.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty
E. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 / Page 1 of 9

F. Operation and Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation
and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:
a. Servicing and adjustments of whirlpool baths.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category from
one source and by a single manufacturer.
1. Exception: Where fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for this category.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.
A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.
B. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location.
A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing
fixtures can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to
Employer.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of
each type and size installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of
3. Faucet, Laminar-Flow Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent
of each type and size installed.
4. Faucet, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent of
5. Supply, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of
6. Shower, Flow-Control Fittings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of

7. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10 percent
of each type installed.
8. Provide hinged-top, wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having separate
compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.
9. Flushometer Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of
each type installed.
10. Water-Closet Tank, Repair Kits: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent
of each type installed.
11. Toilet Seats: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5 percent of each type installed.
12. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 50 percent of each type
and size installed.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of whirlpool baths that fail
in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures of unit shell.

b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Shells: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.issuance of “Taking Over Certificate”.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: Five years from date
of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over Certificate”.
4. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five years from date
of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BATHTUBS
A. As specified in ID booklet/drawings/specs.
2.2 BATHTUB FAUCETS
2.3 WHIRLPOOL BATHS
2.4 BIDETS

2.5 LAVATORIES
2.6 LAVATORY FAUCETS
2.7 SHOWERS
2.8 SHOWER FAUCETS
2.9 BAR SINKS
A. As specified in F&B booklet/drawings/specs.
2.10 KITCHEN SINKS
A. As specified in kitchen and laundry booklet/drawings/specs.
2.11 LAUNDRY TRAYS
A. As specified in kitchen and laundry booklet/drawings/specs.
2.12 SINK FAUCETS
2.13 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:

a. B & K Industries, Inc.

b. Brass Craft Manufacturing; a subsidiary of Masco Corporation.
c. BrassTech Inc.
d. Dearborn Brass.
e. Geberit US.
f. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
g. Watts Brass & Tubular; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
2. Description: Device designed to prevent backflow of contaminated liquid into domestic
dishwashers.

3. Material: Plastic body with chrome-plated-brass cover.

4. Hose Connections: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID inlet and 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) ID outlet.
5. Capacity: At least 5 gpm (0.32 L/s); at inlet pressure of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) and at
temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
6. Mounting: Deck.
7. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
a. Inlet Hose: 5/8 inch (16 mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
b. Outlet Hose: 7/8 inch (22 mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
2.14 WATER CLOSETS
2.15 TOILET SEATS
2.16 EMERGENCY SHOWERS
A. Freestanding, Plumbed Emergency Showers.

a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Encon Safety Products.
d. Guardian Equipment Co.
e. Haws Corporation.
f. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company.
g. Speakman Company.
h. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Capacity: Not less than 20 gpm (76 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes.
3. Supply Piping: NPS 1 (DN 25) chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator
and stay-open control valve.
4. Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.
5. Shower Head: 8-inch- (200-mm-) minimum diameter, chrome-plated brass, stainless steel,
or plastic.
6. Mounting: Pedestal.
2.17 EYEWASH EQUIPMENT
A. Standard, Wall-Mounted, Plumbed Eyewash Units:

a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Bradley Corporation.
c. Encon Safety Products.
d. Guardian Equipment Co.
e. Haws Corporation.
f. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company.
g. Speakman Company.
h. WaterSaver Faucet Co.
2. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm (1.5 L/min.) for at least 15 minutes.
3. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) chrome-plated brass or stainless steel with flow regulator
and stay-open control valve.
4. Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle.
5. Spray-Head Assembly: Two receptor-mounted spray heads.
6. Receptor: chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel bowl.
7. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) minimum, chrome-plated brass, receptor drain, P-trap,
waste to wall, and wall flange complying with ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
8. Mounting: Wall bracket.
2.18 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Bidet, Lavatory, Bar Sink, Kitchen Sink, and Laundry Tray Supply Fittings:
1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-

supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with inlet
connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
a. Operation: Wheel handle.
3. Risers:
a. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) for bidets and lavatories.

b. Size: [NPS 3/8 (DN 10)] [NPS 1/2 (DN 15)] for bar sinks, kitchen sinks and laundry
trays.
c. Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose riser.
2.19 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset tailpiece for accessible lavatories.
C. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) straight tailpiece as part of faucet for standard
lavatories.
D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) offset tailpiece for accessible bar sinks and kitchen sinks.
E. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) straight tailpiece for standard bar sinks, kitchen sinks and
for laundry trays.
F. Trap:

1. Size: [NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4 (DN 40 by DN 32)] [NPS 1-1/2
(DN 40)] for bidets and lavatories.
2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) for bar sinks, kitchen sinks and laundry trays.
3. Material: Chrome-plated, one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch- (73-mm-)
thick tubular brass wall bend; and chrome-plated-brass or -steel wall flange.
2.20 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual
locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.
C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Comply
with valve requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Valves"
F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of
compartment.
G. Install toilet seats on water closets.
H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets
are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

I. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
J. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch where indicated or
in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
L. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink deck.
Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
M. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink.
N. Set bathtubs and shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.
O. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible lavatories and sinks.
P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use
deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Q. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing
equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections.
B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the
end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture.
C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with
supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes
required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping.

E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power
is specified in Division 16 Sections.
F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of
accessible lavatories and sinks.

A. Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B. Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C. Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized and demonstrate proper operation.
Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and
controls.
B. Operate and adjust disposers, hot-water dispensers, and controls. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning units and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at faucets, shower valves, and flushometer valves having controls, to produce
proper flow and stream.
D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
E. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings, including flush tanks, with manufacturers' recommended
cleaning methods and materials. Include the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and
spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from flush tanks and drains.
F. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Employer.

SECTION 15441 - WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes pumps for the building potable-water systems.
1. Division 2 Section "Water Supply Wells" for well pumps.

2. Division 15 Section "Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems.
3. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for hydronic system pumps.
4. Division 16 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, electrical devices,
and motor controllers.
A. Pumps shall be designed using hydraulic criteria based upon actual model developmental test data.
Manufacturer shall certify that pumps have been hydraulically tested at the factory.
B. Pumps shall be selected at a point within the maximum efficiency for a given impeller casing
combination. Deviations within 3 percent of maximum efficiency are permissible, provided the
lesser efficiency is not less than the scheduled efficiency.
C. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the
casing or less than 15 percent larger than the published minimum diameter of the casing will be
rejected.
D. Acceptable maximum impeller diameter calculations shall not be based on percentage of impeller
E. Where parallel-pump operation is indicated, pumps selected shall have characteristics specifically
suitable for the service without unstable operation.
F. When net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations are made, inlet-storage head shall be
considered at empty point and the centerline pump location shall include not less than a 150 mm
concrete base.
G. Pumps shall be suitable for operation at indicated temperature without vapor binding and without
cavitation under any system operating condition. The only acceptable means of rectification of
cavitation shall be replacement of entire pump assembly.
H. Available NPSH shall exceed required NPSH by not less than 0.46 m.
WATER DISTRIBUTION PUMPS 15441 / Page 1 of 6

I. Pumps of the same duty condition, classification, and accessories, or with specified accessory
deviation, shall be identical and the product of one manufacturing source.
J. Pumps from more than one manufacturing source shall be provided only when a single
manufacturing source is unable to meet all Specification requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type and
size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for pumps. Include setting drawings with templates,
directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in operation and maintenance
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer’s written rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. In-Line Circulators and Pumps:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Crane Pumps & Systems, Inc.; Weinman Div.
d. Grundfos Pumps Corp.

e. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.

f. Marshall Engineered Products Co.
g. Taco, Inc.
h. WILO SE.
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal pump units; complying with
UL 778; suitable for potable-water service; with all-bronze or stainless-steel construction and
components in contact with water made of corrosion-resistant materials.
B. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300 micron fusion bonded epoxy coating
applied at the factory.
C. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors" with built-in thermal-overload
protection appropriate for motor size and duty.
D. End Connections for DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with flanged
ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
E. End Connections for DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
G. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
nozzles.
H. Pumps dedicated for Drinking Water System shall have Stainless-steel construction for all parts and
components in contact with water.
2.3 COMPACT CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Horizontal, in-line, replaceable-cartridge-design circulator; rated for 860-kPa (125-

psig) minimum working pressure –subject to suit system’s operating pressure- and minimum
continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: On common shaft in hermetically sealed unit without stuffing
box or mechanical seal, and with manufacturer's standard cooling and lubrication system.
2. Impeller: Corrosion-resistant material.
3. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
A. Description: Horizontal in-line circulator, rated for 860-kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure
–subject to suit system’s operating pressure- and minimum continuous water temperature of
107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Construction: Radially split, all-bronze casing.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 36/B 36M, rolled brass; or ASTM B 584, cast bronze; overhung, single
suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Seal: Mechanical.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless Steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or thrust type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
7. Motor: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and resiliently
mounted to pump casing.
a. Motor Size: For motors larger than 1/2 hp, select motor size that will not overload
through full range of pump performance curve.
2.5 IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Horizontal or vertical, in-line, separately coupled pump; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig)
minimum working pressure –subject to suit system’s operating pressure- and minimum continuous
water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F); and complying with HI 1.1-1.5 for in-line centrifugal
pumps.
1. Construction: Radially split, all-bronze casing.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung,
single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and rubber
bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or ball type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment.
7. Motor: Energy-efficient design; single speed, with built-in thermal-overload protection;
grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently mounted to pump casing.
a. Motor Size: For motors larger than 1/2 hp, select motor size that will not overload
through full range of pump performance curve.
b. Lifting and Supporting Lug: For vertical in-line pumps, directly mounted in top of
motor enclosure.
2.6 SPLIT CASE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
A. Description: horizontal, base mounted, horizontally split case, double suction, single stage,
centrifugal type, directly connected to motor through heavy duty flexible coupling and with heavy
gauge coupling guard.
1. Base: Pump and motor to be mounted on common cast iron base reinforced against
deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes, and grouting hole.
2. Pump Casing: Bronze, high tensile strength alloy, designed for working pressure of 2000
kPa subject to suit system’s operating pressure, fitted with easily removable bronze wear
rings dowelled to casing. Casing to be divided at horizontal centreline and the 2 halves
accurately machined, dowel aligned and bolted together.
3. Suction and discharge nozzles to be in-line piping design, cast integrally with lower half of
pump casing to allow rotating element to be removed without disconnecting suction and
discharge flanges.
4. Impeller: Bronze, enclosed, double suction type, fastened to shaft by stainless-steel key and
screw locked adjustable shaft sleeves.
5. Shaft And Shaft Sleeves: Shaft to be high strength stainless steel, sized to carry axial and
radial thrust with minimum deflection and protected against corrosion from water by full

length bronze shaft sleeves. Teflon gaskets to be provided between impeller hub and shaft
sleeves to prevent pumped water corroding shaft.
6. Mechanical Seal: Ni-resist face, carbon washer and stainless steel metal parts.
7. Bearings: Pump rotating element to be supported by two heavy duty grease lubricated ball
bearings for both radial and thrust loads, mounted in machined moistureproof and dustproof
cast iron housings bolted to pump casing with register fits to ensure permanent alignment.
Bearing housing supports to be cast integrally with lower half of pump casing. Bearings to
have grease seals and water slingers to protect bearings from contamination and easily
accessible grease fittings for positive bearing lubrication.
8. ELECTRIC MOTOR: totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type with permanently
lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections before
pump installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ANSI/HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic
maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps independent of piping. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration
isolation hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Fabricate brackets or supports as
required. Refer to Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports" for materials.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and non-slam, silent type check
valve and throttling valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected
piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and Division 15
Section "Plumbing Specialties" for strainers.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-gage
tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping
around pumps. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages and
gage connectors.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.


3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Clean strainers on suction piping.
C. Controls: Set for automatic starting and stopping operation.
D. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings.

2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free to
rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of
trouble is determined and corrected.
E. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.
2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motor.
4. Open discharge valve slowly.
5. Check general mechanical operation of pump and motor.
6. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent
overheating.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain distribution pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 15444 - PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged booster pumps to maintain pressure in the building potable-water
distribution systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models,
furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of packaged booster pump indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and connections for packaged booster pumps. Include setting
drawings with templates, directions for installation of foundation and anchor bolts, and other
anchorages. Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and
equipment mounting frames.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that packaged booster

pumps, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls." Include the following:
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each packaged booster pump to include in operation and
PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 15444 / Page 1 of 6

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of packaged booster pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 - 2007,
C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.
D. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:
1. UL 508, "Industrial Control Equipment."

2. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels."
3. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps."
4. UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling Equipment."
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Packaged Booster Pumps:

a. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
b. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Aurora Pump.
d. Federal Pump Corp.
e. Hydronic Modules Corp.
f. ITT Fluid Technology Corp.; ITT Bell & Gossett Div.
g. Metropolitan Pump Co.
h. PACO Pumps, Inc.
i. Peerless Pump Co.
j. SynchroFlo, Inc.
2.2 PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged booster pump units; complying with UL 778;
suitable for potable-water service.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Motors."
C. The internal surface of the volute shall be coated with 300 micron fusion bonded epoxy coating
applied at the factory.
D. Pumps dedicated for Drinking Water System shall have Stainless-steel construction for all parts and
components in contact with water.
E. Piping: ANSI/ASME B31.9 for piping materials and installation.
1. DN100 (NPS 4) and Smaller: ASTM B88M-05, Type B (ASTM B88-03, Type L), drawn,
copper, water tube with copper, solder-joint, pressure fittings and brazed.
2. DN125 (NPS 5) and Larger: ASTM A53/A53M-07, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with
threaded, cast-iron fittings and threaded joints.
3. Header End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded.
4. Header End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
F. Piping Option: Piping, including valves and other components, may have grooved ends for grooved
joints.
G. Shutoff Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to suit
system pressure; bronze, rising-stem gate valve or MSS SP-110, 4135-kPa (600-psig) minimum
CWP, bronze ball valve with ends matching piping.
H. Shutoff Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, or higher if required to suit
system pressure; bronze-trim, OS&Y, cast-iron gate valve with flanged ends or MSS SP-67, Type I
for tight shutoff, 1206-kPa (175-psig) CWP, single-flanged, cast-iron butterfly valve.
I. Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, or higher if required to suit
system pressure; bronze, non-slam, swing check valve.
J. Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, or higher if required to suit
system pressure; bronze-trim, cast-iron, non-slam, swing check valve.
K. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals,
to prevent galvanic action and to stop corrosion.
1. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 1725-kPa (250-psig)
minimum working pressure at 82 deg C (180 deg F).
2. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly; for 1035-
or 2070-kPa (150- or 300-psig) minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
L. Hydropneumatic Tank: Precharged, ASME-construction, diaphragm or bladder tank made of

materials complying with NSF 61.
M. Sensors: Pressure switches.
N. Control Panel for variable-speed booster pumps: Factory installed and connected as an integral part
of booster pump; automatic for multiple-pump, variable-speed operation, with load control and
protection functions.
1. Control Logic: Solid-state system with transducers, programmable microprocessor, VFC,

and other devices in controller. Install VFC for pump motors larger than 25 hp in separate
panel; same type as motor control panel enclosure.
2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, variable-frequency, solid-state type.
a. Control Voltage: 220-V ac, with integral control-power transformer.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12.

4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch for each pump in cover of control
panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
a. Duplex, Automatic, Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main pump and to
two-pump operation.
b. Triplex, Sequence (Lead-Lag-Lag) Starter: Switches lead pump to one lag main pump
and to three-pump operation.
6. Pump Operation and Sequencing: Pressure-sensing method for lead pump and flow-sensing
method for lag pumps.
7. VFC: Voltage-source, pulse-width, modulating-frequency converter for each pump.
8. Manual Bypass: Magnetic contactor arranged to transfer to constant-speed operation upon
VFC failure.
9. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge pressure gages.
10. Lights: Running light for each pump.
11. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.
12. Thermal-bleed cutoff.
13. Low-suction-pressure, or, water-storage-tank, low-level cutout.
14. High-suction-pressure cutout.
15. Low-discharge-pressure cutout.
16. High-discharge-pressure cutout.
17. Building Automation System Interface: Provide auxiliary contacts for interface to building
automation system. Include the following:
a. On-off status of each pump.

b. Alarm status.
O. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
P. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
treat with anticorrosion compound after assembling and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and
nozzles.
2.3 VARIABLE-SPEED-DRIVE, PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Description: Multiplex packaged unit, with pumps, piping, valves, sensors, controls, and adjustable-
speed-drive units for variable-speed operation.
1. Pressure Rating: Minimum 1200 kPa (175 psig), and as required to suit system pressure.
2. Pump Arrangement: Multiplex, as shown on drawings, with equal-size pumps.
3. Pumps: Comply with HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps," for close-coupled, in-line centrifugal
pumps.
a. Construction: Multistage, radially split, bronze fitted.

b. Impeller: ASTM B584-08a, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
4. Variable-Speed-Drive Controllers: Adjustable-speed-drive unit for each pump.
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections before
packaged booster pump installation.
3.2 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated and minimum height of 100mm, or otherwise
required, for packaged booster pumps. Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged booster pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for
periodic maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Support packaged booster pumps using the following vibration-control devices, unless otherwise
indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."
1. Install units with concrete-filled, inertia-base vibration isolation bases and spring-isolator
vibration isolators.
C. Support connected piping so weight of water distribution piping is not supported by packaged
booster pumps.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Water Distribution Piping."
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or
greater than size of unit suction and discharge headers.
2. Install flexible pipe connectors on piping connections to unit suction and discharge headers.
Install flexible pipe connectors same size as piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods" for flexible pipe connectors.
3. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to unit suction and discharge headers. Install
valves same size as unit suction and discharge headers. Refer to Division 15 Section
"Valves" for general-duty valves.
B. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
C. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.

ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
A. Perform tests and inspections.


testing.
1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster pumps to
confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation.
equipment.
C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Controls: Set for automatic starting, stopping, sequential, and alarm operations.
C. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
2. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free
to rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of
trouble is determined and corrected.
D. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for operation.
2. Open valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Start motors.
6. Close valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent overheating.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged booster pump units. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

SECTION 15445 - SEWAGE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sewage pumps for the building sanitary drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:
1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating brake horsepower, head, flow
and NPSH.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of pump indicated.
directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages. The following shall be
submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of connection of cables and
pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters, relays, or any other
component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type, and efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for power, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests:
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
D. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items shall identify at least 5 installed units
similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
List shall include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.
Certificates shall be submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing conformance with
the referenced standards contained in this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions

2. Vibration specifications.
SEWAGE PUMPS 15445 / Page 1 of 8
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in operation
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of
pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models selected. Other manufacturers'
pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
D. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Sewage Pumps:
a. Sulzer / ABS Pumps, Inc.

c. Aurora Pump, part of Pentair Pump Group.
d. Grundfos Chicago Pump Co.
e. Goulds Pumps, ITT Corporation.
f. ITT Flygt Corp.
g. KSB, Inc.
h. PACO Pumps, Inc.
2.2 PUMP SELECTION
A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be selected with characteristics specifically
suited for the service without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing and
impeller series.

C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the
rejected.
D. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall deliver, at rated speed, not less than
the specified flow against the specified or indicated discharge head while the liquid level is not more
than 300 mm above the datum elevation of the pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level
of the entrance eye of the impeller.
E. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction head of the system piping external
to the pump unit and the static head measured from a point of reference on the sump to the highest
point in the system.
F. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).
2.3 SEWAGE PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sewage pump

units complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for permanent
installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only
with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Motor shall be manufacturer's standard construction for the service and shall be
permanently sealed, oil-filled, and watertight. Motor space shall be fitted with watertight expansion
provisions to accommodate temperature normal to specified duty. Motor seals shall remain
watertight under any pressure developed in the volute and under a sump-level static head of not less
than 9100 mm of water; Shop Drawings shall so certify. Motors shall be single speed, with grease-
lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through full range of pump performance curves.
Power cord shall be of suitable length, waterproof, internally grounded, oil-resistant, Type SO
chloroprene, with 3 prong plug.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, AISI Type 316.
F. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
steel with hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations. Hardened surfaces
may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall Colmonoy, or similar proprietary metals, or plasma-
spray-applied ceramic materials of not less than 900 Brinell hardness. Mechanical properties and
diameter of the shaft shall ensure that whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient
magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the specified shaft bearings under normal
operating conditions. Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the clearance between the
impeller and the inner surfaces of the volute section.
G. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings shall be furnished in the
motor and bearing support housing above the cover-plate surface, with full provision for the
mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-
lubricated and shall have an L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear
the manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-
processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished with grease and pressure-relief
fittings at bottom or opposite side the bearing where discharge may be viewed.
H. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center distance between any 2 bearings on
the shaft shall not exceed 1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Sleeve-
bearing length shall be not less than 2 times the shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the
lower extremity of the shaft shall be provided.
I. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling.
Flexible member shall be a tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of chloroprene
material and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall
not transmit vibration or end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree misalignment under normal
duty.
J. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft shall connect the
pump to the sump coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be machined and doweled to ensure proper
alignment of the pump and shaft whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field.
K. Liquid-Level Control: Simplex unit shall have a float mechanism to provide automatic operation of
the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. A means of adjustment,
such as float-rod stops, shall be provided to allow for variation in the start and stop level-control
points. Float and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts
of the fluid-level-sensing mechanism below the coverplate shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of sewage.
L. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with the electrical and mechanical
devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises
to a predetermined level. Controls shall automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump
to the other and shall operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds
the capacity of the operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod stops shall be provided
to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points. Float and rod shall be AISI Type
304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism below
the cover shall be bronze, brass, or material of equivalent resistance to the corrosive effects of
sewage.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
2.4 QUICK-DISCONNECT-SYSTEM, SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump complying with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3
for submersible sewage pumps. Include quick-disconnect system.
1. Pump Arrangement: Duplex.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with cast-iron legs that elevate pump to permit flow into impeller, and
discharge companion flange arranged to connect to quick-disconnect-system discharge-
elbow fitting.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and
dynamically balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to
shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Pump and Motor Shaft: Stainless steel, with factory-sealed, grease-lubricated ball bearings.
5. Seals: Double mechanical seals.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; lifting
eye or lug; and three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding
plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.
7. Moisture-Sensing Probe: Internal moisture sensor, moisture alarm, and waterproof cable of
length required, with cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump.

8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40,
galvanized-steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to "Sewage
Pump Basins" Article for other requirements.
10. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a. Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion-resistant vertical pipes or

structural members, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide
rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attachments
for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning
device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to movable-
elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at manhole.
11. Controls: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, pedestal mounted, unless wall mounting is
indicated; with three micropressure switches in NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosures; mounting
rod; and electric cables. Include automatic alternator to alternate operation of pump units on
successive cycles and to operate both units if one pump cannot handle load.
12. High-Water Alarm: Rod-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 6 enclosure with micropressure-
switch alarm matching control and electric bell; 220-V ac, with transformer and contacts for
remote alarm bell, unless battery operation is indicated.
2.5 SUBMERSIBLE, GRINDER SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sewage pump complying with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3
for submersible sewage pumps. Include quick-disconnect system.

2. Impeller: Bronze or stainless-steel impeller, with stainless-steel grinder assembly.
5. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type; with built-in overload protection; and
three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and cable-
sealing assembly for connection at pump.
7. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galvanized-
steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
8. Basin Cover: Multiple sections, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to "Sewage
9. Quick-Disconnect System: Include the following:
a. Guide Rails: Two galvanized-steel or other corrosion-resistant vertical pipes or

structural members, attached to baseplate and basin sidewall or cover.
b. Baseplate: Corrosion-resistant metal plate, attached to basin floor, supporting guide
rails and stationary elbow.
c. Pump Yokes: Pump-motor-mounted or casing-mounted yokes or other attachments
for aligning pump during connection of flanges.
d. Movable Elbow: Pump discharge-elbow fitting with flange, seal, and positioning
device.
e. Stationary Elbow: Fixed discharge-elbow fitting with flange that mates to movable-
elbow flange and support attached to baseplate.
f. Lifting Cable: Stainless-steel cable attached to pump and basin cover at manhole.

2.6 SEWAGE PUMP, REVERSE-FLOW ATTACHMENT
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, reverse-flow pump attachment for factory or field installation in

sewage pump basin.
B. Inlet Fitting: One combination inlet-overflow strainer fitting.
C. Valves: Two shutoff valves and two check valves.
D. Strainers: Two strainer housings with reverse-flow, self-flushing strainers.
E. Pipe and Fittings: Size and configuration required to connect to sewage pumps and piping.
2.7 SEWAGE PUMP PITS
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover.
1. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for recessed
mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps, pump
shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-traffic areas.
2.8 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.
Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features and devices
indicated.
2.9 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include
the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sewage pumps. Refer to
Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials
and Methods."
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Wet-Pit-Mounted, Vertical Sewage Pumps: Suspend pumps from basin covers. Make direct
connections to sanitary drainage and vent piping.
E. Submersible Sewage Pumps: Set pumps on basin floor. Make direct connections to sanitary
drainage and vent piping.
1. Anchor quick-disconnect systems to bottom of basins and basin sidewalls or covers. Install
pumps so pump and discharge pipe disconnecting flanges make positive seals when pumps
are dropped into place.
F. Sewage Pump Basins: Install basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of
basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during
concrete placement. Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is
flush with finished floor.
G. Packaged Pump Units: Install and make direct connections to drainage and vent piping.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Sanitary drainage and vent piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section
"Drainage and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The
following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and connect
to sanitary drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam, swing check valve and ball valve on each sewage pump discharge. Include
spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger.

C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required for
system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as follows:
1. Start motors.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain sewage pump units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 15446 - SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sump pumps for the building storm drainage systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer catalog shall show:
1. Performance data including performance curves and indicating brake horsepower, head, flow
and NPSH.
3. Furnished specialties, and accessories for each type and size of pump indicated.
directions for installing foundation and anchor bolts, and other anchorages. The following shall be
submitted:
1. Connection Diagrams: Connection diagrams shall show details of connection of cables and
pump motors.
2. Control Diagrams: Control diagrams shall show motor starters, relays, or any other
component necessary for safe operation.
3. Fabrication Drawings: Fabrication drawings shall indicate size, type, and efficiency rating.
4. Installation Drawings: Installation drawings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended instructions.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Wiring diagrams shall show detail wiring for power, signal, and control
systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Reports: Test reports shall be submitted for the following tests :
1. Hydrostatic leak.
2. Static heads.
3. Pump flow capacity.
D. Certificates: Listing of product installations for similar items shall identify at least 5 installed units
similar to those proposed for use, that have been in successful service for a minimum of 5 years.
List shall include purchaser, address of installation, service organization, and date of installation.
Certificates shall be submitted for the each equipment and accessories showing conformance with
the referenced standards contained in this Section.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: The following shall be submitted :
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Vibration specifications.
SUMP PUMPS 15446 / Page 1 of 7
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type and size of pump specified to include in operation
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of
pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models selected. Other manufacturers'
pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
D. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Sump Pumps:
a. ABS Pumps, Inc.

c. Aurora Pump.
d. Chicago Pump Co.
e. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
f. Grundfos Pumps Corp.
g. Ingersoll-Dresser Pump Co.
h. ITT Flygt Corp.
i. KSB, Inc.
j. PACO Pumps, Inc.
k. Weil Pump Co.
2. Packaged, Drainage Pump Units:
a. Alyan Pump Co.

b. Milton Roy Co.; Hartell Div.
c. Myers: F. E. Myers Co.
d. Sta-Rite Industries, Inc.
e. Zoeller Pump Co.
2.2 PUMP SELECTION
A. Where parallel pump operation is indicated, pumps shall be selected with characteristics specifically
suited for the service without unstable operation.
B. Pumps shall be selected for service within 4 percent of maximum efficiency for a given casing and
impeller series.
C. Pumps having impeller diameter larger than 90 percent of the published maximum diameter of the
rejected.
D. Pump duty conditions shall be as indicated. A pump unit shall deliver, at rated speed, not less than
the specified flow against the specified or indicated discharge head while the liquid level is not more
than 300 mm above the datum elevation of the pump. Datum elevation shall be taken as the level
of the entrance eye of the impeller.
E. Discharge head, specified or indicated, shall include the friction head of the system piping external
to the pump unit and the static head measured from a point of reference on the sump to the highest
point in the system.
F. Ratings shall be based on pumping clear, fresh water at a temperature of 50 deg. C (122 deg. F).
2.3 SUMP PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal, end-suction sump pump units
complying with UL 778. Include motor, operating controls, and construction for permanent
installation.
B. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only
with flanged-end discharge pipe may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
C. Discharge Pipe End Connections DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged.
D. Motors: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, and non-overloading through full range
of pump performance curves.
E. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be AISI Type 316.
F. Pump shaft shall be constructed of ground and polished AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant
steel with hardened wearing surfaces at intermediate shaft-bearing locations. Hardened surfaces
may be overlays of 500 Brinell Stellite, Wall Colmonoy, or similar proprietary metals, or plasma-
spray-applied ceramic materials of not less than 900 Brinell hardness. Mechanical properties and
diameter of the shaft shall ensure that whip, deflection, or vibration will not be of sufficient
magnitude to impose greater than design loads on the specified shaft bearings under normal
operating conditions. Means shall be provided for external adjustment of the clearance between the
impeller and the inner surfaces of the volute section.
G. Bearings and Lubrication: One or more antifriction ball- or roller-bearings shall be furnished in the
motor and bearing support housing above the cover-plate surface, with full provision for the
mechanical and hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed. Bearings shall be sealed and grease-
lubricated and shall have an L-10 rating of not less than 200,000 hours. Shop Drawings shall bear
the manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be manufactured from vacuum-
processed or degassed-alloy steels. Bearings shall be furnished with grease and pressure-relief
fittings at bottom or opposite side the bearing where discharge may be viewed.

H. Intermediate shaft bearings shall be of the sleeve type. Center distance between any 2 bearings on
the shaft shall not exceed 1370 mm or 1520 mm for pumps operating at 1,200 rpm or less. Sleeve-
bearing length shall be not less than 2 times the shaft diameter. A sleeve bearing located near the
lower extremity of the shaft shall be provided.
I. Flexible Couplings: Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling.
Flexible member shall be a tire shape or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk shape made of chloroprene
material and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall act as a dielectric connector, shall
not transmit vibration or end thrust, and shall permit up to 4-degree misalignment under normal
duty.
J. Support Pipe: A wrought-iron or steel support pipe concentric with the pump shaft shall connect the
pump to the sump coverplate. Support-pipe flanges shall be machined and doweled to ensure proper
alignment of the pump and shaft whenever the pipe is disassembled and reassembled in the field.
K. Liquid-Level Control: Simplex unit shall have a float mechanism to provide automatic operation of
the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises to a predetermined level. A means of adjustment,
such as float-rod stops, shall be provided to allow for variation in the start and stop level-control
points. Float and stem shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts
of the fluid-level-sensing mechanism below the coverplate shall be bronze, brass, or material of
equivalent corrosion resistance.
L. Liquid-Level Control: Duplex pump unit shall be furnished with the electrical and mechanical
devices required to provide automatic operation of the pump unit when the liquid in the sump rises
to a predetermined level. Controls shall automatically transfer the operating cycle from one pump
to the other and shall operate both pumps simultaneously whenever the inflow to the sump exceeds
the capacity of the operating pump. A means of adjustment such as float-rod stops shall be provided
to allow for variations in the start and stop level-control points. Float and rod shall be AISI Type
304 or 316 corrosion-resistant steel, and all other parts of the fluid-level sensing mechanism below
the cover shall be bronze, brass, or material of equivalent corrosion resistance.
M. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
N. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and
2.4 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Description: Submersible, direct-connected sump pump complying with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for
submersible sump pumps.

2. Casing: Cast iron with cast-iron inlet strainer, legs that elevate pump to permit flow into
impeller, and discharge companion flange suitable for plain-end pipe connection arranged
for vertical discharge.
3. Impeller: ASTM A 48, Class No. 25 A or higher cast iron; statically and dynamically
balanced, open or semiopen nonclog design, overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and
secured by locking cap screw.
6. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection; and
three-conductor waterproof power cable of length required, with grounding plug and cable-
sealing assembly for connection at pump.

8. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, galvanized-
steel pipe, bronze pipe, or copper tube.
9. Basin Cover: Multiple section, steel, and suitable for supporting controls. Refer to "Sump
2.5 SUMP PUMP PITS
A. Description: Cast-in-place concrete with steel curb frames and covers. Refer to Division 3 Section
"Cast-in Place Concrete."
B. Curb Frames: Galvanized steel or steel with bitumastic coating of dimension to fit cover.
1. Pattern: Z-cross-section shape with raised outer rim of height matching cover for recessed
mounting that will have installed cover flush with top of floor slab.
C. Pit Cover: Fabricate with openings with gaskets, seals, and bushings, for access, pumps, pump
shafts, control rods, discharge piping, vent connections, and power cables.
1. Material: Steel, with bitumastic coating.

2. Reinforcement: Steel or cast-iron reinforcement capable of supporting foot-traffic areas.
2.6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty gate, ball, butterfly, globe, and check valves.
Use valves specified for domestic water, unless otherwise indicated. Include features and devices
indicated.
2.7 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE
A. Provide auxiliary contacts in pump controllers for interface to building automation system. Include
the following:
1. On-off status of each pump.

2. Alarm status.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of plumbing piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."
3.3 CONCRETE
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for sump pumps. Refer to
and Methods."
B. Concrete for pits and sumps is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance, including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Submersible Sump Pumps: Set pumps on basin, pit, or sump floor. Make direct connections to
storm drainage piping.
E. Sump Pump Pits: Construct concrete pits and connect to storm drainage piping. Refer to Division 3
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete work. Set basin cover and fasten to top edge of
concrete pit. Install so top surface of cover is flush with finished floor.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Storm drainage piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Drainage and
Vent Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1. Install discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles, and connect
to storm drainage piping.
2. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each sump pump discharge.
Include spring-loaded or weighted-lever check valves for piping DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and
larger.
3. Install non-slam swing check valve and gate or ball valve on each automatic, packaged pump
discharge.
C. Electrical power and control components, wiring, and connections are specified in Division 16
Sections.

UL 486A and UL 486B

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required for
system application.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
2. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation.
3. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags,
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as follows:
1. Start motors.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain sump pump units. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15450 - POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes potable-water storage tanks and related specialties and accessories for indoor
installations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. GRP: Glass-reinforced plastic resin.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Handle and store water storage tank systems, components, and parts to prevent distortions and other
damage that could affect their structural, mechanical, or electrical integrity. Replace damaged items
that cannot be restored to original condition.
B. Store items subject to deterioration by exposure to elements, in a well-drained location, protected

from weather, and accessible for inspection and handling.
C. Deliver paint in unopened containers with unbroken seals and labels showing designated name,
specification number, color, directions for use, manufacturer, and date of manufacture, legible and
intact at time of use.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories. Indicate dimensions, wall thicknesses, insulation, finishes and coatings,
required clearances, methods of assembly of components, and piping connections.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that indicated steel, potable-
water storage tanks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."
POTABLE WATER STORAGE TANKS 15450 / Page 1 of 6

C. Manufacturer Certificates: For shop inspection and data reports as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Confirm successful pressure and leak testing.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements
specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
E. Water Samples and Reports: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.
A. NSF Compliance: NSF 14,, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic
potable-water storage tanks and components and NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System
Components--Health Effects," For potable-water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.
1.7 COORDINATION
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Plastic, Water Storage Tanks:
a. Belding Tank Technologies, Inc.

b. Chem-Tainer Industries, Inc.
c. Palmer Manufacturing & Tank, Inc.
d. Park International Corp.
e. Premier Plastics, Ltd.
f. Raven Industries, Inc.; Plastics Div.
g. Snyder-Crown.
h. Water Group, Inc.
A. Pressure Rating of Pressure-Type Water Tanks: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Pressure Rating of Specialties and Accessories for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125 psig),
C. Pressure Rating of Piping for Pressure Systems: At least 860 kPa (125 psig), unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Pressure Rating of Other Tanks and Piping Components: At least equal to system operating
pressure.

2.3 HOT PRESS GRP SECTIONAL PANEL WATER TANKS
A. Type: Hot pressed GRP (glass reinforced plastic) sectional panel, complete with tank supports,
piping and accessories as specified below. All internal metal parts to be constructed from 304 grade
stainless-steel.
B. Construction: Tank to consist to an assembly of rectangular shaped, pressed GRP convex panels
bolted together in an arrangement of external flanges with a special rubber sealant to ensure
watertight joints. Tank to be provided from factory with reinforcing struts and roof supports and
reinforcing plats and washers.
C. Panels: Minimum 10 mm thick GRP tested to BS EN 13280:2001. Panels to resist pressures of 6

times the working pressure.
D. Panel Color: Gray, completely opaque to prevent the growth of algae and micro organisms.
E. Panel Material Characteristics: GRP, 1.8 specific gravity. 30 percent min. glass content. 10 kPa
tensile strength, 16.17 kPa flexural strength, 0.515 kPa impact strength, 29.5 kPa compressive
strength, 9.41 kPa shear strength, 2.16 x 10-5/deg. C thermal expansion. 0.02 kecal/m.hr deg. C
thermal conductivity.
F. Components Materials:
1. Joints Sealant: 50 mm synthetic rubber.

2. Joints Bolts and Nuts: Stainless-steel.
3. Reinforcement Roof Support: Stainless-steel.
4. Reinforcement Internal Tie Rod: Stainless-steel.
5. External Reinforcing: Structural steel galvanized.
6. Corner Angle: Hot press GRP.
7. Diagonal Struts: Stainless-steel.
G. Insulation: when specified, all tanks panel to be factory insulated with 25 mm thick polyurethane of
typical U value of 6 W/m2K.
H. Panels and Tank Accessories: To be shipped adequately packed in wooden crates for site assembly
complete with adequate quantities of bolts, nuts, washers, rubber sealant, etc.
I. Tank Top: to be provided with 610 mm round manhole with bolted cover and one 100 mm diameter
uPVC mosquito-proof cowled ventilator.
J. Tank: To be provided with all necessary piping connections of sizes as shown on the Drawings Pipe
connecting panels are to be specially designed at factory for that purpose and shipped complete with
pipe connections.
K. Ladders: 2 stainless-steel ladders are to be provided for each tank both inside and outside the tank.
L. Tank: To be provided complete with level indicator, ball valve, level switches, flanges, and bell
mouth connection, etc.
M. Tank: To be provided with steel footing channel beams as recommended by tank manufacturer for
size and man shape. Tank to be supported on reinforced concrete plinth supports running in one
direction beneath the tank and extending beyond the edge of the tank on either side.
N. Tests: After erection, tank to be filled with water to the level of overflow and left to stand for 72
hours. During this period, no drop in water level will be allowed. If signs of dampness or traces of
leakage are noticed, the Contractor shall repair and re-test the tank to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer.

O. Tank installation shall be certified by the manufacturer’s representative.
P. Guarantee: Tanks are to be fully guaranteed against manufacturing defects and utility of substandard
material for a period of 10 years.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Overflow: The overflow for the tank shall consist of an overflow weir and outside drop pipe,
adequately supported. The overflow pipe shall be steel, ASTM A53/A53M-07 or equal, and shall
terminate 300 to 600 mm above grade and shall be fitted with a flapper valve or screen to prevent
ingress of birds and insects.
B. Vent: Vent shall be tank manufacturer's standard type, factory supplied, mushroom vent with
aluminum bird screen. The free area of the vent shall be sized 50 percent in excess of the pump-in
rate.
C. Float Valves: The float valves shall be full bore, equilibrium ball type, designed to close tight against
maximum pressure when half submerged, with renewable, synthetic rubber, valve disc and
balancing piston bucket. Float valves to be all bronze construction including levers and arms, with
copper float and suitable for 1034 kPa cold water working pressure.
D. Altitude Valve: The supply to the tank shall be controlled by a altitude valve, automatic in operation
and accurately set to prevent overflow. The valve shall be cushioned when opening and closing to
prevent water hammer or shock. Valves shall be provided with a travel indicator.
E. Drain Valve: AWWA C500, iron-body, bronze-mounted, non-rising stem with indicator, for
minimum working pressure of 1034 kPa, clear waterway equal to full nominal diameter, hand wheel
operated, and open by turning counterclockwise.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water tanks. Refer to
and Methods."
3.2 WATER STORAGE TANK INSTALLATION
A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so devices
needing servicing are accessible.
1. Install horizontal tanks on concrete piers and factory-fabricated saddles.
B. Anchor tank supports and tanks to substrate.
C. Install tank seismic restraints.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.

B. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping. Thermometers and
pressure gages are specified in Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages."
C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves. Connect
tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.
1. General-duty valves are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves."

2. Valves DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Ball.
3. Valves DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Butterfly.
4. Drain Valves: DN20 (NPS 3/4) Ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in outlet with,
ANSI/ASME B1.20.7-1991, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose service, threaded cap, and
chain.
5. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric fittings.
D. Install the following devices on tanks:

1. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks.
2. Connections to accessories.
A. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test ASME code, water storage tanks to ensure structural integrity
and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure
rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check
for leaks. Replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until test is satisfactory.
B. Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test non-ASME code, pressure water storage tanks to ensure
structural integrity and freedom from leaks at pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above system operating
pressure, but not less than 1035 kPa (150 psig). Fill tanks with water, vent air, pressurize tanks,
disconnect test equipment, hold pressure for two hours with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks.
Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks and repeat until test is satisfactory.
C. Nonpressure Testing: Fill nonpressure water storage tanks to water operating level to ensure
structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Hold water level for two hours with no drop in water
level.
D. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until results are satisfactory.
E. Prepare written reports for specified tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water storage tanks.
B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by Engineer or, if method is not prescribed, use
procedure described in AWWA C652-02 or as described below:
1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:
a. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 mg/L (50 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.
b. Fill tanks with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 mg/L (200 ppm) of
chlorine. Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.

3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not
present in water coming from tank.
4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to Engineer. Repeat procedure if biological
examination shows evidence of contamination.
C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Perform the following final checks before filling:
1. Verify that tests of tanks are complete.

2. Verify that tests of piping systems are complete.
3. Check piping connections for leaks.
4. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
5. Check for proper seismic restraints.
B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to operating
level.

SECTION 15469 - WATER SOFTENERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water softeners and accessories for water-supply systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic resin.
3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.
4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
A. Seismic Performance: Water softeners shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; ion-exchange
resins; salt purity and form; furnished specialties; and accessories.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,

limitations, and exclusions.
B. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for water softeners.
C. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment layouts and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
WATER SOFTENERS 15469 / Page 1 of 8

D. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Reports: For softener tanks, as required by ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water softeners, accessories, and components, from
manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer's Field Service Reports: As specified in this Section.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H. Maintenance Agreement: As specified in this Section.
I. Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
J. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
B. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.
C. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label water softeners to comply with UL 979, "Water Treatment
Appliances."
D. Source Limitations: Obtain water softeners through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or

replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. Include coverage for the following:
1. Attrition loss of resin not to exceed 3 percent per year.

2. Resin not to be washed out of system during service run or backwashing period.
3. Effluent turbidity not to be greater and color not to be darker than incoming water.
4. Underdrain system, gravel, and resin not to become fouled, with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or
scale from softener equipment or soft water, while operating according to manufacturer's
written operating instructions.
B. Warranty Period: 3years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over

Certificate”.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance: Submit four copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued Service and
Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Employer's acceptance. Offer terms and
conditions for furnishing consumables and providing continued testing, maintenance and servicing
to include replacing materials and components. Include one-year term of agreement, commencing
at date of Substantial Completion, with option for one-year renewal.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to
Employer.
1. Salt for Brine Tanks: Furnish at least four times original load, but not less than 500 kg.
Deliver on pallets according to the following:
a. Pellet Form: In 50-kg packages.
2. Store salt on raised platform where directed by Employer. Do not store in contact with
concrete floor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Water Softeners:
a. Aquion Partners, L. P.; RainSoft Water Treatment Systems Div.

b. R.A. Bruner Corp.
c. Columbia Water Conditioning Systems, Inc.
d. Culligan International Co.
e. EcoWater Systems, Inc.
f. Environmental Dynamics Corp.
g. United States Filter Corp.
h. Water King, Inc.
i. Water Soft, Inc.
2.2 HOT-WATER SOFTENERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type, commercial water softener for hot-water service.
B. Configuration: Single unit with one softener tank and one brine tank.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 44, "Cation Exchange Water Softeners."
D. Softener Tank: FRP, pressure-vessel quality. Include hydrostatic test at minimum of one and one-
half times pressure rating and the following:
1. Construction: Fabricated and stamped to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section X, "Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."
2. Pressure Rating: minimum 860 kPa (125 psig).

3. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 4.4 to at least 66 deg C (40 to at
least 150 deg F).
4. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed level.
5. Distribution Systems: Manufacturer's standard, modified for hot-water service.
6. Liner: PE, ABS, or other material suitable for hot potable-water service.
E. Controls: Electrical or mechanical timer. Include programmable-, automatic-, and manual-

operation features.
F. Brine Tank: Combination brine and brine measuring. Include section with salt platform and screen
for dry-salt storage and section for brine, or single section for wet-salt storage without platform.
1. Construction: Fabricated from FRP or molded PE. Include plastic cover.

2. Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine withdrawn and
freshwater refill. Include brine tubing and fittings.
3. Size: Sufficient for at least four regenerations at full salting.
G. Include the following factory-installed accessories:
1. Piping, valves, drains, and pressure gages.

2. Sampling cock.
3. Main-operating-valve position indicator.
4. Water meter.
2.3 HOUSEHOLD WATER SOFTENERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type, household or commercial water softener suitable

for household applications.
B. Configuration: Single unit with one softener tank and one brine tank.
C. Softener Tank: Steel or FRP, with coating or liner suitable for potable-water service and 690-kPa
(100-psig) minimum pressure rating.
D. NSF Compliance: NSF 44, "Cation Exchange Water Softeners," and NSF 61, "Drinking Water
System Components--Health Effects."
E. Controls: For automatic or fully automatic operation.
F. Brine Tank: Combination brine and brine measuring. Include single wet-salt storage section.
1. Construction: Fabricated from FRP or molded PE. Include plastic cover.

3. Size: Sufficient for at least two regenerations at full salting.
2.4 COMMERCIAL/INDUSTRIAL WATER SOFTENERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type, commercial water softener.
B. Configuration: Quadruple unit with four softener tanks and one brine tank.
C. NSF Compliance: NSF 44, "Cation Exchange Water Softeners," and NSF 61, "Drinking Water
System Components--Health Effects."

D. Softener Tank: FRP, pressure-vessel quality. Include hydrostatic test at minimum of one and one-
half times pressure rating and the following:
1. Construction: Fabricated and stamped to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section X, "Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."
2. Pressure Rating: minimum 860 kPa (125 psig).
3. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 4.4 to at least 49 deg C (40 to at
least 120 deg F).
4. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed level.
5. Support Legs or Skirt: Constructed of structural steel, attached to tank bottom.
6. Upper Distribution System: Single, point type, fabricated from galvanized-steel pipe and
fittings.
7. Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type; fabricated from
nonmetallic pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging plastic strainers;
arranged for even flow distribution through resin bed.
8. Liner: PE, ABS, or other material suitable for potable water.
E. Controls: Fully automatic; factory mounted on units and factory-wired cycle controls. Include the
following:
1. Adjustable duration of various regeneration steps.

2. Push-button start and complete manual operation.
3. Electric time clock and switch for fully automatic operation, adjustable to initiate
regeneration at any hour of day and any day of week or at fixed intervals.
4. Sequence of Operation: Program multiport pilot-control valve to automatically pressure
actuate main operating valve through steps of regeneration and return to service. Include the
following:
a. Pointer on pilot-control valve to indicate cycle of operation.

b. Means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails.
5. Main Operating Valves: Industrial, automatic, multiport, diaphragm type with the following
features:
a. Slow opening and closing, nonslam operation.

b. Diaphragm guiding on full perimeter from fully open to fully closed.
c. Isolated dissimilar metals within valve.
d. Self-adjusting, internal, automatic brine injector that will draw brine and rinse at
constant rate independent of pressure.
e. Sampling cocks for soft water.
f. Special tools are not required for service.
6. Flow Control: Automatic, to control backwash and flush rates over wide variations in
operating pressures, and that does not require field adjustments.
a. Demand-Initiated Control: Equip each softener tank of twin or other multiple tank
units with automatic-reset-head water meters that will electrically activate cycle
controllers to initiate regeneration at preset total in liters (gallons). Design so heads
will automatically reset to preset total in liters (gallons) for next service run. Include
electrical lockout to prevent simultaneous regeneration of more than one tank.
F. Brine Tank: Combination brine and brine measuring. Include section with salt platform and screen
for dry-salt storage and section for brine.
1. Construction: Fabricated from 4.75-mm thick fiberglass or 9.5-mm thick molded PE.
Include plastic cover.

3. Size: Sufficient for at least four regenerations at full salting.
G. Include the following factory-installed accessories:
1. Piping, valves, drains, and pressure gages.

2. Sampling cocks.
3. Main-operating-valve position indicators.
4. Water meters.
2.5 CHEMICALS
A. Ion-Exchange Resin: High-capacity, sulfonated polystyrene that is stable over entire pH range with
good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock. Include capacity to 68.7 kg of calcium
carbonate hardness/cu. m (30,000 grains of calcium carbonate hardness/cu. ft.) of resin when
regenerated with 6.8 kg (15 lb) of salt.
B. Salt for Brine-Tank Applications: High-purity, sodium chloride that is free of dirt and foreign
material. Rock and granulated forms are unacceptable.
1. Form: Salt pellets.
2.6 WATER TESTING SETS
A. Water-Hardness Testing Set: Manufacturer's standard testing apparatus and chemicals with testing
procedure instructions and metal container suitable for wall mounting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for equipment. Refer to
and Methods."
3.2 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION
A. Install water softener equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing servicing
are accessible.
B. Install seismic restraints for tanks and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to substrate.
C. Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each water softener tank.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for pressure gages.
D. Install water testing sets near each water softener and mount on wall where indicated.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Make piping connections to dissimilar-metal water piping with dielectric fittings. Refer to
Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for dielectric fittings.
D. Install shutoff valves on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank, and on
inlet and outlet headers.
1. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations indicated.
E. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
F. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.
G. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices. Electrical power wiring, devices, and
connections are specified in Division 16 Sections.
H. Ground equipment.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field

assembly of components and installation of water softeners, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Tests: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
equipment.
B. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of
four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.
Comply with the following:
1. ASTM D 859, "Test Method for Silica in Water."

2. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water."
3. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water."
4. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water."
5. ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water."
6. ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."
3.5 COMMISSIONING
B. Perform the following final checks before startup:

1. Water Piping Systems: Verify that tests have been completed.

2. Load Softener Tank: Install gravel to cover lower distribution system and add water; smooth
gravel surface and add softening resin.
3. Load Brine Tank: Add water and fill tank with pellet-form salt.
C. Energize circuits.
D. Adjust operating controls.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain water softeners. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training "
1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.

SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following for domestic water systems:
1. Household, electric water heaters.

2. Tankless, electric water heaters.
3. Accessories.
A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For commercial domestic-water heaters, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.
ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15485 / Page 1 of 6

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in operation and maintenance
H. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters
and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products complying with
requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels Division 1.
E. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
F. Local Certification: Heaters should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
1.6 WARRANTY

replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include heating elements and storage tanks.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:issuance of “Taking Over
Certificate”:
a. Heating Elements: 5 years.

b. Storage Tanks: 10 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
1. Electric Water Heaters:
a. American Water Heater Co.

b. Bradford White Corp.
c. Lochinvar Corp.
d. Harsco Industrial Patterson-Kelley Co.
e. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
f. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
g. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
h. Vaughn Manufacturing Corp.
2. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units:
a. Safety: W. H. Safety Products, Inc.
2.2 HOUSEHOLD, STORAGE, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for operating
on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
B. Storage Tank Construction: Steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure rating.
1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections, relief
valve, drain, anode rod, and controls as required. Attach tappings to tank before testing and
labeling. Include ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2-2007. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
a. Color: White, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Heating Elements: Two electric, screw-in, immersion type.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element with wiring arrangement for
nonsimultaneous operation.
D. Anode Rod: Factory installed, magnesium.
E. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.
F. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
G. Heat Trap: Factory-installed, integral piping arrangement or cold-type inlet and hot-type outlet
fittings complying with ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2.
2.3 POINT-OF-USE, TANKLESS, ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with UL 174 - 2004, internally glass lined with heating element suitable for
operating on voltage, phase and cycle, shown in the schedule on the Electrical Drawings.
B. Construction: Without hot-water storage.
1. Working-Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa (150 psig).

2. Tappings: ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-1983 (R2001), pipe thread.

3. Interior Finish: Materials complying with NSF/ANSI 61-2008, barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings.
4. Jacket: Aluminum or steel, with enameled finish, or plastic.
C. Heating System: Electric-resistance type.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

2. Temperature Control: Adjustable, microprocessor temperature-control thermostat for
remote, wall-mounting installation. Include control wiring.
3. Temperature Control: Factory-set, temperature-control thermostat for fixed, outlet-water
temperature.
4. Temperature Control: Flow-control fitting in inlet piping.
5. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
D. Mounting: Bracket or device for wall mounting.
2.4 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying
with PTC 25-2001. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure
setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that
extends into tank.
1. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.
2. Exception: Omit combination temperature and pressure relief valve for tankless water
heater, and furnish pressure relief valve for installation in piping.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with PTC 25. Include pressure
setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with PTC 25-2001. Furnish for installation in piping.
1. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
D. Water Regulators: ASSE 1003, water-pressure reducing valve. Set at 172.5-kPa- (25-psig-)
maximum outlet pressure.
E. Shock Absorbers: ANSI/ASSE 1010 or PDI WH201, Size A water hammer arrester.
F. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 450-mm high,
enclosed-base stand. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and DN25 (NPS 1) drain
outlet with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
G. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor mounting
and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of
water heater a minimum of 450 mm above the floor.
H. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel bracket for
wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
I. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of
water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20 (NPS 3/4).

J. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

“Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings” or
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2-2007.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code construction,
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating
before shipment.
C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced
standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and
devices needing service are accessible.
B. Install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
C. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with
sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous
downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
D. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief valve
outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
E. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
F. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install
hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains.
Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.
G. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages.
H. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral
or fitting-type heat traps.
I. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS

C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-circulating
piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
F. Ground equipment.

ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
equipment.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
6. Energize electric circuits.
7. Adjust operating controls.
8. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 60 deg C (140 deg F) unless
piping system application requires higher temperature.
9. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 15486 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Commercial, dual-fuel, gas and oil-fired water heaters.
2. Accessories.
A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫ دة ا‬.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water heater assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products furnished
FUEL FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 15486 / Page 1 of 7

E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Operation Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in operation and maintenance manuals
H. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters
and are based on specific units selected. Other manufacturers' products complying with
requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 - 2007,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
D. ANSI Compliance: Provide gas water heaters that comply with ANSI standards for gas water
heaters and related products and that bear AGA certification label.
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with 2010
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels " Division 1.
F. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
1.6 WARRANTY

replace components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include storage tanks, circulators, and burner assemblies.

2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:issuance of “Taking Over
Certificate”:
a. Storage Tanks: 10 years.

b. Circulators: 5 years.
c. Burner Assemblies: 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Gas Water Heaters:
a. Ajax Boiler, Inc.

b. American Water Heater Co.
c. Bradford White Corp.
d. Lochinvar Corp.
e. Maytag Corp; Water Heating Appliances Div.
f. Raypak, Inc.
g. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Rheem Water Heater Div.
h. Rheem Manufacturing Co.; Ruud Water Heater Div.
i. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
j. State Industries.
2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters:
a. Aero Environmental, Ltd.

b. Bradford White Corp.
c. Lochinvar Corp.
d. PVI Industries, Inc.
e. RECO Industries, Inc.
f. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
g. State Industries.
h. Therma Flow, Inc.
3. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units:
a. Safety: W. H. Safety Products, Inc.
2.2 COMMERCIAL, STORAGE, DUAL-FUEL, GAS AND OIL-FIRED WATER HEATERS
A. Description: Comply with CSA ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 or UL 732.
B. Storage Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure rating.
valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and controls as required. Attach
tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.
a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, pipe
threads.
b. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ANSI/ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ANSI/ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
2. Interior Finish: Cement lining complying with NSF/ANSI 61, barrier materials for potable-
water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, “Energy Efficient Design of New
Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.” Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
C. Burner: Combination gas-oil burner assembly, and complying with appropriate requirements of
UL 795; or comply with UL 296 for oil burners for No. 2 fuel oil and UL 795 for LPG-gas fuel.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

2. Safety Control: Automatic, high-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
D. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
E. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.
F. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
G. Vent Connection: According to standards of authorities having jurisdiction for dual-fuel water
heaters.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: CSA ANSI Z21.22-1999, combination temperature and pressure relief
valve.
2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure setting less than
water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends
into tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: CSA ANSI Z21.22 pressure relief valve for storage tanks of 58.6 kW
(200,000 Btuh).
2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.
Include pressure setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: CSA ANSI Z21.22-1999.

2. Oil-Fired Water Heaters: Comply with ASME PTC 25. Furnish for installation in piping.
3. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
D. Gas Shutoff Valves: CSA ANSI Z21.15/CGA 9.1-M97, manually operated. Furnish for installation
in piping.
E. Gas Pressure Regulators: CSA ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type, factory or field installed.
Include pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply.
F. Automatic Valves: CSA ANSI Z21.21-2005/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off
automatic valve.
G. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 450-mm high,
enclosed-base stand. Include integral or separate drain pan with raised edge and DN25 (NPS 1) drain
outlet with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
H. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor mounting
and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will support bottom of
water heater a minimum of 450 mm above the floor.
I. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel bracket for
wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.

J. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than base of
water heater and include drain outlet not less than DN20 (NPS 3/4).
K. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water heater.
L. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

“Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings” or
ANSI/ASHRAE 90.2.
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters and storage tanks specified to be
ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test domestic-water heaters and storage tanks to minimum of one and one-half times
pressure rating before shipment.
C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for water heaters. Refer to
and Methods."
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced
standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and
devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
D. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA (Fire) 54 / ANSI Z223.1.
1. Install appliance, gas pressure regulators on gas-burner inlets of water heaters without
pressure regulators.
2. Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building where
required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not combine vents
except with approval of Engineer.
E. Install and connect oil-fired water heaters according to NFPA 31.

F. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with
sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in continuous
downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
G. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief valve
outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
H. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
I. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install
J. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters
and Gages" for thermometers.
K. Install pressure gages on water heater piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages.
L. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include shutoff
valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each water
heater outlet. Refer to Division 15 Section "Valves" for general-duty valves and Division 15 Section
"Meters and Gages" for thermometers.
M. Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory-applied insulation.
N. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without integral
or fitting-type heat traps.
O. Fill water heaters with water.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
D. Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size same
as inlet connection.
E. Connect oil piping to oil burner with shutoff valve and union in supply, and check valve and union
in return.
F. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
G. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Include draft hoods and diverters
where required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not smaller than
indicated unless smaller vent size has been calculated according to NFPA (Fire) 54 / ANSI Z223.1.
Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing. Gas vents are specified in Division 15 Section
"Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."

H. Oil-Fired, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Include draft diverters where
required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not smaller than indicated.
Oil-fired vents are specified in Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks."
I. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 16
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
J. Ground equipment.

ANSI/UL 486A-486B - 2004.
equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
5. Check operation of circulators.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and
Training."

SECTION 15487 - DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Domestic hot water storage tanks.
2. Accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of storage tank. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed,

B. Shop Drawings: Detail water tank assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of storage tanks certifying that products furnished
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that storage tanks,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls" Section. Include the following:
2. Dimensional Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and
3. Details description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For storage tanks to include in operation and maintenance
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 15487 / Page 1 of 5

A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of storage tanks through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label hot-water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels , Division 1.
C. Comply with NSF 61, 'Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects, Sections 1 through 9"
for all components that will be in contact with water.
D. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
1.5 WARRANTY

replace components of hot water storage tank that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Storage Water Heaters:
a. Ajax Boiler, Inc.

b. Amtrol, Inc.
c. Burnham Corp.
d. Cemline Corp.
e. Diversified Berdell Group, Inc.
f. Heat Transfer Products, Inc.
g. Patterson-Kelley Co.
h. Smith: A. O. Smith Water Products Co.
2.2 LARGE-CAPACITY, STORAGE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Description: Commercial, hot water storage tank.
B. Storage-Tank-Shell Orientation: Vertical. Include fabricated-steel legs with baseplates.
C. Storage-Tank-Shell Construction: ASME-code steel with 1035-kPa (150-psig) working-pressure

rating.
1. Manhole: 280 by 380 mm in storage-tank-shell sidewall.

valve, pressure gage, thermometer, blowdown, vent, anode rods, and controls as required.
Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.

a. DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, pipe
threads.
b. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ANSI/ASME B16.5 for
steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ANSI/ASME B16.24 for copper and
copper-alloy flanges.
3. Interior Finish: Cement lining complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
4. Exterior Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
D. Temperature Control: Adjustable temperature aquastat, mounted in storage-tank-shell head, unless

other arrangement is indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying
with ASME PTC 25.3. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and include pressure
setting less than heat-exchanger working-pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element
that extends into tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25. Include
pressure setting less than storage tank working-pressure rating.
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: Comply with ASME PTC 25. Furnish for installation in piping.
1. Exception: Omit if storage tank has integral vacuum-relieving device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated, or otherwise required, for hot water storage tanks.
Refer to Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical
Materials and Methods."
3.2 HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS INSTALLATION
A. Install storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original
design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units
so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
B. Install seismic restraints for storage tanks. Anchor to substrate.
C. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tank shells. Use relief valves
with sensing elements that extend into shells. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in
continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
D. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.

E. Install storage tank drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains. Install
F. Install thermometers on storage tank inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters
and Gages" for thermometers.
G. Install pressure gages on storage tank piping. Refer to Division 15 Section "Meters and Gages" for
pressure gages.
H. Fill storage tank with water.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to storage tank to allow service and maintenance.
D. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
E. Ground equipment.

ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
5. Check operation of circulators.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain domestic hot water storage tanks. Refer to Division 1.


SECTION 15490 - SWIMMING POOL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and special provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions
and Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish and install circulation, filtration and drainage mechanical piping as indicated on the
drawings and as per specified below in “PART 2”.
B. Furnish and install circulation and filtration equipment as indicated on the drawings and as per
specified below in “PART 2”.
C. Furnish and install domestic water system from points of connection within swimming pool
equipment room to make-up water system with two inlets, one for quick filling and other for by-
pass filling with slow closing solenoid valve and miscellaneous items as required.
D. Furnish and install filter backwash system to point of connection with sanitary sewer within
swimming pool mechanical equipment room as required.
E. Furnish and install the heating system for the pool(s), including all piping, heaters, heat exchangers,
circulating pumps, controls, gauges, thermostats and control valves required to draw water from the
recirculation line, heat the water and return it back to the recirculation line and interlock with pool
recirculation pumps.
F. Furnish and install circulation, filtration and water chemistry control components as indicated on
the drawings and as per specified below in “PART 2”.
G. Furnish and install hydrostatic relief system in the formed concrete sump of each main drain.
H. Furnish and install trench drains and area drains on pool deck.
1. Related Sections include the following:
a. Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and

requirements for penetrations through fire and smoke barrier.
b. Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for equipment and accessory
labels.
c. Section "Motors" for electric motors that are an integral part of packaged system
components.
d. Section "Mechanical Identification" for equipment and accessory labels.
e. Section "Equipment Insulation" for tank and other equipment insulation materials and
application.
f. Section "Pipe Insulation" for insulation for piping systems.
g. Section "Water Distribution Pumps" for potable-water circulators and pumps.
h. Section "Hangers and Supports" for pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
SWIMMING POOL 15490 / Page 1 of 19

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each pump, filter, balancing tank, skimmer, gutter drain, gutter grating, main drain,
water inlet fitting, flow sensor, flow control device, isolating valves, specialty valves, pH Controller,
primary sanitizer system, secondary sanitizer system, heating system, vacuum cleaning system and
piping system, include rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, accessories, and
installation instructions
B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances for pool distribution piping systems,
equipment assemblies, weights, loads, method of field assembly, components, and location and size
of each field connection. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that swimming pool

equipment, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 'Mechanical
Vibration and Seismic Controls" Section. Include the following:
3. Details description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and
D. Operation and Maintenance data for pool filters, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specialities and
special conditioning for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in the General
Requirements and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
E. Test reports as specified below in "PART 3".
A. Guarantee: Provide written guarantee that when pool equipment is operated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, swimming pool water will be crystal clear, sparkling bright, free from
suspended matter and completely sterilised at all times.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair
or replace components of pool equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
C. Submit all warranties covering, but not limited to the following:
1. Defects in material, manufacture or installation of the recirculating overflow system and

interior coating of the trench for a period of one (1) year.
2. Defects in material, manufacture and installation of the filtration, backwash, chlorination,
pH adjustments and cleaning systems, including controls for a period of one (1) year.
3. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool piping system for a period of
three (3) years.
4. Defects in material, workmanship, and installation of the pool pumps for a period of one (1)
year.

5. Manufacturer's minimum fifteen (15) year warranty on the filter tank and lining against
defective materials or workmanship of the tank and components. (Additional warranty time
may be purchased from the manufacturer).
6. Manufacturer's minimum one (1) year warranty against defective materials, components and
workmanship in the sanitizing feed system.
7. Manufacturer's minimum one (1) year warranty against defective materials, components and
workmanship in the pH Control system.
D. Water to be clear: when pool is in use, water is to be sufficiently clear to permit a 150 mm diameter
black disc on a white background placed on bottom of pool to be clearly visible from side walls of
pool at all distances up to 10 m measured from a line drawn across the disc.
E. Water to be sterile: pool is in use not more than 15% of samples of water taken covering any
considerable period are to contain more than 200 bacteria per millilitre or are to show positive test
in any of five 10 ml samples of water. Primary fermentation tubes showing gas should be confirmed.
F. Free residual chlorine in water at all times is to be not less than 1 ppm and not more than 5 ppm.
G. pH of water at all times is to be not less than 7.2 and not more than 7.8.
H. Water quality: make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended
in the standard methods of the examination of water, sewage and industrial wastes of the American
Public Health Association insofar as these methods are applicable to pool water.
I. Performance tests: carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets
design requirements as noted on the Drawings and in the Specification.
J. Qualified engineer or technician from equipment manufacturer is to supervise installation, start-up

equipment, make necessary adjustments, calibrations and tests in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and instruct and train the personnel.
K. Source Limitations: Obtain all swimming pools equipment through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. All chemicals needed for one-year operation.
A. Delivery: Deliver all materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers
with all labels intact and legible.
B. Storage: Store all materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store
only the specified materials at the Project site.
C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect swimming pool mechanical items before, during and
after installation and to protect the installed Work of all other trades.
D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to
the approval of the Owner’s Representative and at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials and equipment shall be new, of best quality for the purpose intended, and shall be clearly
marked with manufacturer’s name and nameplate data or stamp and rating.
B. As far as practicable, materials and equipment shall be of one manufacturer.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
or approved equal:
1. Astral Pool.
2. Pahlen.
3. Certikin International Ltd.
4. Hayward Pool Products, Inc.
5. Aquatic Development Group, Inc.
2.3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
Turnover rate for Swimming pools : one complete change over every 5 hrs.
Turnover rate for Hot tubs and whirlpools : one complete change over every 20 minutes.
Turnover rate for children pools or splash pad : one complete change over every 2 hrs.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings and schedule of equipment.
2.4 PIPING SYSTEM
A. General
1. Provide all recirculating piping between the pools and filter room, fill receptor and all
interconnecting piping to and from the chemical feed systems and chemical controller.
2. Provide all necessary pipe supports and support systems required to support all associated
piping and valves.
3. Provide all other tubing, conduit, or piping associated with equipment specified herein.
Coordinate with other trades.
B. Pipes
1. PVC Schedule 80: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications,
ASTM Specification D-1785, for swimming pool piping above, in and under mechanical
room.
2. CPVC Schedule 80: Type 1, normal impact, NSF approved for solvent welding applications,
ASTM Specification D-1785, for heater piping system and fresh water supply.
3. Special tubing system: Chemical feed and sanitizer piping to be defined and supplied by
equipment manufacturer.
4. Provide all other tubing, conduit, or piping associated with equipment specified herein.
Coordinate with other trades.
5. Pipe connections through walls to be with no-leak flanges.

6. Connections between metallic piping and/or equipment and PVC shall be flanged.
7. Provide all necessary pipe supports and support systems required to support all associated
piping and valves.
C. Valves
1. Valves 3 inch and larger shall be butterfly type valves, with PVC body, 175# SWP with
stainless steel shaft, polypropylene disc and replaceable resilient seat bonded to a rigid shaft
and guaranteed for bubble tight shutoff from 27 inch vacuum to 150 PSI. Extended neck 2
inch beyond flanges for any insulated piping shall be provided with handle for manual
operation.
2. Valves smaller than 3" shall be PVC true union ball valves, full port, three-piece
construction, blowout-proof stem, Viton seal with socket end connectors.
3. Check valves shall be a quick closing non-slam type, either self aligning wafer or flanged
type, of corrosion resistant materials suitable for use in a swimming pool environment. Install
check valves in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Locate Check valves
at least 5 pipe diameters from pumps and fittings. Check valves shall be either with PVC
body and disks, stainless steel bolts, connectors and fittings, or bronze/stainless steel body
with 316L stainless internals; or shall be elastomeric lined, with bronze/stainless disks and
316L stainless fittings, or approved equal, for installation between 150 lb flanges.
4. Modulating float valve in the surge tank(s) shall have PVC body and stainless steel wafer
disc. All hardware shall be non-corrodible. The float-operated valves shall be furnished and
installed horizontally on the main drain lines in the surge tanks. Valve shall consist of all
non-corrosion components including shaft, float arm, pins and floats. Valves shall be suitable
for mounting on a 125E class standard PVC flange. The float arm leverage weight and pivot
lengths shall be adjustable to obtain desired ratio of surge tank level change to pool gutter
overflow level change. Two floats and stabilizer required.
5. Submerged valves up to 3 inch shall be PVC true union ball valves. Submerged valves over
3 inch to be PVC bodied, wafer type, butterfly valves with stainless steel handle extensions
as required. Valves shall be by approved manufacturers listed above. Submerged valves must
be provided with all stainless steel connectors. The stem housing extensions shall be properly
supported and braced.
6. All butterfly type valves 8 inch and larger shall be fitted with a watertight gear operator.
7. All valves located 7 ft. or greater off the floor shall be fitted with a chain operator.
8. All submerged valves, valves buried below grade or valves not readily accessible, shall be
furnished with a stainless steel reach rod and handle.
D. Pipe and Valve Identifications
1. All exposed pool piping shall be equipped with color coded flow directional arrows at thirty
(30) inch intervals. The following table shall be used to indicate the pool pipe color selection.
The Contractor shall verify that all pool piping identification is in accordance with all local
and state health regulations.
Pipe Service Application Color

Pool Heat Exchanger Lines RED
Fresh or Make-Up Water Lines DARK BLUE
DARK
Backwash Waste Water Lines
BROWN
Main Drain Lines BLACK
Filter Water Lines CYAN
Chlorine Feed Lines YELLOW
Acid Feed Lines PINK
OLIVE
Gutter Lines
GREEN

2. All valves shall be identified with minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter brass tags stamped with
minimum 1/2-inch high numbers and attached to valves with #16 brass jack chain. (Plastic
laminate engraved tags with nylon attachment acceptable.) Valves shall be described as to
their function and referenced in the operating instruction manual and wall mounted piping
diagram to be prepared by the CONTRACTOR.
2.5 CIRCULATING PUMPS
A. Circulating Pumps to be certified by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and bear the certification
mark.
B. Type: Horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type, directly connected to
motor through a heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling guard.
C. Base: Pump and motor shall be mounted on common steel base adequately reinforced against
deflection, with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.
D. Bearings: Pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy-duty grease lubricated ball
bearings mounted in heavy iron frame with adequate supports to base for maximum rigidity.
E. Pump Casing: High tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways, register fitted and
bolted to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze war rings and tapped and plugged
bottom drain and top vent connections.
F. Impeller: Stainless steel, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place.
G. Shaft: One-piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with minimum deflection.
H. Mechanical Seal: Ni-resist face, cargon washer and stainless steel metal parts.
I. Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, Fan Cooled (TEFC), with permanently lubricated and sealed ball
bearings.
J. Coating: Fusion bonded epoxy coating on all wetted parts to protect all non-bronze or non-stainless
steel pump parts and pump base from corrosion.
K. Accessories:
1. Hair and Lint Strainer: Strainers on pump suctions to be straight, in-line, flanged type,
designed for swimming pools, of fiberglass or epoxy coated stainless steel construction with
quick opening cover lid, positively sealing O-ring, yoke type cover clamp with threaded
tightening bolt and 40 mm IPS drain plug, stainless steel basket with at least 4 times the free
open area as the inlet pipe and the strainer to be if a low pressure drop full-open or a tapered
eccentric reducing type.
2. Pressure Gauge: Install on suction and discharge sides of each pump, liquid filled, 316L
Stainless steel bourdon tube type with 4-1/2” dial, high impact polypropylene or stainless
steel case, corrosion resistant white scale with black divisions and numerals, 300 Series
stainless steel heavy duty rotary bushed movement, black enameled balanced Micrometer
pointer bottom connection, chrome ring and shut-off cock. Scale ranges shall be selected to
indicate the normal system operating pressure of each system or location within the system.
Pressure ranges shall be calibrated in psig. A stainless steel filter type pressure snubber shall
be provided for each pressure gauge installed consisting of a 3/8 inch diameter by 1/8 inch
thick Micro Metallic stainless steel filter and placed in the line just before the pressure gauge.
Provide isolation brass valves or brass gauge cocks attach gauge for easy replacement and
maintenance.

3. Vacuum Gauge: Install on suction side of each pump, liquid filled, 316L Stainless steel
bourdon tube type with 4-1/2” dial, high impact polypropylene or stainless steel case,
corrosion resistant white scale with black divisions and numerals, 300 Series stainless steel
heavy duty rotary bushed movement, black enameled balanced Micrometer pointer bottom
connection, chrome ring and shut-off cock. Scale ranges shall be selected to indicate the
normal system operating pressure of each system or location within the system. Vacuum
ranges shall be calibrated in inches of mercury. A stainless steel filter type pressure snubber
shall be provided for each pressure gauge installed consisting of a 3/8 inch diameter by 1/8
inch thick Micro Metallic stainless steel filter and placed in the line just before the pressure
gauge. Provide isolation brass valves or brass gauge cocks attach gauge for easy replacement
and maintenance.
4. Compound Gauge: Install on suction side of each pump, it is compound pressure and vacuum
gauge, liquid filled, 316L Stainless steel bourdon tube type with 4-1/2” dial, high impact
polypropylene or stainless steel case, corrosion resistant white scale with black divisions and
numerals, 300 Series stainless steel heavy duty rotary bushed movement, black enameled
balanced Micrometer pointer bottom connection, chrome ring and shut-off cock. Scale
ranges shall be selected to indicate the normal system operating pressure of each system or
location within the system. Pressure ranges shall be calibrated in psig and vacuum ranges
shall be calibrated in inches of mercury. A stainless steel filter type pressure snubber shall
be provided for each pressure gauge installed consisting of a 3/8 inch diameter by 1/8 inch
thick Micro Metallic stainless steel filter and placed in the line just before the pressure gauge.
Provide isolation brass valves or brass gauge cocks attach gauge for easy replacement and
maintenance.
2.6 SAND FILTERS
A. The filter system shall consist of high rate pressure sand filter tank(s) as shown on the drawings.
Every aspect and component of the filter system must be certified by the National Sanitation
Foundation (NSF) and bear the certification mark. The filter must have an engraved metal data plate
permanently affixed on the face of the system that describes operational data and instructions and
indicates startup data.
B. Type: high flow rate, sand filter, pressure type, designed for specified filtration rate and operating
pressure and hydrostatically tested at factory to specified test pressure. Quality of filtrate to be
guaranteed to be in the 2 micron range.
C. Operation: filters to be designed with efficient influent and under drain systems to ensure uniform
water flow through filtering and backwash operations and to prevent migration, mounding or
channeling of filter bed. Minimum freeboard of 300 mm to be provided between top of filter bed
and influent water distribution system. Influent and under drain systems to be corrosion resistant
materials.
D. Filter Tank: fiberglass reinforced polyester plastic and with an internal gel coating and of adequate
thickness for specified operating and test pressure or approved equal.
E. Filter Tank Connections: All tank connections 2 inches and smaller shall be 150 lb. Type 316L
stainless steel threaded full couplings. All tank connections 3 inches and larger shall be heavy steel
bosses drilled and tapped both sides to receive standard flanged fittings or 316L stainless steel
nipples.
F. Face piping and valves to be provided and arranged for the operations of filtering, backwash and
rinse. Face piping to be shall be equipped with the necessary flanges and connections for the internal
and external piping. Connections shall be comprised of fiberglass flanges and schedule 80 PVC
flanges, Valves to be either flanged cast iron gate valves with bronze trim or butterfly valves of
wafer type, Valves to be same size as face piping.

G. Automatic flow controllers to be provided to limit filtering, backwash and rinse flow rates to
maximum values recommended by manufacturer.
H. Accessories: filters to be complete with the following accessories and appurtenances:
1. Standard size manhole on top dished head with boiler type cover.
2. Four jack type supports individually adjustable for filter level adjustment and of adequate
strength to carry filter and contents.
3. Automatic air release valve on top dished head.
4. Gauge panel of cast bronze with two 100 mm minimum diameter dial pressure gauges
connected with copper tubes to filter inlet and outlet connections.
5. Filter drain valve.
6. Substantial lifting lugs.
I. Paint: supply filters painted inside and outside with two coats of chemical resistant epoxy paint.
J. Filter media to be as recommended and as provided by filter manufacturer specifically for the filters.
Components to be shipped separately in clearly marked bags.
K. Filter media: provide clear instructions for field application of filter media in filters.
L. Filter media to be graded rock and gravel to fine sand from bottom up, in layers of thickness to
manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Rock on gravel: clean, hard, round stones with average specific gravity of not less than 2.5, free
from shale, mica, clay, sandstone, sand, loam or other impurities. Gravel is not to have more than
2% by weight of thin, flat or elongated pieces.
N. Sand: hard, durable grains of round or subangular silica sand, free from clay, loam, dirt and organic
matter. Not more than 1% to be flat or micaceous particles. Sand is to meet screen requirements
given in the following table and have effective size of 0.35 to 0.45 mm and uniformity coefficient
of 1.45 to 1.69.
Sand Screen Requirements

Sieve No. % Retained on % Passing Through
U.S. Tyler Successive Screens Successive Screens
16 14 0-6 94 - 100
20 20 3 - 23 71 - 97
30 28 24 - 40 31 - 73
40 36 43 - 25 6 - 25
50 43 22 - 6 0–3
2.7 PRIMARY SANITIZER CHLORINATION SYSTEM
A. System is to provide continuous, automatic and accurate control of residual chlorine in pool water
by constantly testing a water sample and automatically adjusting chlorine dosing apparatus to
maintain desired residual chlorine in water.
B. Components: chlorine residual analyzer, chlorine residual controller, chlorine residual recorder,
chlorine control valve, 2 x 100 litres hypochlorine solution cylinders tubing and accessories.
C. Operation to be as follows: chlorine is to be added to water stream going to pool, water sample is to
be continuously analyzed and taken from location downstream from point where chlorine is added,
amount of residual chlorine in continuous sample is to be measured in chlorine residual analyzer
which is to send a signal, proportional to amount of residual chlorine in water, to the controller and
through the controller to the recorder, controller is to compare value of actual chlorine residual with

desired chlorine residual (Set Point) and send appropriate signals to chlorine control valve to
increase or reduce chlorine feed rate to bring residual chlorine in water back to desired level.
D. Chlorine residual analyser to be wall mounted, with gravity feed type flow control system for
maintaining constant sample flow through cell and synchronous motor driven rotating striker and
PVC cleaning balls in sample cell to keep electrodes at constant state of cleanliness. It is to have
acetate reagent buffer solution system with constant head reagent feed system with control valve to
meter reagent into sample cell.
E. Chlorine residual analyzer is to work on the principle of the amperometric type cell and designed to
measure free chlorine residual over a range of 0 to 2 ppm. It is to use gold and copper electrodes
and have automatic temperature compensation such that variation of sample temperature will not
affect cell output. It is to be drift free and type not requiring recalibration.
F. Chlorine residual controller to be wall mounted and to have, in addition to SET POINT adjustment,
an adjustment for setting frequency of corrective action when difference exists between SET POINT
and measured residual chlorine and an adjustment for duration of time that control valve will open
or close at constant rate during each corrective cycle. It is to have means for opening or closing
feed rate control valve manually and visual indication of valve position.
G. Chlorine residual controller is to work on the principle of matching electric currents.
H. Chlorine residual controller is to have the following face instruments:
1. Power on-off switch

2. Power on indicator light
3. Automatic/manual selector switch
4. Fuse.
I. Chlorine residual controller: wall mounted, solid state type, requiring no ink and incorporating 30-
day strip chart, indicator strip for 0 to 2 ppm range and front clear glass cover. It is to have adjustable
high and low alarm contacts to actuate remote visual and audible alarms and be complete with spare
charts for two years' operation.
J. Chlorine feed rate control pump: electric motor driven, proportional type.
K. Types of Chlorination systems: as indicated on the drawings.
1. Calcium Hypochlorite.
2. Sodium Hypochlorite (alternative for Calcium Hypochlorite incase calcium hardness is more
than 400 ppm in water).
2.8 SUPPLEMENTAL SANITIZER UV SYSTEM (to be applied when indicated on the drawings)
A. UV system is used in the range of 220nm to 400nm to kill bacteria, viruses, molds and their spores
and to continuously remove chloramines. The concentration of free chlorine residual shall at all
times meet the requirements of the Health Department authority having jurisdiction over the
swimming pool. Maintained combined chlorine levels shall be guaranteed at a level no greater than
0.2 ppm.
B. UV system must have a UL listing on the complete system, and be listed under NSF Standard 50
and shall have Health Department approval.
C. The UV system Equipment General Description: The UV System shall be a complete unit with all
necessary controls. The control panel and the UV chamber shall be capable of being installed up to

200 feet apart. The system shall be pre-assembled and controls packaged for ease of installation at
the job site and shall include:
a. The UV chamber with flow and output safety control.

b. A UV medium pressure arc tube modified to emit UV light from 220nm to 400nm.
c. An automatic, adjustable, electric motor-driven quartz sleeve cleaning system.
d. Operational and power controls.
e. The ability to do automatic dose control of the UV delivered to the pool water.
f. The system shall be sized to match the swimming pool recirculation rate and turnover
rate of each pool.
D. UV Chamber: The UV chamber shall be pressure rated for continuous operation at 150psi tested to
225psi and constructed of type 316L stainless steel. It shall be designed for an internal pressure drop
not to exceed 2 psi at maximum flow. The chamber shall incorporate:
a. A temperature sensor to shut off the UV arc tube when there is inadequate flow in the
chamber.
b. An UV intensity monitor which alarms when the UV arc tube output drops below the
dosing level required for proper operation. The monitor shall be of the wet probe type
wavelength specific to 240nm – 280nm with a 4-20mA output. It shall display actual
lamp intensity (nW/cm2) on the control cabinet door display. (NOTE: Relative type
UV monitors shall not be acceptable). Dry probe monitors shall not be acceptable, as
this type cannot be wiped during the automatic wiping action. Direct line of site
monitors (i.e. those types that have the sensor directly exposed to UV light) shall not
be permitted. The monitor shall use offset filters to extend monitor life and to ensure
only a limited band of wavelengths is measured.
c. A stainless steel terminal cover fastened to the chamber end plate, to which is affixed
the electrical conduit, to protect the lamps and electrical leads. (NOTE: plastic
terminal covers/caps shall not be permitted).
d. A design for laminar flow to provide maximum efficiency in the transfer of UV to the
water. (NOTE: baffle plates or similar devices create turbulent flow and dead spots
which reduce the efficiency of UV transfer into the water and are therefore not
permitted).
e. Limit switches shall be located to position the wiper, and to prevent the wiper parking
over the active arc tube. The switches shall be magnetic type, and shallinclude visual
indication of the wiper position. The wiper mechanism shall be fail safe, and shall
shut the system down in the event of failure, as described below.
f. The chamber shall contain a quartz sleeve, which is sealed at both ends by a UV
shrouded O ring. The quartz must be annealed for durability and against breakage.
Systems that contain a quartz thimble shall not be permitted. The thimble is inherently
buoyant and poses a safety risk to operators during annual maintenance.
g. The wetted surfaces shall be chemically passivated and all welds ground to eliminate
any potential corrosion mechanisms. Crevices (as found behind a quartz thimble)
shall not be permitted under any circumstance.
E. Automatic Wiper System: For periodic cleaning of the quartz sleeves and the UV monitor probe,
the chamber shall be fitted with an automatic cleaning mechanism. It shall consist of a single SS
yoke with Teflon bosses and replaceable molded viton wiper rings that travel the full length of the
quartz sleeve twice per cleaning cycle. The frequency of the wiper cycle shall be adjustable from 15
to 720 minutes and set for job conditions. The mechanism shall be driven by a two-pole bi-
directional electric motor and acme lead screw. Reed type limit switches shall control the length of
travel. The wiper mechanism wiper rings in the “parked” position shall not be over the lamp,
blocking the transfer of UV light, or creating a “hot” spot on the arc tube.
F. Ultra Violet Lamp: The UV lamp shall be high intensity, medium-pressure UV arc tube modified
to emit a continuous UV spectrum from 220nm to 400nm into the water. The lamp shall be designed
to have a spectral output at 245nm (Monochloramine), 297nm (Dichloramine) and both 260nm and

336nm for Trichloramine. Full output must be available from 0 to 200 degrees. The lamp shall be
UL approved with one electrical lead at each end. Lamps with metal frames to permit a single
electrical connection diminish operational life and shall not be permitted, as the frame can obscure
the UV and metal from the frame can be transferred onto the inside of the quartz sleeve, thus
inhibiting the UV action. A spectral certificate shall be provided with each lamp to demonstrate
spectral accuracy. Each lamp shall be individually numbered and the manufacturing process shall
permit full audit and traceability of assembly. In addition to an individual serial number, the part
number shall be displayed on the lamp.
G. UV System Control: The system control cabinet shall be epoxy-coated steel, NEMA 12 fan cooled
with louvers and replaceable filters. The control system shall be deenergized when the cabinet
door(s) are open. All wiring shall be harnessed in DIN channels. The power supply to the UV arc
tubes shall be from a constant wattage transformer. High frequency ballast systems shall not be used.
The entire system shall be UL listed and there shall be a UL decal clearly showing this listing
displayed in the cabinet. The control panel shall contain an Earth Leakage detector, which shall
provide fail-safe protection for bathers and those working on the equipment within the pool
environment. This requirement is mandatory, as the voltages used within UV systems can pose risk
of death. The control panel will require a dedicated 50 amp circuit. The control panel shall be UL
LISTED, and in addition shall conform to EN 50081 and EN 61000. The panel and all UV
components shall be manufactured to ISO 9001-2000.
2.9 SODA ASH SYSTEM
A. For raising pH.
B. Soda Ash Tank:
1. Tank for Soda Ash solution to control and disinfect with dozing pump.
2. Tank shall be polyethylene construction with visible level indicator, fill connection and
drainage plug.
3. Tank shall be complete with electrical agitator having stainless steel shaft and helix.
C. Dozing Pump:
1. Dozing pump shall have adjustable flow rate between 0 and 100 %. Pump precision shall be
within the 2 % range.
2.10 CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM
A. For lowering pH.
B. Provide a system for storing, regulating and feeding carbon dioxide for pH control. The system shall
consist of CO2 storage tank(s), a lockable fill box for bulk delivery, a pressure reducing/regulating
system, automatic tank changeover system, a feed and rate of flow adjustment control system,
injection or mass transfer system, and all valves, tubing, fittings and appurtenances required for a
complete and operable system. The system is to include the following components.
1. CO2 Storage Tanks
a. Mass Storage Tank(s): Provide two (2) 450 lb mass storage tanks meeting ASME
requirements, specifically designed and configured for use with CO2. The tank(s)
shall be of an insulated, vacuum-jacketed double wall construction with a rated
service pressure of at least 292 psig. The outer shell shall be stainless steel and given
a 10 mil dry film thickness epoxy coating, the inner shell shall be of stainless steel.
Each tank shall include shut off and pressure regulating valves, gauges for accurate

output pressure control, a 350 psig pressure relief valve, and shall be provided with a
dual pressure building/economizer regulator that includes a 7.5 amp, 120 VAC heater
extending into the tank and the liquid CO2. Usage rate capacity shall have a range of
3.2 pounds per day to 20 pounds per hour. Where required, the tanks shall be
configured for a dual tank configuration. Fill tank with CO2 for initial testing and
operation, and provide full tank(s) at the time of Owner acceptance. Tanks are to be
connected to outside fill station(s), as indicated, with two lengths of 1/2 inch ODT
copper or pressure rated poly/tygon tubing suitable for the purpose: one to transfer
liquid to the tanks from a bulk delivery vehicle, and the other from the relief valves
to the outside of the building. Confirm in field. Secure tank to building wall with a
coped saddle and a 16 GA x 3” stainless steel strap bolted to wall.
b. Provide a remote fill station capable of filling the tanks at the rate of approximately
30 to 50 pounds per minute in a manner that does not require entry to the storage room
containing the CO2 tanks, length of tubing shall not be more than 50’, unless
otherwise noted. Each fill station shall consist of a flush mounted (recessed) lockable
fill box located at the exterior of the building, as indicated, connected to the CO2
system. It shall include a quick disconnect and automatic closure coupling. Box shall
be 8" x 8" x 2” and constructed of painted 16 gauge galvanized or stainless steel, or
sized to module with exterior masonry. Fill station should not be more than about 40’
from the storage tank. Verify maximum length of fill tubing with manufacturer.
2. Automatic Dual Tank Switchover System
a. Dual tank automatic switchover system with gauges.
3. Mass Transfer System. Provide one mass transfer system, as described below, for each of the
features to receive CO2. Feed is to be totally diffused and made to go fully into solution
without evidence of CO2 bubbling at any point where water is open to atmosphere.
b. Provide a pre-plumbed and pre-wired, skid mounted, high efficiency CO2 feed and
mass transfer system capable of feeding from 0 to 170 SCFH of CO2. System to
include a 1 HP stainless steel / Noryl booster pump, motor starter, mass transfer
venture style polyethylene injector, 12 to 15 gallon FRP contact chamber with interior
diffusers, 120 VAC / 24 VAC transformer, adjustable feed rate flow controller, 24
VAC solenoid valve, feed indicator light, and all fittings, unions, valves, tubing,
connectors and appurtenances required for a complete and operable installation. Skid
is to be of noncorrosive materials and provided with drilled legs for bolting to the
floor.
2.11 WATER CHEMISTRY MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. A programmable chemical automation system shall be furnished for the competition for continuous
monitoring of water chemistry (ORP/HRR, PPM, pH and Temperature), and for automatic control
of the chemical feeders, heater, and water level. Installation of the system shall be as specified by
the manufacturer and no exceptions shall be taken. Contractor shall furnish and install the water
chemistry monitoring and control system as specified below.
B. The controller shall automatically activate the appropriate chemical feeders in order to maintain the
sanitizer level within +/-0.1 parts per million (PPM) or +/- 10 Mv (millivolts) of Oxidation
Reduction Potential (ORP) and the pH within +/- 0.1 pH unit of the setpoints selected by the
operator. ORP and Sanitizer functions shall include levels shall be adjustable with a numeric keypad
mounted on the front panel of the unit. Controllers with internal switches or calibration adjustments
will not be considered equal.
C. The controller shall be capable of actuating all outputs in the following operator-selectable modes:
off, manual, automatic and timer cycle. In the automatic mode, the operator shall be able to choose

between on/off control with adjustable dead band or proportional feed control with adjustable dead
band and progressive control zones.
D. The controller shall include a programmable seven-day clock program with operator selectable ON
and OFF times for each day of the week and optional separate chemical feeder relay control.
E. The controller shall include a temperature sensor and automatic control of the heater with a seven-
day energy saver program.
F. The controller shall continuously calculate and display the Langelier Saturation Index using either
sensor data and/or manual input for pH, temperature, total alkalinity and calcium hardness. The
resulting calculated water condition shall be displayed on the main screen as either "Scaling",
"Corrosive" or "OK".
G. The controller shall be contained in a NEMA Type 4X (rain and splash proof) lockable fiberglass
cabinet with an LCD graphic display screen of eight (8) lines of twenty two (22) alphanumeric
characters. The main screen shall display current readings, control modes and operational status for
ORP, PPM, pH, temperature (flow rate, influent and effluent pressure displays available with
optional installation.) A 16-key touch pad shall be provided for direct access to all the menus and
submenus and for entering numerical data. Controllers with smaller displays or displays that require
scrolling through menus will not be considered equal. All screens shall have the capability of being
displayed at any time in unabbreviated English, French or Spanish and in US or metric units.
H. The sensor bypass line shall include an in-line filter, a flowmeter, a safety flow switch, a sampling
spigot and two flow control valves, or shall include a flow cell assembly with a safety flow switch.
I. The controller shall be factory set to water treatment industry standards. The operator shall be able
at any time to adjust all programmable functions to preferred settings. The controller shall have a
reset mode to reset all or selected functions to the original factory standards.
J. The controller shall have the capability to calibrate all sensor inputs, depending on the accuracy
needed, using 1-, 2-, or 3-point calibration to determine respectively the origin, slope and curvature
of the calibration curve.
K. The controller shall include programmable high and low alarm levels for all control functions with
operator-selectable feed lockout and alarm buzzer options. A Remote Alarm relay shall be included
in parallel with alarm buzzer for operators electable voltage or dry contact output.
L. The controller shall continuously monitor and alert for failure of ORP and pH probes using dynamic
probe testing before the water chemistry gets out of range. Failure alarms based on safety timers or
out-of-range alarms will not be considered equal.
M. The controller shall record and display the elapsed run time for each activation event and a
cumulative run time resettable at any time by the operator. The controller shall provide for operator-
adjustable event run time limits and total run time alarms for all control functions.
N. The controller shall include a memory storage battery with minimum reserve power for six (6)
months.
O. The controller shall include an on-board memory chip for storing of test data on operator-selectable
schedules. RS-232 serial communications port shall be included for on-site downloading of the test
data. Test data storage must consist of the following sensor inputs: ORP, PPM, pH, Temperature
(Conductivity or TDS, Pressure influent of filter, Main flow rate available with optional sensors).
The controller shall insert a test data every time power is turned on to indicate power failures.
Controllers failing to data log all listed parameters will not be considered equal.
P. The following options shall be provided as part of the base bid:

1. OPTION SCA: The ORP and pH sensors shall be mounted in a see-through flow cell with a
clear cover located inside a lockable fiberglass enclosure with a window, Optional
Temperature and TDS sensors will be mounted on corner Tee inline with flow cell.
2. OPTION REM3: The controller shall include a modem for remote operation by PC-
compatible computer. A Windows software program shall be supplied with true duplex
operation capability representing the actual controller screen display with automatic
downloading and visual graphics representation of test data. Controllers using simulation or
virtual representation of the display screen shall not be considered equal.
3. OPTION TEL3: The controller shall have telephone voice communication capability
including report of test data, adjustment of controller and automatic dial to six (6) telephone
numbers to report alarm conditions.
4. OPTION FLOW3: The controller shall include an electronic water flow meter for monitoring
and displaying the main line water flow and cumulative flow. The operator shall be able to
calibrate the flow sensor by entering its K-factor. The controller shall also include a
programmable low flow alarm with operator selectable pump lockout and alarm buzzer
options.
5. OPTION LEVEL3: The controller shall include a water level sensor and automatic water
level control of a water fill valve. The sensor is an electro-optical sensor which can be located
in the pool or in the surge pit. The controller shall be capable of operating the fill valve in
the following operator-selectable modes of operation: OFF, Manual or AUTO. A
programmable seven (7) day program shall be included for AUTO mode with operator
selectable ON and OFF times for each day of the week. During Fill cycles, all chemistry
control is set in stand-by mode to prevent improper chemical treatment and a "LOW LEVEL"
message is displayed on the Main Screen.
2.12 POOL FITTINGS
A. Generally: pool fittings to be PVC finished as required withstanding corrosion and action of
chlorine.
B. Wall Inlet fittings: round adjustable louver type with outer face fixable in any position for regulating
flow of water into pool and internal spinner valve disc, with 50 mm IPS female threaded connection.
C. Floor Inlet fittings: round adjusting top plate with a positive locking device. A spanner wrench shall
be provided to facilitate flow adjustment. The inlet body shall be provided with a 50 mm cycolac
solvent weld connection and internal NPT threads to facilitate line pressure testing.
D. Vacuum fittings: round type with face plug removable by hand for insertion of vacuum hose of pool
cleaner, with 32 mm IPS female threaded pipe connection on one end and 32 mm IPS female
threaded hose connection on other end.
E. No-leak flanges: heavy cast bronze pipe spool with centre flange and gussets, with IPS female
threaded pipe connections at both ends and fitted to inlet fittings and vacuum fittings within concrete
wall of pool. Flanges to be completed with cast bronze / PVC adapter.
F. Main drain Frame and grating: square grate and frame to cover sumps. Grate is to fit frame closely
and be flush at surface, shall be concrete sumps with 12 gauge 316L stainless steel frame and PVC
grating and sized as shown on the plan. Grate openings shall not exceed 11/32 inch in width,
providing an open flow area to allow water velocity not to exceed 1.0 fps. The grate shall be PVC
and fit closely and flush with top surface of frame, and secured to frame with vandal proof fasteners.
Square outlets shown on the drawings shall be similar to the rectangular outlets. Provide additional
stainless steel flanged pipe connections where required by the drawings for equalizer lines. Provide
no-leak seal flange at midpoint of box. All exposed edges of main outlets shall be rounded and
smooth, free of burrs and sharp edges.

G. Main Drain: stainless steel body and frame with loose set chrome plated grates.
H. Gutter Drains: 90 degree angle type, 120 mm long x 50 mm wide on both faces, with 50 mm IPS
female threaded pipe connection at 45 degree angle and with removable angle grate with 6 mm
slotted openings in horizontal and vertical faces secured to drain body with four nickel plated bronze
screws.
I. Skimmer: Plastic heavy duty construction, adjustable cover (deck) collar, round, tamper proof cover,
basket, weir, flo-control plate, complete with face rim, gaskets, screws, plus drilled mounting flange.
J. Uniflow Gutter System: it is compound unit used for recirculation system in Olympic or competition
pool applications, it consists of the following, and slip-resistance extruded PVC uni-grate, primary
overflow channel, surge recovery channel, filtered water return conduit, filtered water inlet nozzle,
retractable lane line anchor, stainless steel backsplash, depth marker and integral deck drain.
K. Cup anchors for attaching life line or racing lane ropes are to be embedded, flush type, with integral
no-leak flange, gussets, anchor and bronze eyebolt 9.5 mm minimum diameter.
L. Wedge anchors for securing ladders and life guard chairs are to be embedded, flush type, with
integral anchor flange and webs, cast bronze inwardly tapering body with removable bronze locking
wedge and stainless steel draw bolt and washer and suitable for use with 48 mm OD tube or 40 mm
IPS pipe.
M. Escutcheons used with each wedge anchor are to be specifically designed for use with wedge anchor.
They are to be cast bronze with polished chrome finish and fitted with locking screws.
2.13 POOL SIDE ACCESSORIES
A. Outdoor pool cover: mesh cover of durable polypropylene reinforced with heavy plastic webbing to
suit pool shape and completed with pop-up inserts installed on pool deck to anchor cover, with
special spring loaded hooks on all edges of cover.
2.14 POOL CLEANING EQUIPMENT
A. Supply equipment loose and hand to the Employer in original containers after tested and proved as
working satisfactorily.
B. Vacuum hose: hose to wall fitting to connect vacuum hose to vacuum fitting is to be solid aluminium
with 50 mm IPS male thread one end and 50 mm hose sleeve other end.
C. Algae brushes: 150 mm long x 76 mm wide, consisting of two dense rows of 25 mm long stainless
steel wire bristles permanently set in strong synthetic moulded back. Rear bristles to be at right
angles to back and front bristles inclined forward. Die-cast aluminium handle holder with two
punched holes is to be securely attached to back.
D. Wall brushes: 450 mm long with curved ends, consisting of four dense rows of 29 mm long nylon
bristles permanently set in strong moulded synthetic back reinforced with extruded aluminium
section. Die-cast aluminium handle holder with two punched holes is to be securely attached to
back.
2.15 POOL HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Configuration: Two pass, U-tube.

B. Shell Material: Well outlast stainless Steel.
C. Head / End cover Material: Bronze.
D. Tube and Tube Sheet Materials l: corrosion resistance cupro-nickel or acid proof stainless steel.
E. Connections: Threaded-shell and -head ports for pipe sizes up to 65 mm and Flanged-shell and -
head port for larger pipe sizes.
F. Maximum working pressure: 6 bar.
G. Maximum working temperature: 100 °C.
H. Thermostat pocket to be in the inlet end cover.
2.16 POOL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Vertical type comprising immersion heating elements with all safety devices and controls.
2.162.17 SUNDRIES
A. Flow meter
1. Flow meters (1 required) shall be installed in the filtered water return lines to each of the
pools. Flow meter shall be Battery Powered Flow Monitor. Paddle wheel flow sensor shall
be installed in the pool return piping according to the manufacturer with the dial to be located
next to the chemical controller as shown on the drawings. Furnish and install the coaxial
cable from the sensor to the flow meter or water chemistry monitoring and control system,
Flow meter accuracy shall be +/- 0.5% of reading. The flow meter shall have an LCD display
with four-digit flow rate display and simultaneous eight-digit totalizer display. Flow rate and
flow totalizers shall be calibrated independently. The flow meter shall be powered by an
internal 3.6 V, 4.5 Amp-hour lithium battery with nominal life expectancy of four years. The
flow meter shall have a low battery indicator and provisions to retain calibration settings
while the battery is being changed.
2. Backwash piping flow meter (1 required) shall be a pilot, impact ball, variable area type with
one piece, impact resistant machined acrylic plastic body. GPM scale to be permanently
etched or imprinted on the meter. Flow rate indicator to be of stainless steel material. Scale
range to be appropriate for specific flow rate, Pipe size to accommodate backwash rate.
3. Installations are to be installed in a straight run of pipe, with a minimum 10 pipe diameters
upstream and minimum 5 pipe diameters downstream of any pipe fitting.
B. Water Meter
1. Water meter (1 required) shall be provided by the Contractor. The water meter shall be
installed on the fresh water supply line prior to the manual fill valve and the slow closing
solenoid valve as shown on the design drawings.
2. The register for the water meter shall be hermetically sealed, and include a straight reading,
odometer-type totalization display, 360° test circle with a center sweep hand and a low flow
(leak) detector. Gears to be self lubricating molded plastic. The automatic meter reading
system shall be an intelligent communications encoder (ICE).
3. The remote readout system shall have a liquid crystal display that provides the reading from
the meter’s absolute encoder. Meter reading data should be automatically updated every 15
minutes. The remote readout system should be wall mounted at eye level. The remote readout
system shall be the meter display unit (MDU).

C. In Surge Tank Probe Type Water Level Controller
1. Provide a water level sensing and control system for the Competition Pool that will monitor
the water level in the surge tank and automatically activate the auto water make up control
valve. For sensing water level and activating make-up water control valve for each pool, use
Series 16 controls, solid state plug-in module, with NEMA 4 weather tight control enclosure
and inverse mode, differential level service pump up. Interlock with auto water make-up
solenoid valve; provide with adjustable time delays for both increasing and decreasing level
and manual override; 115 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz.
2. Provide 3stainless steel PVC sheathed rods, electrode Model 3RXC1, lengths as required.
Mount in 3” diameter standpipe at surge tank or at pool deck mounted in Electrode Fitting
with 3" flange, stainless steel fittings and neoprene gaskets. Refer to drawings for additional
information.
3. Wiring from the probes to the Controller shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR and
shall be connected to the terminal points mounted within a corrosion-resistance nonmetallic
NEMA 4X enclosure. All wiring connections shall be made through the bottom of the
enclosure. The enclosure size shall be no less than 8 inches wide x 10 inches high x 5 inches
deep. The access door shall be the entire front face of the enclosure with a vertically mounted
stainless steel hinge equal to the full height of the door. Stainless steel hasp with locking loop
latch shall be permanently secured to the enclosure.
4. Mounted within the enclosure shall be a liquid level relay, adjustable delay timer, 24 hour
clock/timer and terminal board. Major components shall be plugged-in type for ease of
replacement without re-wiring. Unit shall be designed to activate a 110 volt solenoid valve.
5. Provide a make up water solenoid valve, normally closed, stainless steel fitted, manual shut-
off, non-slam, slow closing, adjustable 2 to 4 seconds operational time. 115 VAC. Size to
pipe. Interlock with automatic water level control system.
6. Discharge of makeup water shall be into a fill standpipe and piping to the Pool, Refer to the
Drawings for additional information.
D. Backwash sight glass indicators: heavy cast bronze with clear plastic or pyrex cylinder with bottom
50 mm male threaded connection for easy removal.
E. Venturi tube: heavy duty, close grain cast iron, with flanged ends, 40 mm diameter, 40 mm long,
with two 20 mm IPS tapped holes in side of body for pressure differential connections.
F. Chemical feeders: heavy duty cast iron, with quick opening cover, positively sealing O-ring, yoke
type cover clamp with hold down bolt, formed steel tightening bolts and two 15 mm IPS tapped
holes at top and bottom of one side for piping to venturi tube.
G. Test kits: obtain from equipment manufacturer those kits necessary for running tests to determine
conformance of equipment performance with the Specification.
H. Water quality test kit for checking pH and residual chlorine of pool water to be complete with two
9-colour standard chlorimeters, test solutions, operating instructions and carrying case. The pH and
chlorine residual are to be tested on different slides.
I. Water quality test kit to be as manufactured by Taylor model H professional test set or approved
equal.
J. Chemicals: provide soda ash granules and aluminium sulphate.
K. Hair Interceptor (HI): Where plumbing specialties of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Josam Co.

b. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc.

c. Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
d. Watts Industries, Inc., Ancon Drain Div.
e. Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
2. Body Material: Fiberglass
3. Interior Separation Device: Screens
4. End Connections: Threaded
5. Mounting: Inline
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERALLY
A. Plumbing for workmanship common to this and other plumbing installations.
B. Qualified Engineer or Technician from equipment manufacturer is to supervise installation, start-up

instructions and instruct and train the Employer's personnel.
3.2 EMBEDDED POOL FITTINGS AND PIPING
A. Install pool fittings and piping embedded under pool and in concrete walls of pool and plant room
during concreting.
B. Concreting: a member of the setting crew is to be present during concreting to check grade and
alignment of embedded fittings and pipework and to correct any displacement before concrete has
hardened.
C. Lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support and anchor during
concreting.
D. Coat and plug fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.
E. Earth metal fittings by connecting to pool reinforcing steel with copper wire welded to fitting and
reinforcement.
F. No-leak flanges: provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and vacuum fittings within
concrete pool wall.
G. Pipe connections through plant room walls to have no- leak flanges fitted centrally in wall.
3.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Strainers: provide on suction of each pump.
C. Flow meters: install on supply branch pipe to each filter from pump to indicate filtering and
backwash flow rates.
D. Backwash sight glass indicators: install on backwash pipe from each filter to provide visual check
of backwash flow.

E. Venturi tube: install on main supply pipe from pump to filters to create pressure differential to draw
chemical solution from chemical feeders into system upstream of filters.
F. Chemical feeders: pipe to venturi tube using 15 mm pipes with block valves on each feeder.
3.4 POOL SIDE ACCESSORIES
A. Earth metal accessories by connecting to pool reinforcing steel with copper wire welded to accessory
and reinforcement.
3.5 TESTS
A. Hydrostatically test pool piping as specified in Plumbing sections.
B. Water quality: make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended
in the Standard Methods of the Examination of Water, Sewage and Industrial Wastes of the
American Public Health Association insofar as these methods are applicable to swimming pool
water.
C. Performance tests: carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets

SECTION 15491 - JACUZZI
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and special provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section includes Jacuzzi installations and various re-circulation, drainage and supply piping
systems within and outside the building. Piping materials and equipment specified in this section
include:
1. Pipes and fittings.

2. Special duty valves.
3. Jacuzzi specialties .
4. Filters.
5. Special pumps and accessories.
6. Fittings.
7. Pool water conditioning equipment.
8. Tests.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each filter, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specially and heater. Include rated
capacities of selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions.
B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances for distribution piping systems, equipment
assemblies, weights, loads, method of field assembly, components, location and size of each field
connection. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that heat exchangers,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 'Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls" Section. Include the following:
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be
fully operational after the seismic event."
3. Details description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
D. Operation and maintenance data for filters, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specialties and special
conditioning for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in the General Requirements
and "Basic Mechanical Requirements" Section.
JACUZZI 15491 / Page 1 of 5

QUALITY ASSURANCE
E. Guarantee: Provide written guarantee that when Jacuzzi equipment is operated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, Jacuzzi water will be sparkling bright, free from suspended matter and
completely sterilized at all times.
F. Water to be Sterile: When Jacuzzi is in use not more than 15% of samples of water taken covering any
considerable period are to contain more than 200 bacteria per milliliter or are to show positive test in
any of five 10 ml samples of water. Primary fermentation tubes showing gas should be confirmed.
G. Free residual chlorine in water at all times shall be not less than 0.7 ppm and not more than 1.5 ppm.
H. PH of water at all times shall be not less than 7.2 and not more than 7.8.
I. Water Quality: Make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended in
the standard methods of the examination of water, sewage and industrial wastes of the American Public
Health Association insofar as these methods are applicable to Jacuzzi water.
J. Performance Tests: Carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets
K. Qualified engineer or technician from equipment manufacturer shall supervise installation, start-up
L. Source Limitations: Obtain all equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Supply Jacuzzi bath as per manufacturer’s recommendations with all necessary equipment, fittings,
accessories and controls.
B. Equipment shall consist of a circulation package pump and a Jacuzzi pump with all related accessories.
C. Circulation Package Pump shall be of the package type comprising pump, filter and electric water
heater.
D. Circulation Pump: Centrifugal self-priming type. Pump case, semi-open impeller and shaft shall be of
the corrosion resistant bronze. Shaft seal shall be open mechanical type. Size shall be as shown on
Drawings. Electric motor shall be of ball bearing construction, factory fabricated and sealed.
E. Filter: Cartridge type of 40 sq. ft. capacity.
F. Electric Water Heater: Vertical type comprising immersion heating elements of 12 KW capacity with
all safety devices and controls.
G. Hair and Lint Strainer: Basket type made of corrosion resistant bronze. Strainer shall have built in
check valve, quick release lid sealed by O-ring and drain plug.
H. Main Drain shall be of the sump type fitted with a lateral orifice. Drain shall be supplied with an anti-
vortex cover and rubber gasket.

I. Gutter Drain shall have a removable grate with 6 mm slotted openings and secured shall the drain body
with two nickel plated bronze screws.
J. Suction Fittings shall have removable screen with slotted openings for easy cleaning.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. provide a control panel for each Jacuzzi to be installed next to it and shall comprise the following:
1. on/off switch.
2. Water temperature thermostats.
3. Mode selector.
4. All necessary control for proper operation.
2.3 PIPES
A. Underground Piping around Jacuzzi: Pressure PVC pipe and fittings up to external face of plant room
walls.
B. Pipes downstream heater to Jacuzzi supply outlet shall be CPVC or Polypropylene.
C. Chlorinator Booster Pump and Water Sample Piping: PVC pressure type.
D. Chemical Feed Piping: CPVC or Polypropylene.
E. Chlorine Gas Piping: Special tubing supplied by chlorination equipment manufacturer.
F. Pipe connections through walls of plant room shall be with no-leak flanges.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. Fittings: shall be heavy cast bronze heavily chrome plated polish finished and suitable for fiberglass
Jacuzzi application.
B. Hydro-air inlet fitting: shall be of the adjustable flow and velocity type supplied with air snorkel with
adjustable air cap. Ball joint construction shall permit adjustment of flow thru a 30 degrees angle on
360 degrees full arc.
C. Inlet fittings: shall be of the round, adjustable, louver type, with outer face plate fixable in any position
for regulating the flow of water into the Jacuzzi.
2.5 CHLORINATION SYSTEM
A. System shall provide continuous, automatic and accurate control of residual chlorine in pool water by
constantly testing a water sample and automatically adjusting chlorine dosing apparatus to maintain
desired residual chlorine in water.
B. Components: Chlorine residual analyzer, chlorine residual controller, chlorine residual recorder,
hypochlorite booster pumps with 200 liters GRP drum, tubing and accessories.
C.Operation shall be as follows: chlorine shall be added to water stream going to Jacuzzi, water sample
is to be continuously analyzed and taken from location downstream from point where chlorine is added,
amount of residual chlorine in continuous sample is to be measured in chlorine residual analyzer which
shall send a signal, proportional to amount of residual chlorine in water, to the controller and through
the controller to the recorder, controller is to compare value of actual chlorine residual with desired
chlorine residual (Set Point) and send appropriate signals to chlorine feed rate pump to increase or
reduce chlorine feed rate to bring residual chlorine in water back to desired level.
D. Chlorine residual analyzer shall be wall mounted, with gravity feed type flow control system for
maintaining constant sample flow through cell and synchronous motor driven rotating striker and PVC
cleaning balls in sample cell to keep electrodes at constant state of cleanliness. It shall have acetate
reagent buffer solution system with constant head reagent feed system with control valve to meter
reagent into sample cell.
E. Chlorine residual analyzer shall work on the principle of the amperometric type cell and designed to
measure free chlorine residual over a range of 0 to 2 ppm. It shall use gold and copper electrodes and
have automatic temperature compensation such that variation of sample temperature will not affect cell
output. It shall be drift free and type not requiring recalibration.
F. Chlorine residual controller shall be wall mounted and shall have, in addition to set point adjustment,
an adjustment for setting frequency of corrective action when difference exists between set point and
measured residual chlorine and an adjustment for duration of time that control valve will open or close
at constant rate during each corrective cycle. It shall have means for opening or closing feed rate
control valve manually and visual indication of valve position.
G. Chlorine residual controller shall work on the principle of matching electric currents.
H. Chlorine residual controller shall have the following face instruments:
1. Power on-off switch.

2. Power on indicator light.
3. Automatic/manual selector switch.
4. Fuse.
I. Chlorine residual controller: wall mounted, solid state type, requiring no ink and incorporating 30-day
strip chart, indicator strip for 0 to 2 ppm range and front clear glass cover. It shall have adjustable high
and low alarm contacts to actuate remote visual and audible alarms and be complete with spare charts
for two years' operation.
J. Chlorine Feed Rate Control Pump: Electric motor driven, proportional type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Plumbing for workmanship common to this and other plumbing installations.
B. Qualified Engineer or Technician from equipment manufacturer shall supervise installation, start-up
instructions and instruct and train the Employer's personnel.
3.2 EMBEDDED JACUZZI FITTINGS AND PIPING
A. Install Jacuzzi fittings and piping embedded under Jacuzzi and in concrete walls of Jacuzzi and plant
room during concreting.

B. Concreting: A member of the setting crew shall be present during concreting to check grade and
alignment of embedded fittings and pipework and to correct any displacement before concrete has
hardened.
C. Lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support and anchor during
concreting.
D. Coat and plug fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.
E. Earth metal fittings by connecting to Jacuzzi reinforcing steel with copper wire welded to fitting and
reinforcement.
F. No-leak Flanges: Provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and vacuum fittings within
concrete Jacuzzi wall.
G. Pipe connections through plant room walls shall have no-leak flanges fitted centrally in wall.
3.3 EQUIPMENT
B. Strainers: Provide on suction of each pump.
C. Flow Meters: Install on supply branch pipe to each filter from pump to indicate filtering and backwash
flow rates.
D. Backwash Sight Glass Indicators: Install on backwash pipe from each filter to provide visual check of
backwash flow.
E. Venturi Tube: Install on main supply pipe from pump to filters to create pressure differential to draw
F. Chemical Feeders: Pipe to venturi tube using 15 mm pipes with block valves on each feeder.
3.4 JACUZZI SIDE ACCESSORIES
A. Earth metal accessories by connecting to Jacuzzi reinforcing steel with copper wire welded to accessory
and reinforcement.
3.5 TESTS
A. Hydrostatically test Jacuzzi piping as specified in Plumbing sections.
B. Water quality: Make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended in
the Standard Methods of the Examination of Water, Sewage and Industrial Wastes of the American
Public Health Association insofar as these methods are applicable to Jacuzzi water.
C. Performance Tests: Carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets

SECTION 15495 - DECORATIVE FOUNTAIN
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and special provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and
Division 1 Specification sections apply to this section.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work referred to in this section consists of design, installation, furnishing all labor and material
required, providing and delivering all equipment hereinafter specified, uncrating, assembling, hanging,
setting in place, leveling, and completely installing, decorative water fountains.
B. Mockup Testing: The Contractor shall design and operate mockup water fountain(s) similar to the
specified water fountains. Dimension of mockup water fountain(s) shall be as directed by the Engineer.
The mockup water fountain(s) shall be produced and fabricated to give the same effect of the water
fountain.
C. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include:
1. Pipes and fittings.

2. Special duty valves.
3. Fountain specialities.
4. Filters.
5. Special pumps and accessories.
D. The drawings indicate location of the fountain, schematic diagrams showing the equipment to be installed
and tentative schedule of equipment. The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval full design
calculation, drawings and catalog cuts based on the actual equipment selection and the design criteria
mentioned in the Specification. The Contractor shall refer to the Landscape and Mechanical drawings.
E. Show on roughing in plans the sizes, utilities, and other requirements as furnished in the Specification,
by the Employer or appropriate supplier in submittals as if the equipment is Construction Manager
furnished.
F. Startup Services: Engage factory-authorized service representatives to perform startup services and to
demonstrate and train the Employer's maintenance personnel.
G. The design of the equipment shall be such as to provide for safe and convenient operation. Covers or other
safety devices shall be provided for all items of equipment presenting safety hazards.
A. Visit the job site to field check actual situation and be responsible for furnishing, fabricating, and
installing the equipment in accordance with the available space and utility services as they exist on the
job site.
B. Physically check the location and utility size at the job site.
DECORATIVE FOUNTAIN 15495 / Page 1 of 7

C. Check electrical characteristics and water pressure. Provide pressure-regulating valves where required
for proper operation of equipment.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each fountain filter, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping speciality and special duty valves.
Include the following:
1. Character and dimensions of the display elements consistent with visibility and sound levels
appropriate to the site program and characteristics.
2. Underwater lighting, including composition, location and installation details.
3. Dimensions, profiles, colors and finishes for the pools and related structures.
4. Rated capacities dimensions and location of selected models, furnished specialties and
accessories, and installation instructions.
5. Configuration, location and color of pool fittings.
B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances for fountain distribution piping systems in
accordance with "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that heat exchangers, accessories,
and components will withstand seismic forces defined in 'Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls"
Section. Include the following:
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
3. Details description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements.
D. Operation and Maintenance data for fountain filters, pumps, nozzles, drains, piping specialities and
special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in the General
Requirements and "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" Section.
E. Test reports specified in Part 3 below.
A. Guarantee: Provide written guarantee that when fountain pool equipment is operated in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, fountain pool water will be crystal clear, sparkling bright, free from
suspended matter and completely sterilized at all times.
B. Water to be Clear: When fountain pool is in use, water shall be sufficiently clear to permit a 150 mm
diameter black disc on a white background placed on bottom of pool to be clearly visible from side walls
of pool at all distances up to 10 m measured from a line drawn across the disc.
C. Water to be Sterile: When fountain pool is in use not more than 15% of samples of water taken covering
any considerable period shall contain more than 200 bacteria per millilitre or are to show positive test in
any of five 10 ml samples of water. Primary fermentation tubes showing gas shall be confirmed.

D. Free residual chlorine in water at all times shall be not less than 0.7 ppm and not more than 1.5 ppm in
order to prevent any algae growth.
E. PH of water at all times shall be not less than 7.2 and not more than 7.8 in order to prevent any algae
growth.
F. Water Quality: Make chemical and bacterial analysis in accordance with procedures recommended in the
Standard Methods of the Examination of Water, Sewage and Industrial Wastes of the American Public
Health Association insofar as these methods are applicable to fountain pool water.
G. Performance Tests: Carry out tests as necessary and as directed to demonstrate that equipment meets
H. Qualified engineer or technician from equipment manufacturer shall supervise installation, start-up
I. Source Limitations: Obtain all equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A. Pipe and Fittings: Pressure PVC to BS EN 1452-1, BS EN 1452-2, BS EN 1452-3, BS EN 1452-4, BS

EN 1452-5 and BS EN 1452 Class E and fittings.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be integral parallel sockets with solvent welded joints.
A. Sealing rings on PVC pipe shall provide for expansion and contraction to be rubber to BS EN 681.
2.4 VALVES
A. Ball valves 50 mm diameter and under on the re-circulation and chlorination systems shall be threaded
with CPVC body, viton or EDPM "O" ring seals, self-lubricating Teflon seats and double union/double
block design.
B. Shut-off valves 65 mm diameter and above on the re-circulation systems shall be flanged with CPVC
body, viton "O" ring seals, self-lubricating Teflon seats and venturi design.
C. Valves on drainage and water supply systems (refer to "Valves" Setion).
2.5 FOUNTAIN POOL SPECIALITIES
A. Drains and Overflow Fittings:

1. Anti-Vortex Drain: Shall consist of a squared anti-vortex plate of side 381 mm, used for return
in filtration systems. Plate shall be of natural finish cast bronze construction and stainless steel
bolts.
2. Overflow: Shall be of the overflow standpipe drain type and of cast bronze and copper
construction with natural finish. Pipe shall be field adjustable height, complete with brass rod air
vent.
B. Inlet Fittings: Shall be of the freshwater supply inlet type fitted into the sidewall of the pool, and shall
be of tombak and stainless steel construction. Supply inlet shall be fitted with a 25 mm pipe.
2.6 PUMPS
A. Horizontal End Suction Pumps.
B. Type: Horizontal, base mounted, end suction, single stage, centrifugal type, directly connected to motor
through a heavy duty flexible coupling, with heavy gauge coupling guard.
C. Base: Pump and motor shall be mounted on common steel base adequately reinforced against deflection,
with drip rim, drain tapping, bolt holes and grouting hole.
D. Bearings: Pump rotating element shall be supported by two heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings
mounted in heavy iron frame with adequate supports to base for maximum rigidity.
E. Pump Casing: High tensile strength close grain cast iron with smooth waterways, register fitted and bolted
to bearing frame for permanent alignment, with bronze war rings and tapped and plugged bottom drain
and top vent connections.
F. Impeller: Stainless steel, enclosed type, fitted to shaft with key and locked in place.
G. Shaft: One-piece stainless steel, sized to carry axial and radial thrust with minimum deflection.
H. Mechanical Seal: Ni-resist face, cargon washer and stainless steel metal parts.
I. Electric Motor: Totally enclosed, squirrel cage, induction type, with permanently lubricated and sealed
ball bearings.
2.7 FILTERS
A. Type: High flow rate, sand filter, pressure type, designed for specified filtration rate and operating
pressure and hydrostatically tested at factory to specified test pressure. Quality of filtrate shall be
guaranteed to be in the 2 micron range. The filter shall be cylindrical, vertical type with diameter and
straight sidewall height as specified under Pool Specialities to allow a deep media structure. Filter heads
shall be dished to radius equal to diameter of shell.
B. Operation: Filters shall be designed with efficient influent and under drain systems to ensure uniform
water flow through filtering and backwash operations and to prevent migration, mounding or channelling
of filter bed. Minimum freeboard of 300 mm shall be provided between top of filter bed and influent
water distribution system. Influent and under drain systems shall be corrosion resistant materials.
C. Filter Shell and Heads: High-grade tank steel welded internally and externally and of adequate thickness
for specified operating and test pressure.
D. Face piping and valves shall be provided and arranged for filtering operations, backwash and rinse. Face
piping shall be flanged, black steel or cast iron pipes. Valves shall be either flanged cast iron gate valves
with bronze trim or butterfly valves of wafer type. Valves shall be same size as face piping.
E. Automatic flow controllers shall be provided to limit filtering, backwash and rinse flow rates to maximum
values recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Accessories: Filters shall be complete with the following accessories and appurtenances:
1. Standard size manhole on top dished head with boiler type cover.
2. Four jack type supports individually adjustable for filter level adjustment and of adequate strength
to carry filter contents.
3. Automatic air release valve on top dished head.
4. Gauge panel of cast bronze with two 100 mm minimum diameter dial pressure gauges connected
with copper tubes to filter inlet and outlet connections.
5. Filter drain valve.
6. Substantial lifting lugs.
G. Paint: Supply filters painted inside and outside with two coats of chemical resistant epoxy paint.
H. Filter Media: Shall be as recommended and as provided by the filter manufacturer specifically for the
filters. Components shall be shipped separately in clearly marked bags. Provide clear instructions for
field application of filter media in filters.
I. Filter Media: Shall be graded rock and gravel to fine sand from bottom up, in layers of thickness to
manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Rock and Gravel: Clean, hard, round stones with average specific gravity of not less than 2.5, free from
shale, mica, clay, sandstone, sand, loam or other impurities. Gravel is not to have more than 2% by
weight of thin, flat or elongated pieces.
K. Sand: Hard, durable grains of round or subangular silica sand, free from clay, loam, dirt and organic
matter. Not more than 1% to be flat or micaceous particles. Sand shall meet screen requirements given
in the following table and have effective size of 0.35 to 0.45 mm and uniformity coefficient of 1.45 to
1.69.
Sand Screen Requirements
Sieve No. % Retained on % Passing Through

U.S. Tyler Successive Screens Successive Screens
16 14 0 - 6 94 - 100
20 20 3 - 23 71 - 97
30 28 24 - 40 31 - 73
40 36 43 - 25 6 - 25
50 43 22 - 6 0 - 3
L. Manufacturers: Filter as manufactured by “GULF POOL EQUIPMENT CO.” or approved equal.
2.8 CHLORINATION SYSTEM
A. Hypochlorite Sodium Tank:

1. Tank for sodium hypochlorite solution to chlorinate and disinfect with dozing pump.
2. Tank shall be polyethylene construction with visible level indicator, fill connection and drainage
plug. Tank shall be complete with electrical agitator having stainless steel shaft and helix.
B. Dozing Pump:
1. Dozing pump shall have adjustable flow rate between 0 and 100 %. Pump precision shall be
within the 2 % range.
2.9 SUNDRIES
A. Strainers on pump suctions shall be straight, in-line, flanged or threaded type, designed for fountain pools,
with cast iron body and stainless steel basket, suitable for working pressure of 200 kPa and with quick
opening cover lid, positively sealing O-ring, yoke type cover clamp with threaded tightening bolt and
drain plug.
B. Flow Meters: Orifice type with direct reading manometer having indicating fluid other than mercury,
complete with flanges, orifice plate, piping to orifice flanges and by-pass piping and suitable for
measuring design flows.
C. Flow meters shall be as manufactured by “MERIAM” or approved equal.
D. Backwash Sight Glass Indicators: Heavy cast bronze with clear plastic or pyrex cylinder with bottom 50
mm male threaded connection for easy removal.
E. Venturi Tube: Heavy-duty, close grain cast iron, with flanged or threaded ends, with two tapped holes in
side of body for pressure differential connections.
F. Chemical Feeder: Polyethylene with quick opening cover, positively sealing O-ring, yoke type cover
clamp with hold down bolt, formed steel tightening bolts and two 15 mm IPS tapped holes at top and
bottom of one side for piping to venturi tube.
G. Chemical Feeder: For feeding sodium carbonate to control alkalinity of water, in batch dosing.
H. Test Kits: Obtain from equipment manufacturer those kits necessary for running tests to determine
conformance of equipment performance with the Specification (checking pH and residual chlorine).
I. Sump Pump: Similar to sump pumps specified under Division 15 Section “Sump Pumps”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION
A. Lay embedded fittings and piping to proper elevation, line and grade and support and anchor during
concreting.
B. Coat and plug fittings and piping to prevent damage and ingress of concrete.
C. Earth metal fittings by connecting to pool reinforcing steel with copper wire welded to fitting and
reinforcement.
D. No-Leak Flanges: Provide on pipe connections to inlet and drain fittings and within concrete fountain
pool wall.

E. Pipe connections through plant room walls shall have no-leak flanges fitted centrally in wall.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
B. Strainers: Provide on suction of each pump.
C. Flow Meters: Install on supply branch pipe to each filter from pump to indicate filtering and backwash
flow rates.
D. Backwash Sight Glass Indicators: Install on backwash pipe from each filter to provide visual check of
backwash flow.
E. Venturi Tube: Install on main supply pipe from pump to filters to create pressure differential to draw
F. Chemical Feeders: Pipe to venturi tube using 15 mm pipes with block valves on each feeder.
3.3 TESTS
A. Hydrostatically test fountain pool piping to pressure 10 bar applied for 24 hours.

Amman - Jordan November2018
SECTION 15513 - CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes high-efficiency, gas-fired, heating hot water boilers and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Shop Drawings shall
be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments
to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base
weights.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that condensing boiler,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 15 Section
"Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls" when anchored to a concrete base. Include the
following:
CONDENSING BOILERS 15513 / Page 1 of 7

D. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements before shipping.
E. AGA design certificates, for information.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
B. AGA Compliance: Design certified by AGA; tests and ratings according to AGA requirements.
C. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer, for heat
exchanger.
Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering boilers

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Boilers:
a. AERCO International, Inc.

b. A.O. Smith
c. Fulton Boiler Works, Inc.
d. Gas Master
e. GlowCore Corp.
f. Hydrotherm, Inc.
g. Lochinvar Corp.
h. RBO
i. Trianco-Heatmaker, Inc.
j. Viessmann Mfg. Co. (US) Inc.

k. Weil-McLain/A United Dominion Company.
2.2 PACKAGED UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested modules include combustion-air inlet chamber,

prepurge and postpurge blower assembly, air-gas fuel control valve, combustion chamber, heat
exchanger, and exhaust; with insulated jacket around module and unit-mounted electrical control
panel with operation sequence indicator lights.
B. Type: Pulse-combustion, gas-fired, condensing-type hot-water boiler with capacities and

accessories as scheduled.
C. Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist boiler
movement during a seismic event when boiler base is anchored to building structure.
D. Boiler Components:
1. Heat Exchanger: (Fire-Tube) Nonferrous, corrosion-resistant combustion chamber. (Pulse-

Combustion, Water-Jacketed) Type 316L, stainless-steel primary and secondary combustion
chamber. (Water-Tube) Finned-stainless steel primary and stainless-steel secondary heat
exchangers. Integral Circulator: Stainless steel body and stainless-steel impeller sized for
minimum flow required in heat exchanger.
2. Pressure Vessel: Carbon steel with welded heads and tube connections.
3. Exhaust Decoupler: Fiberglass composite material in a corten steel box.
4. Burner: Dual fuel (LPG & Diesel), (Fire-Tube) forced draft. (Pulse-Combustion) self-
aspirating and self-venting after initial start. (Water-Tube) forced draft drawing from gas
premixing valve. (Water-Jacketed) forced draft; swing-open front and burner observation
port.
5. Blower: Centrifugal fan (Fire-Tube) to operate during each burner firing sequence and to
pre-purge and post-purge the combustion chamber. (Pulse-Combustion) to operate only
during start of each burner sequence. (Water-Tube) forced draft drawing from gas premixing
valve. (Water-Jacketed) forced draft. Include pre-purge and post-purge of the combustion
chamber.
6. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. Include 100
percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision.
7. Ignition: (Fire-Tube, Pulse-Combustion, Water-Jacketed) Spark ignition with 100 percent
main-valve shutoff with electronic flame supervision. (Water-Tube) Silicone carbide hot-
surface ignition that includes flame safety supervision and 100 percent main-valve shutoff.
8. Casing:
a. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.
b. Control Compartment Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1A.
c. Finish: Backed-enamel protective finish.
d. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch- (0-mm-) thick mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the
heat exchanger.
e. Draft Hood: Integral.
f. Combustion-Air Connections: (Fire-Tube, Water-Tube, Water-Jacketed) Inlet and
vent duct collars. (Pulse-Combustion) Inlet duct collar and sheet metal closure over
burner compartment.
9. Mufflers: Carbon-steel intake muffler and stainless-steel exhaust.
10. Condensate Trap: Cast-iron body with stainless-steel internal parts.
11. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.
12. Condensing economizer: 316 stainless steel and ASME certified vessel.
E. Fuel: LPG with Diesel as backup fuel source.

2.3 CONTROLS
A. Controller: Solid state, with pressure-sensing flame safeguard system, ignition transformer, spark
plug, manual gas shutoff valve, system-pressure-controlled regulator, automatic redundant control
valves, high-limit water temperature controller, ASME-approved safety-relief valve, and
temperature and pressure gage.
B. Operating Temperature Control: Electronic-operating temperature controller maintains boiler water

temperature, with electronic primary and outdoor sensors. Reset ratio of outside-air temperature
change to discharge control point change adjustable from 1:2 to 100:1, with adjustable initial set
point from 27 to 110 deg C (80 to 230 deg F). Mounted in NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted
enclosure with full cover.
2.4 BOILER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Computer-based controller with nonvolatile memory and solid-state sensors providing burner
sequencing; flame supervision; and indication of system status, faults, and diagnostics.
B. Controller consists of chassis, program module, keyboard display, and flame signal amplifier, with
fixed operating sequence including standby, prepurge, pilot, main fuel ignition and run, and
postpurge periods.
C. Liquid-crystal display and keyboard to adjust control settings, with display of fault messages,
diagnostic messages, status messages, history of messages, and operating pressures and
temperatures.
1. Status indicates system ready, demand, fuel-valve open, low water, and safety shutdown
alarms.
D. Sensor inputs include gas pressure, oil pressure, temperature, and burner control.
E. Communications: Integral modem provides remote control for up to 6 boilers with microcomputer
interface.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Include the following list of manufacturer's standard accessories:
1. Exhaust mufflers.
2. Air-supply mufflers.
3. Low-water cutoff and manual-reset high-limit control.
4. Vent terminal plates.
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV for
low-pressure boilers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced
standards.
B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
C. Support boilers on minimum 100-mm thick reinforced concrete base, 100 mm larger on each side
than base of unit.
D. Assemble units and parts shipped loose or disassembled.
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
B. Connect air-intake and exhaust piping to boiler, size as recommended by manufacturer. Use
Schedule 40 CPVC pipe and fittings for exhaust, PVC for supply, with solvent-cemented joints.
Pitch toward boiler minimum of 2 percent or as indicated. Provide termination as indicated.
C. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
D. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
E. Ground equipment.

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the

field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical
equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
3.5 CLEANING
A.
Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until
wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.

2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure.
Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
10. Control installations are completed.
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.
E. Check operation of pressure-reducing valve on gas train, including venting.
F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and firing
sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature
interlocks.
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
5. Measure and record gas pressure on manifold.
6. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
7. Measure and record flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
H. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each boiler.
I. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve, water level,
and backflow preventer.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

SECTION 15515 - STEEL WATER-TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
1. Fuel-fired, water-tube boilers and accessories for steam generation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that water-tube boiler,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls" section when anchored to a concrete base. Include the following:
D. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements before shipping.
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.
STEEL WATER-TUBE BOILERS 15515 / Page 1 of 8
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section I, "Power Boilers."
C. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National-Board listed.
D. I=B=R Compliance: Boilers tested and rated according to the Hydronics Institute's " Rating
Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with I=B=R
emblem on a nameplate affixed to the boiler.
E. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI.
F. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer for the heat
exchanger.

Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering boilers

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ajax Boiler, Inc.

2. Bryan Steam Corporation.
3. Cleaver-Brooks.
4. Donlee Technologies, Inc.
5. Fulton Boilers
6. Miura Boilers
7. Parker Boiler Co.
2.2 PACKAGED UNITS

A. Description: Factory fabricated and assembled steel water-tube boiler with heat exchanger sealed
pressure tight, integral burner, burner controls, boiler trim, accessories, refractory, insulation, and
jacket.
1. Heat Exchanger: Bent steel tubes welded into steel headers, with steel baffles.
B. Steam-Pressure Rating: 609 kPa (100 psig).
C. Water-Pressure Rating: 280 kPa (40 psig).
D. Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist boiler
movement during a seismic event when boiler base is anchored to building structure.
E. Mount boiler on heavy-steel base frame.
F. Factory assemble with supply- and return-piping, fuel, blow-down, electrical, and vent connections.
G. Lifting Lugs: 2, permanently attached to top of boiler.
H. Access: Removable panels and access doors for inspection and for cleaning when doors are open.
I. Observation Ports: At both ends of boiler for inspection of flame conditions.
J. Exhaust-Gas Vent: On boiler top, complete with exhaust-gas thermometer.
K. Insulation and Jacket: Minimum of 50-mm thick, glass fiber or mineral-wool-blanket insulation on
boiler shell, covered with sheet-metal jacket.
L. Painting: Factory-applied, enamel finish on boiler, base frame, and components' assembly.
2.3 STEAM BOILER TRIM
A. Water Column: Complete with test cock, gage glass, and gage-glass and water-column blow-down
valves.
B. Feedwater Pump Control: Integral with water column, automatically actuates motor-driven
feedwater pump to maintain boiler water level within normal limits.
C. Low-Water Cutoff: Integral part of feedwater control, factory wired into burner control circuit to
prevent burner operation if boiler water falls below a safe level; complete with manual-reset device.
D. Steam-Pressure Gage: Locate on boiler front and include syphon, test cock, and test connection,
with range to suit operating pressure.
E. Steam Safety Valves: Type and size to comply with ASME Code requirements.
F. Steam-Pressure Controls: High-pressure limit control to interrupt burner operation; mounted near
water column.
G. Stop and Check Valves: 1720 kPa (250 psig) at 232 deg C (450 deg F), ASTM A 126 cast-iron
body, OS&Y, straight or angle pattern with flanged ends, and renewable bronze disc and seat ring.
H. Y-Type Blow-Down Valves: 2070 kPa (300 psig) of steam, ASTM B 62 bronze body, Y-type
globe, bronze seat ring, renewable composition disc, screwed-in bonnet, threaded ends.

2.4 COMBINATION GAS/OIL BURNERS
A. Fuel: Natural gas.
B. Fuel: No. 2 fuel oil.
C. Fuel: No. 6 fuel oil.
D. Combination burner, pressure-atomizing type for oil and high-radiant, multiport type for gas.
Burner integral with front head of boiler and approved for operation with commercial No. 2 fuel oil
and natural, manufactured, or mixed gas.
E. Gas-Burner Operation and Combustion-Air Control: Full-modulation principle, 4-to-1 turndown

ratio. Motor-operated combustion-air damper and cam-operated, butterfly gas-metering valve,
operated by a single damper-control motor. Regulate fire according to load demand. Operate
damper motor by potentiometer positioning controls.
F. Oil-Burner Operation and Combustion-Air Control: High/low/off motor-operated combustion-air

damper, linked with auxiliary switch, controls high or low fire.
G. Gas Pilot: Premix type with automatic electric ignition, with electronic detector to monitor pilot.
Primary fuel valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established.
H. Gas-Piping Train: Integrally mounted, with lubricated plug cock located upstream from primary
valve for manual shutoff, plugged leakage test cock, second lubricated plug cock, and the following:
1. Primary gas shutoff valve, motor operated with spring return, starts and stops gas burner, and
closes automatically in the event of power failure, flame failure, or low-water condition.
2. Proof-of-closure switch on primary valve, and high- and low-gas-pressure switches.
3. Second motorized, safety shutoff valve and additional plugged leakage test cock, with proof-
of-closure switch and manual reset.
4. Vent valve located between safety shutoff valves.
I. Oil Pump: Belt driven from blower motor, integral with burner, delivers twice the capacity of
maximum burning rate.
J. Oil-Piping Train: Integrally mounted, including oil-pressure-regulating devices, oil-metering

controls, solenoid shutoff valves, pressure gages, and fuel oil strainer.
2.5 BOILER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Computer-based controller with nonvolatile memory and solid-state sensors providing burner
sequencing; flame supervision; and indication of system status, faults, and diagnostics.
B. Controller consists of chassis, program module, keyboard display, and flame signal amplifier, with
fixed operating sequence including standby, prepurge, pilot, main fuel ignition and run, and
postpurge periods.
C. Liquid-crystal display and keyboard to adjust control settings, with display of fault messages,
diagnostic messages, status messages, history of messages, and operating pressures and
temperatures.
1. Status indicates system ready, demand, fuel-valve open, low water, and safety shutdown
alarms.
D. Sensor inputs include gas pressure, oil pressure, temperature, and burner control.
E. Communications: Integral modem provides remote control for up to 6 boilers with microcomputer
interface.
2.6 CONTROL PANEL
A. Motor controllers, relays, and control switches factory assembled in NEMA 250, Type 1A
enclosure, mounted on boiler front. Panel shall be able to communicate with Building Management
System. Communications shall include status and control. Include the following options:
1. Plug-in fuel modules.

2. Indicating lights for low water level, flame failure, fuel-valve open, and load demand.
3. Programming relay controls ignition timing and starting and stopping boiler through
precombustion and postcombustion purge.
4. Flame scanner shuts down boiler if ignition, pilot, or main flame fails.
5. Gas/oil selector switch.
6. Manual/automatic selector switch and damper motor-positioning switch to permit automatic
firing according to load demand, or manual control of firing rate at any desired point between
low fire and maximum rating.
7. Oil-, heat-, and moisture-resistant wire.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Circulator: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted motor for in-
line mounting, oil lubricated, mounted on boiler.
B. Expansion Tank: Welded steel, ASME tested and stamped, rated for working pressure of 860 kPa
(125 psig), with flexible diaphragm sealed into tank, pressure gage, and air-charging fitting.
2.8 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation.
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV for
low-pressure boilers and Section I for high-pressure boilers.
B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion
efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced
standards.
B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
C. Install oil-fired boilers according to NFPA 31.
D. Support boilers on minimum 100-mm thick concrete base, 100 mm larger on each side than base of
unit. Dowel base to floor on 450-mm centers along perimeter of base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
through base into floor.
E. Vibration Isolation: Rubber pads with a minimum static deflection of [6.35 mm (0.25 inch)].
Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in "Mechanical Vibration and
Seismic Controls" Section.
F. Assemble boiler trim according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
G. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified, to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
B. Connect oil piping full size to burner inlet with shutoff valve and union.
C. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply-, return-, and blow-down boiler tappings with
shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
D. Install piping from safety valves to drip-pan elbow and to nearest floor drain.
E. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.
F. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
G. Ground equipment.

UL 486A - 486B.

field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical
1.Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish;
remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until
wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.

2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure.
Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Burner blower rotates in correct direction.
10. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
11. Control installations are completed.
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.
E. Check operation of pressure-reducing valve on gas train, including venting.
F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners for maximum operating efficiency.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and firing
sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature
interlocks.
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
H. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and 33 percent
load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate. Measure and
record the following:
1. Gas pressure on manifold.

2. Combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
3. Flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
4. Flue-gas carbon-dioxide and oxygen concentration.
5. Natural flue draft.
I. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each boiler.
J. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve, water level,
and backflow preventer.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15520 - FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Feedwater pumps and receivers for steam boilers (boiler feed units).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's technical Product Data;
rated capacity of selected model; temperature and net-positive suction head required characteristics;
pump performance curve with selection points clearly indicated; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, and components.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For feedwater units to include in operation and maintenance
D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that feedwater units will
withstand seismic forces possible at Project site. Include the following:
1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of assembled

components or on calculation.
2. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of internal and
external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully operational after the event."
3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment: Identify center of gravity and locate and
4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and
E. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of feedwater units
and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other manufacturers' products complying
with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT 15520 / Page 1 of 5

B. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and test unit according to ASME PTC 12.1, "Closed
Feedwater Heaters."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
D. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for high-pressure steam systems more than 15
psig (104 kPa) and ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure steam systems equal
to or less than 15 psig (104 kPa). Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate
ASME label.
A. Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed-metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion
compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden
flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store units in dry location.
C. Retain protective flange covers and machined-surface protective coatings during storage.
E. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,
Concrete."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Feedwater Units:
a. AESYS Technologies, LLC; Boiler Div

b. Aurora/Pentair Pump Group.
c. Bryan Boilers; Bryan Steam Corp.
d. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem, Inc.
e. Domestic Pump; a Xylem brand.
f. Parker Boiler Co.
g. PVI Industries Inc.
h. Sellers Engineering Co.
i. Skidmore.

2.2 FEEDWATER UNITS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested unit consisting of a condensate receiver, duplex

arrangement feedwater pumps, controls, and the following features and accessories:
1. Dial-type thermometer graduated in both Fahrenheit and Celsius.

2. Gage glass with stops at top and bottom.
3. Inlet strainer.
4. Lifting eyes.
5. Companion flanges.
6. Pump-discharge check valve.
7. Pump-discharge pressure gauge.
8. Pump-suction isolation valve.
9. Pump-discharge isolation valve.
10. Makeup-Water Assembly: Electric level switch and piston-operated, packless, solenoid
valve; inlet strainer; and three-valve bypass.
11. Feedwater Heater: Sparge tube, thermostat, and control valve.
1. Factory-Furnished Pipe, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A53M, Type S
(seamless), Grade B; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 80, with threaded
joints and malleable-iron fittings of class to match pressure rating of pipe.
a. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.

b. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 300.
2. Factory-Furnished Pipe, DN 75 (NPS 3) and Larger: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-
resistance welded), Grade B; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Type S, Grade B Schedule 80, with
welded joints and carbon-steel fittings and flanges of class to match pressure rating of pipe.
a. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

b. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,
Class 300, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
B. Receiver Material: Welded steel.
1. Finish: Epoxy coated with electrolytic corrosion inhibitor anode.

2. Arrangement: Floor mounted.
3. Factory-Applied Insulation and Jacket: Minimum thickness of 50 mm (2 inches) for mineral-
fiber pipe and tank insulation. Cover insulation with stucco-embossed aluminum jacket.
4. Mounting Frame: Structural-steel stand to support receiver and pumps. Fabricate stand with
bracing adequate for seismic forces according to authorities having jurisdiction and to allow
anchoring mounting frame to floor.
C. Vertical Feedwater Pump: Flange-mounted, closed-coupled, multistage, radially split case design
centrifugal pump; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure and a continuous water
temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F); with the following features:
1. Impeller: Stainless steel.

3. Motor: Totally enclosed fan cooled.
D. Feedwater Pump Control Panel: Unit mounted, factory wired, panel shall be able to communicate
with Building Automation System. Communications shall include status and control, and including
the following:
1. NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure.

2. Combination magnetic starters for each pump, with three overload relays, circuit breaker,
and cover interlock.

3. Numbered terminal block.

4. Removable control mounting plate.
5. Electric alternator for duplex units.
6. Pilot lights for pump running and alarm.
7. Alarm bell and silence switch.
8. Elapsed-time run meter, graduated in hours.
9. Fusible, control-circuit transformer.
E. Feedwater Pump Control Sequence: Boiler water-level controller starts lead pump; alternator
switches lead and lag pumps after each cycle. Low-level receiver float switch opens makeup-water
solenoid valve. Visual indications of pumps on and off status, lead/lag status, and alarm indication
of pump failure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundation and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for
installation and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for condensate return piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install unit level and plumb and to permit access for maintenance.
B. Support piping independent of pumps.
C. Install base-mounted pumps on concrete bases with grouted base frames.
D. Install parts and accessories shipped loose.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
C. Connect makeup-water piping and cooling-water piping with reduced-pressure backflow preventers.
D. Install overflow drain piping to nearest floor drain.
E. Install vents and extend to outdoors; terminate with elbow turned down and install an insect screen.
F. Ground equipment.
1.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

UL 486A - 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing unit and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with
requirements.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are
made.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the

following:
1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
equipment.
3. Check bearing lubrication.
4. Verify proper motor rotation.
5. Start up service.
6. Report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust boiler water-level controls to properly stage unit.
B. Set field-adjustable makeup-water and cooling-water controls.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean equipment internally; remove coatings applied for protection during shipping and storage,
foreign material, and oily residue according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Clean strainers.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain feedwater equipment. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15550 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Type B gas vents.

2. Steel, positive-pressure, double-wall vents.
3. Refractory-lined metal breechings and stacks.
4. Fabricated metal breechings.
5. Induced-draft vent fans.
6. Mechanical-draft vent fans.
7. Combustion-air fans.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for breechings, chimneys, and stacks.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Detail assemblies and
indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
E. Engineering Report: Certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vent fans to include in operation and maintenance manuals
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing refractory-lined stacks similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 15550 / Page 1 of 9

B. Source Limitations: Obtain Type B vent system components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
E. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for welder qualifications, welding details, and workmanship
standards.
F. Comply with SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."
G. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabricated
breechings.
H. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion and
contraction.
B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.issuance of “Taking Over

Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Type B Gas Vents:
a. American Metal Products, Amervent Division; Hart & Cooley Inc.

b. DuraVent; member of M&G Group.
c. Selkirk Corporation.
d. United McGill Corp.; Airflow Group.
e. Van-Packer Co.
2. Steel, Positive-Pressure, Double-Wall Vents:
a. American Metal Products, Amervent Division; Hart & Cooley Inc.

b. DuraVent; member of M&G Group.
c. Selkirk Corporation.
d. Van-Packer Co.
3. Refractory-Lined Metal Breechings and Chimneys:

a. DuraVent; member of M&G Group.

b. Superior Clay Corp.
c. Van-Packer Co.
d. Warren Environment, Inc
4. Thermally Actuated Vent Dampers:
a. Field Controls, LLC.
5. Induced-Draft Vent Fans:
a. Field Controls.
b. Quickdraft; Div. of C. A. Litzler Co., Inc.
6. Mechanical-Draft Vent Fans:
a. Field Controls.
b. Quickdraft; Div. of C. A. Litzler Co., Inc.
2.2 TYPE B GAS VENTS
A. Description: Double-wall gas vents rated for 248 deg C (480 deg F) continuously, with neutral or
negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211, Type B suitable for use with for certified gas
appliances. Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel sheet, each with the
following minimum thicknesses:
1. Round, 150-mm and Smaller ID: 0.30-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
2. Round, 175- to 450-mm ID: 0.35-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
3. Round, 500- to 600-mm ID: 0.45-mm inner pipe, 0.55-mm outer pipe.
4. Oval, 100-mm and Smaller Size: 0.30-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
5. Oval, 125- to 150-mm Size: 0.35-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier, adjustable
roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated of
similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.
2.3 STEEL, POSITIVE-PRESSURE, DOUBLE-WALL VENTS
A. Description: Double-wall metal stacks rated for 300 deg C (570 deg F) continuously, or 926 deg C
(1700 deg F) for 10 minutes, complying with NFPA 211, suitable for use with building heating
equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.
B. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 13-mm airspace, with positive
sealing joints.
C. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel of the following minimum thicknesses:
1. 150- to 900-mm Size: 0.90 mm thick.

D. Outer Jacket: Aluminum-coated steel of the following minimum thicknesses:


E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, termination, adjustable roof flashing,
storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated of similar
materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.
1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.
2.4 REFRACTORY-LINED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Comply with ASME STS-1.
B. Design Wind Loads: 241 km/h (150 mph).
C. Design for seismic conditions at Project site.
D. Chimney Outer Jacket: 6-mm hot-rolled steel with welded seam joint.
E. Breeching Outer Jacket: 3-mm galvanized steel with welded seams.
F. Refractory Lining: Tested according to UL 959 for temperature and acid resistance, and bearing the
testing laboratory label.
1. Temperature Rating: 982 deg C (1800 deg F) continuous firing, and 1093 deg C (2000 deg
F) intermittent firing without fusion.
2. Acid Extraction: Maximum of 0.2 percent.
3. Cold Crushing Strength: Minimum of 22 MPa (3200 psig).
4. Thickness: Minimum of 50 mm.
G. Finish: Factory-applied, high-heat-resistant paint; color as selected.
H. Base Section: Acid-resistant-coated, cast-iron anchor lugs for securing stack to foundation.
I. Cleanout Section: Smoke tight with gasketed and bolt-tightened inspection plate; weld neck to stack
section.
J. Tee or Wye Section: Smoke-tight connection, with welded joints and refractory lining; finished
with smooth transition and with no exposed metal on inside.
K. Spark Screen: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel, 1.6 mm thick, 13-by-13-mm mesh, with
Type 304 stainless-steel rolled angle and drawband.
L. Guy Bands: 200-mm wide bands of same material as jacket, with bolted fasteners.
M. Roof Penetration: Factory-fabricated thimble, flashing, and counterflashing.
N. Fabricate sections, fittings, and accessories as individual pieces or in combination lengths for field
handling.
O. Fabricate components with centrifugally cast refractory lining in lengths suitable for connection
with drawband.
P. Bond refractory to steel jacket with calcium-aluminate cement to prevent separation in finished
product during shipping, handling, and installation.
Q. Fabricate stacks with anchor lugs; cleanout; T-sections; flashing and counterflashing; and provisions
for support, expansion, and contraction.

2.5 FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Fabricate chimneys and vent connectors from ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Type 1100 or 3003,
aluminum or stainless steel, complying with NFPA 211 for the following minimum metal
thicknesses:
1. Aluminum: 0.69 mm (0.027 inch).

2. Stainless Steel: 0.31 mm (0.012 inch).
B. Fabricate cleanout doors from compatible material, same thickness as breeching, bolted and
gasketed.
C. Fabricate engine exhaust from ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade B;
or ASTM A 106, Type S, Grade B, [Schedule 40] [Schedule 80] pipe; with welded joints and
carbon-steel fittings and flanges.
1. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

2. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
2.6 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS
A. Cable: Galvanized, stranded wire of the following minimum thickness:

1. For ID Sizes Up to 600 mm: 9.5 mm in diameter.
2. For ID Sizes 625 to 750 mm: 11 mm in diameter.
3. For ID Sizes 775 to 900 mm: 12.5 mm in diameter.
4. For ID Sizes 925 to 1200 mm: 14.5 mm in diameter.
5. For ID Sizes 1225 to 1500 mm: 16 mm in diameter.
B. Pipe: 32-mm diameter, galvanized steel.
C. Angle Iron: Galvanized steel 380 by 380 by 5 mm.
2.7 INDUCED-DRAFT VENT FANS
A. Fabrication: Enameled-steel venturi tube for sizes 500 mm and smaller in diameter, and
ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless-steel venturi tube for sizes 550 to 1200 mm in diameter.
B. Fan: Radial-blade venturi type, with motor.
1. Fan Motor: Refer to "Motors" Section for factory-installed motors.
C. Accessories: Provide the following:
1. Tapered extension.
2. Straight extension.
3. Cylindrical storm shield.
4. Conical rain cap.
5. Spark arrester.
6. Curb cap.
7. Shock (flexible) connector.
8. Volume damper.
9. Blast gate damper.
10. Vibration isolators.

2.8 MECHANICAL-DRAFT VENT FANS
A. Forward-curved or radial-blade fan and scroll fabricated of mild steel with direct-drive, shaded-pole
motor with ball bearings, internal cooling fan, stainless-steel shaft, and integral pressure-sensing
switch.
B. Accessories: Provide the following:
1. Water heater control, including safety interlock controls.

2. Secondary safety switch.
3. Post purge kit.
4. Gas spillage sensing kit.
5. Wall vent hood.
2.9 COMBUSTION-AIR FAN
A. Forward-curved fan and scroll fabricated of mild steel with direct-drive, shaded-pole motor with
ball bearings, internal cooling fan, stainless-steel shaft, and integral pressure-sensing switch.
B. Accessories: Provide the following:
1. Appliance relay.
2. High-limit safety switch.
3. High-limit alarm.
4. Low room-temperature switch.
5. Intake hood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Type B gas Vents: Vents for certified gas appliances.
B. Steel, positive-pressure, double-wall vents: Vents for building heating equipment burning gas, solid,
or liquid fuels.
C. Refractory-Lined Metal Breechings and Chimneys: Freestanding dual-fuel boiler vents, oven vents,
water heaters, exhaust for engines, fireplaces, and other solid-fuel-burning appliances.
D. Field-Fabricated Metal Breechings and Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers, oven vents, water heaters,
exhaust for engines, fireplaces, and other solid-fuel-burning appliances.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
A. Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate to comply with minimum clearances
from combustibles.
B. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.
C. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written installation

instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
D. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support weight of vent and all
accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
1. Where maximum unsupported lengths of stack are exceeded, support chimneys as follows:
a. Guy wires.
b. Rigid pipe braces.
c. Rigid angle-iron braces.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFRACTORY-LINED BREECHINGS AND STACKS
A. Assemble and erect stack sections and accessories according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles.
B. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.
C. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by
manufacturer.
D. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior finish.
E. Erect stacks level and plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 25 mm out of plumb from top to
bottom.
F. Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to
nearest drain.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED BREECHINGS
A. Install concrete inserts in formwork to support breeching independent of its appliance connection.
B. Assemble and erect fabricated breechings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.
D. Align breechings at connections, with smooth internal surface and 3-mm misalignment tolerance.
E. Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to
nearest drain.
F. Install accessories, dampers, fans, equipment, controls, and other supports.
G. Anchor breechings to building structure with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion anchors, welded
studs, C-clamps, or special beam clamps.

H. Support vertical stacks at 3.6-m intervals by attaching to adjacent vertical structural surfaces or by
direct bearing at floor penetrations and similar locations.
1. 600 mm and Smaller: Use straps or formed angles 38 by 1.6 mm.

2. Larger Than 600 mm: Use steel angle brackets 38 by 3 mm.
I. Support horizontal round breechings with girth strap and strap hanger (of same size). Install pair of
strap hangers bolted to opposite sides of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints. Support
breechings at 3000-mm intervals with hangers as follows for corresponding diameters:
1. 750 mm and Smaller Diameter: Strap hangers 25 by 1.6 mm.

2. 775- to 1200-mm Diameter: Strap hangers 38 by 1.6 mm.
3. 1225- to 2100-mm Diameter: Pairs of strap hangers 38 by 1.6 mm.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS
A. Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF FANS
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Secure fans to appliances, breechings, or stacks with hardware matching connected materials.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
3.8 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including terminals, inspect exposed finishes. Remove paint
splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and on completion of installation, to remove dust and debris.
Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings and chimneys that are not completed or connected
to equipment.
3.9 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for fans.
B. Verify that fans are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions, and
confirm fan interlocks.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain fans. Refer to Division 1.


SECTION 15585 - DEAERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, factory-assembled deaerators.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design for operation from 14 to 104 kPa (2 to 15 psig). Design and guarantee oxygen removal to
not more than 0.005 mL/L for load conditions between 5 and 100 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated makeup water, feedwater, and
steam flow rates, working pressure, tank capacities, storage capacity in minutes, temperature and
NPSH required, pump performance curves with selection points clearly indicated, furnished
specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that deaerators will

withstand seismic forces as indicated in "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints"
Section. Include the following:
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
E. Field quality-control test reports.
DEAERATORS 15585 / Page 1 of 6

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For deaerators to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of deaerators and
are based on specific types and models selected. Other products with equal performance
characteristics, made by specified manufacturers, may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing deaerators similar to those

indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and stamp deaerator tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
D. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1, "Power Piping," for systems more than 104 kPa (15 psig) and
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for systems equal to or less than 104 kPa (15 psig). Safety
valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrical components, devices, and accessories specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
A. Deliver deaerators as a factory-assembled unit with protective crating and covering.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective
covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents. Deliver to Employer.
1. Gaskets: 1 replacement gasket for each gasketed opening.

2. Gage Glass: 1 replacement glass for each gage glass.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AESYS Technologies, LLC; Boiler Div

2. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div.
3. Bethlehem Corp., (The).
4. Bryan Boilers; Bryan Steam Corp.
5. Crane Co.; Cochrane Environmental Systems Div.
6. Industrial Steam Inc.

2.2 CONFIGURATION
A. Horizontal spray deaerator with single compartment.
2.3 DEAERATORS
A. Fabricate deaerators capable of raising water temperature within 1.6 deg C (3 deg F) of saturated
steam temperature, and according to ASME Pressure Vessel Code. Design, test, and stamp for 345-
kPa (50-psig) working pressure.
B. Condensate and Feedwater: Supply to deaerator through adjustable spray valve of stainless-steel
construction, with automatic and manual vent valves.
C. Material for Wetted Components: Components in contact with water that has not been deaerated
shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel.
D. Adjustable Spray Valves: Type 316 stainless steel. Arrange spray valves for counterflow of steam
and condensate and so corrosive gases being vented do not contact deaerator's head or shell.
E. Vent Condenser: Stainless steel, with automatic and manual vent valves.
F. Deaerator and Storage Tank:
1. Material: Welded carbon steel.

2. Additional Corrosion Protection:
a. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.
3. Access: Manhole in deaerator and storage tank for access to internal components for
inspection and service.
4. Factory-Applied Insulation and Jacket: Minimum thickness of 50 mm (2 inches) for mineral-
fiber pipe and tank insulation. Cover insulation with stucco-embossed aluminum jacket.
5. Factory-Installed Pipe, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S
(seamless), Grade B; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 80; with
threaded joints and fittings.
a. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 300.
6. Factory-Installed Pipe, DN 80 (NPS 3) and Larger: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-
resistance welded), Grade B; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Type S, Grade B, Schedule 80; with
welded joints and carbon-steel fittings and flanges.
a. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASME B16.9, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

b. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,
Class 300, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Makeup Water: Inlet regulating valve with stainless-steel float.
B. Pressure-Reducing Valve: Sized to reduce steam pressure to operating pressure of 35 kPa (5 psi).
C. Overflow Drain: Sized to relieve full capacity at operating pressure.
D. Steam Safety Valve: ASME rated, sized to relieve full capacity of steam-pressure-reducing valve.

E. Alarms: High-level alarm switch, low-level alarm switch, one alarm bell.
F. Vents: Manual and automatic vent valves.
G. Gages: Pressure gage; thermometer; and water-level, gage-glass set.
H. Feedwater Pump: Cast-iron, flange-mounted volute; with stainless steel, multistage centrifugal
impeller, renewable bronze case ring, and stainless-steel shaft.
1. Seals: Mechanical, suitable for 121 deg C (250 deg F).

2. Pump Motor: Vertical, open dripproof, close coupled to pump.
I. Feedwater Pump Control Panel: Unit mounted, factory wired, and including the following:
1. NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure.

2. Combination magnetic starters for each pump, with three overload relays, circuit breaker,
and interlocking cover.
3. Automatic electric lead/lag switch and test push button for each pump.
4. Numbered terminal block.
5. Removable control mounting plate.
6. Pilot lights to indicate pump is running.
7. Alarm with bell and silence switch.
8. Elapsed-time run meter, graduated in hours.
9. Fusible, control-circuit transformer if motor voltage exceeds 130-V ac.
J. Control Sequence: Lead pump shall run continuously while boiler water-level control modulates
feedwater control valve. Lag pump shall start on loss of discharge water pressure for 60 seconds or
more. Alarm shall sound when lag pump starts.
A. Fabricate and label deaerator tanks according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
B. Factory install and test piping that connects pumps to tanks according to ASME B31.1, "Power
Piping or ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
C. Factory test performance and certify test results on packaged deaerator units, according to
ASME PTC 12.3, before shipping to Project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before deaerator installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes
and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other
conditions affecting performance, maintenance, and operations.
1. Final deaerator locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations
before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

3.2 INSTALLATION

field assembly of components and installation of deaerators.
B. Install deaerators level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install units on concrete equipment pads with anchor-bolt inserts cast into pad. Concrete
reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
D. Install deaerators to permit access for service and maintenance.
E. Support piping independent of pumps.
F. Install base-mounted pumps on concrete base with grouted base frame.
G. Install piping to units to allow servicing and maintenance.
H. Connect accessories not factory installed according to manufacturer's instructions.
I. Extend overflow drains to floor drains.
J. Extend vent piping to outside and terminate with manufacturer-approved cap furnished with
deaerator.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

piping and electrical connections.
B. Steam and Condensate Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of "Steam and Condensate
Piping" Section. Connect to deaerator tappings with shutoff valves and unions or flanges at each
connection.
C. Connect condensate drains, pump-discharge piping, vents, overflow drains, makeup water, steam
supply, and cooling water piping.
D. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections specifying electrical

connections for equipment.
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

testing.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections, for compliance with requirements.
equipment.
3. Verify bearing lubrication.

5. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
a. Test procedures used.

b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning equipment and retest as specified above.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the
following:
1. Set deaerator makeup water-level controls.

2. Verify bearing lubrication.
4. Start pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Adjust initial temperature and pressure set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
C. Clean strainers.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain deaerators. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15600 – INDOOR POOL DEHUMIDIFIER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, factory assembled swimming pool environmental control and
energy recovery system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail layout and installation of wall penetrations.
C. Product Certificates: Certification of performance according to AHRI 911 and that the unit has been
started and function properly.
D. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate

and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and maintenance
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems.”
B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
D. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70.
INDOOR POOL DEHUMIDIFIER 15600 / Page 1 of 6

E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and wall construction where unit penetrates wall or is
supported by it.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and countersigned
by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation,
and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.issuance of

“Taking Over Certificate”.
2. Warranty Period, Heat Exchangers: 10 years after date of Substantial Completion.issuance
of “Taking Over Certificate”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Seresco
2. Desert Aire
3. Dectron
4. Poolpak
A. Factory assembled, packaged swimming pool environmental control and energy recovery system.
The unit shall include mechanical heat recovery, moisture removal and disposal, supply air fan, pool
water condenser, and control system, factory installed and wired in a single unit enclosure.
B. The unit shall be specifically designed, manufactured and tested for enclosed swimming pool duty.
C. Unit shall be suitable for indoor or outdoor weatherproof mounting.
D. The standard product shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior
to bid opening. Products having less than 5 years field service record shall not be acceptable.
E. Cabinet: All panel work and structural steel members shall be of G-90 galvanized steel treated to
resist chlorine and pool chemicals.
F. Panels: All panels shall be formed from 18 gauge-galvanized steel. All side panels shall be insulated
with minimum one-inch duct liner insulation secured to panels by adhesive and panel flanges. The
fire resistance rating shall conform to NFPA Standard 90A and 90B. All seams shall be bolted and
sealed to prevent leaks.

G. All nuts, bolts and lock washers exposed to the natatorium air shall be stainless steel.
H. Compressors, pool water heat recovery unit, and controls, including solenoid and expansion valves
and refrigerant sight glasses shall be located in compartments isolated from unit air stream to allow
for ease of maintenance and to provide protection from the corrosive atmosphere.
I. Hinged Access Doors shall be provided at the openings for compressor(s), air filters, electrical panel,
blowers, motors, and drives. Doors shall be double-wall and insulated.
2.3 COMPRESSOR
A. Description: Heavy duty, single or multi stage scroll compressor.
B. Refrigerant: R407C.
C. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection, filter and
initial oil charge.
D. Liquid refrigerant controls shall be located outside of the air stream.
E. Compressors shall be equipped with motor overload protection large capacity oil sump.
2.4 POOL WATER CONDENSER
A. Description: The internal pool water condenser shall be capable of rejecting the heat recovered from
the compressor and the evaporator.
B. Construction: Counter flow, tube in tube type.
C. Tubes: Copper-Nickel alloy.
D. Insulation: minimum 2-inch closed cell foam.
2.5 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Copper tubes with brazed copper fins and copper end sheets.
B. The coil shall be sectioned to provide proportional air to refrigerant latent and sensible heat removal
capacity.
2.6 REMOTE AIR-COOLED CONDENSER UNIT
A. Construction: Cabinet shall be of galvanized steel, removable panels.
B. Condenser coils: Copper tubes with mechanically bonded aluminum fins.
C. Condenser coil shall be capable of rejecting all the heat (100%) recovered from the compressor and
the evaporator.
D. The sensible and latent heat recovered in air conditioning mode is rejected to the auxiliary remote
air-cooled condenser if pool water temperature is satisfied

2.7 AIR FILTERS
A. Return air filters shall be 1-inch thick, laminated polyester construction, replaceable type.
B. Outside air filters shall be 2-inch thick, multi graduated, laminated polyester construction,
throwaway type.
C. The filters shall have a non migrating tackifier encapsulated between the second and third laminates.
They shall be totally non toxic, non allergenic and not support the growth of bacteria and fungus.
2.8 MIXING BOX
A. The mixing box shall be integral to the unit.
B. The mixing box shall be equipped with manual air damper to control the amount of outside air.
C. The outside air damper shall be motorized and shall have NEMA 4 housing with an auto close
mechanism on power failure.
2.9 SUPPLY FAN
A. Description: Dual inlet centrifugal type with multiblade forward curved wheels. The fan can be
direct or belt driven.
B. Construction: Galvanized steel, painted and baked with an epoxy coating providing a chlorine and
pool chemistry resistant finish.
C. The fan shall be dynamically and statically balanced and tested on the shafts.
D. Bearings shall be grease lubricated, self aligning ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours average
life.
E. Fan assembly shall be spring isolation rated. Maximum deflection is 1". Fan blower and motor shall
be mounted on common isolation frame to eliminate harmonic vibration.
2.10 DRAIN PAN
A. Construction: Galvanized steel with powder coat paint to provide a chlorine and pool chemistry
resistant finish.
B. Insulation: The floor sections shall be fully insulated. All drain lines within the unit shall be
insulated with minimum 3/4 inch closed cell foam.
C. The floor sections under condensate producing coils shall be sloped toward the drains and piped to
a common drain accessible from either side of the unit.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Control Module: Unit-mounted in a separate compartment isolated form airflow.
B. The controls should have the following functions/set points:

1. Space Dry Bulb Temperature

2. Space Relative Humidity
3. Pool Water Temperature
4. Occupied/Unoccupied Schedule
C. The unit shall be provided with the following factory mounted and prewired control sensors:
1. Space Dry Bulb Temperature

2. Space Relative Humidity
3. Pool Water Temperature
4. Supply Air Dry Bulb Temperature
5. Compressor Motor Current
6. Supply Fan Motor Current
7. Exhaust Fan Motor Current
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with AHRI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor
Unitary Equipment."
B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with AHRI 911, " Standard for Performance
Rating of Indoor Pool Dehumidifiers "
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate installation of wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof.
C. Install wall sleeves to withstand, without damage to equipment and structure, seismic forces required
by building code.
D. Provide maintenance clearance around the sides and the compressor compartment of the unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate the
requirements:
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

2. Condensate Drain: Make indirect connection at nearest floor or equipment drain.
B. Electrical: Connect units to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer.

in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing:
B. After installation, check the following:
1. Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior wall.

2. Unit casing has no visible damage.
3. Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
5. Controls are connected and operable.
6. Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
7. Filters are installed and clean.
8. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
9. Gas line is connected and purged.
C. Lubricate bearings on fan.
D. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
E. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.
F. After starting and performance test, replace filters with new, clean filters.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain packaged terminal air-conditioning units. Refer to Division 1.

SECTION 15672 - AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, air-cooled condensing units that contain condenser coils and fans
housed in a weatherproof casing for outdoor installation.
1. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof-mounted equipment supports, and flashing
and counterflashing for roof penetrations.
2. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for valves and accessories for piping connections
to units.
A. Seismic Performance: Air-cooled refrigerant condensers shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to section 2/3 of the Jordanian code 2005; “ ‫زل‬ ‫ا و‬ ‫” دة ا‬.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; operating characteristics, shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-cooled refrigerant condensers, accessories, and

AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS 15672 / Page 1 of 5

D. Source Quality Control Reports: as specified in clause "Source Quality Control".
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each air-cooled condenser to include in the operation and
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are listed
and labeled.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package, "Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical power and control wiring.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties
are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate locations for refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering air-

cooled condensers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div.

2. Dunham-Bush, Inc.
3. Lennox International, Inc.; Lennox Industries, Inc.
4. Daikin
5. Rheem Manufacturing Co.
6. Trane Co. (The); North American Commercial Group.
7. York International Corp.
A. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410ª.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser fans
and motors, and unit controls.
C. Condensing Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; factory tested at 2930 kPa (425 psig).
Circuit to match compressors.
D. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans for vertical or horizontal air discharge; directly driven
with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with integral current- and thermal-overload
protection.
1. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control, or fan-cycling

control.
E. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts; 220-V
control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and an unfused
factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power connection.
F. Unit Casings: Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and finished
with manufacturer's standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with weather protection
for components and controls, and with removable panels for access to controls, condenser fans,
motors, and drives.
2.3 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to ARI 210/240.
B. Verification of Performance for units smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39,500 W): Rate condensing
units according to AHRI 210/240.
C. Verification of Performance for units larger than 135,000 BTUH (39,500 W): Rate condensing units
according to AHRI 340/360.
D. Testing Requirements for units smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39,500 W): Factory test sound-power-
level ratings according to AHRI 270.
E. Testing Requirements for units larger than 135,000 BTUH (39,500 W): Factory test sound-power-
level ratings according to AHRI 370.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air-cooled refrigerant
condensers.

B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers will be
installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air-cooled condensers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Shop Drawings,
original design, and referenced standards.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base, 100 mm larger
than condenser unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to supports
with removable fasteners.
E. Install units on seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of 25-mm.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements of Division 15 Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter dryer, and moisture
indicator on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line.
C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16.

A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
D. Report test results in writing.

3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Clean to remove burrs and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report results in
writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the
following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
D. Lubricate bearings on fans.
E. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
H. Measure and record airflow over coils.
I. Check operation of low ambient control device.
J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to
structure.
K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain air-cooled condenser units. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training"

SECTION 15684 - ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, rotary-screw water chillers.
1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints" for chiller
vibration isolation requirements.
2. Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping" for chiller piping requirements.
3. Division 15 Section "Refrigerant Piping" for chiller piping requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's catalog data shall be submitted for the following items:
1. Accessories.
2. Spare Parts.
3. Vibration Isolators.
B. Certificates to standards of manufacturing and testing shall be submitted for following items
showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section:
1. Compressor.
2. Motor.
3. Control Panel.
4. Condenser.
5. Evaporator.
6. Refrigerant Circuit.
7. Alarm Systems.
9. Gages.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions shall be submitted for air-cooled screw chiller units including
manufacturer’s style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty
information, and fabrication site information.
C.D. Operation and Maintenance Data shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled,
"Manufacturer's Field Service," of this section.
D.E. Product Data: Include refrigerant; rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; noise
criteria; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Product Data: Equipment
and Performance Data shall be submitted for the following items indicating use life, system
ROTARY-SCREW CHILLERS 15684 / Page 1 of 12

functional flows, safety features, and other features such as electrical system protective device
ratings.
1. Chiller Unit.
2. Compressor.
3. Condenser.
E.F. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations, remedies,
F.G. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Connection diagrams shall
be submitted indicating the relations and connections of the following items. The drawings shall
indicate the general physical layout of all controls, and internal tubing and wiring details.
1. Compressor.
2. Motor.
3. Control Panel.
4. Condenser.
5. Evaporator.
6. Refrigerant Circuit.
7. Alarm Systems.
9. Gages.
10. Control Diagrams shall be submitted for water-cooled screw chiller units showing the
physical and functional relationship of equipment. Electrical diagrams shall show size, type,
and capacity of the systems.
G.H. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints
and for designing vibration isolation bases.
H.I. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to
structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.
I.J. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans drawn to scale and coordinating the following:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements.
4. Determine spaces reserved for electrical equipment.
5. Access requirements around other work, including working clearances to mechanical
controls and electrical equipment.
6. Required clearances for operation and maintenance.
J.K. Product Certificates: Certification of performance according to AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI
551/591 (SI) and that chillers have been started and function properly.
K.L. Factory Test Reports: Reports shall certify the compliance with performance requirements and
follow the format of the required testing standard for both the Chiller Performance Tests and the
Chiller Sound Tests. Test report shall include certified calibration report of all test instrumentation.
Calibration report shall include certification that all test instrumentation has been calibrated within
6 months prior to the test date, identification of all instrumentation, and certification that all
instrumentation complies with requirements of the test standard. Test report shall be submitted one
week after completion of the factory test.

L.M. System Performance Tests Report: The report shall document compliance with the specified
performance criteria upon completion and testing of the system. The report shall indicate the
number of days covered by the tests and any conclusions as to the adequacy of the system. The
report shall also include the following information and shall be taken at least three different times
at outside dry-bulb temperatures that are at least 3 deg. C (37 deg. F)apart:
1. Date and outside weather conditions.

2. The load on the system based on the following:
a. The refrigerant used in the system.

b. Condensing temperature and pressure.
c. Suction temperature and pressure.
d. Running current, voltage and proper phase sequence for each phase of all motors.
e. The actual on-site setting of all operating and safety controls.
f. Chilled water pressure, flow and temperature in and out of the chiller.
M.N. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements.
N.O. Maintenance Agreement: As specified in this Section.
O.P. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 1.
P.Q. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
Q.R. Certification of performance and factory test results specified in "Factory Tests" Article.
A. AHRI Compliance: Rate chiller according to AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI 551/591 (SI).
B. AHRI 370 – Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Equipment.
B.C. ASHRAE Compliance: Conform to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE , “Safety Standard for
Refrigeration Systems” for chiller design, construction, leak testing, and installation, and ASHRAE
147 “Reducing the Release of Halogenated Refrigerants from Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Equipment and Systems” for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.
C.D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D.E. ASME Compliance: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII -
Pressure Vessels Division 1, for construction and testing of evaporator and condenser pressure
vessels. Label evaporator and condenser with ASME mark.
E.F. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical power and control wiring.
F.G. Refrigerant Exposure: Monitor machine room and sound audible alarm and shut-down chiller if
refrigerant concentrations exceed 10 ppm.
H. Equipment Country of Origin (manufacturing country) shall be clearly indicated and limited to
American (USA) and European origins.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty signed by chiller manufacturer and

countersigned by Contractor, agreeing to furnish parts for compressor and motor failures within
specified warranty period.

Certificate”.
1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance: Submit four copies of manufacturer's "Agreement for Continued Service and
Maintenance," before Substantial Completion, for Employer's acceptance. Offer terms and
conditions for furnishing consumables and providing continued testing, maintenance and servicing
to include replacing materials and components. Include one-year term of agreement, commencing
at date of Substantial Completion, with option for one-year renewal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship. The
standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 5 years prior to
bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a
product that has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
manufacturer's catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall
not be acceptable. Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall
be environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

1. Daikin.
2. Trane; member of Ingersoll Rand Group.
3. United Technologies Corp.;Corporation; Carrier Corporation Subsidiary.
4. York International Corporation; member of Johnson Controls, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired rotary-screw variable speed air-cooled water chiller.
Packaged chiller consists of one or more rotary-screw compressors, an evaporator or cooler, an air
cooled condenser, safety controls, and operational controls.
2.3 REFRIGERANT
A. Material: R-134a (HFC-134a); provide full operating charge of refrigerant and oil.
1. Refrigerant Circuit: Provide refrigerant charging port.
2.4 COMPRESSOR

A. Description: Hermetic or semihermetic, rebuildable, single-screw or twin-screwvariable speed

driven compressor.
2.5 MOTOR
A. Refrigerant-cooled, hermetic or semihermetic motor; or open, dripproof induction motor; with the
following features:
1. Overvoltage protection.
2. Undervoltage protection.
3. Single-phasing protection.
4. Current-overload protection.
B. Comply with requirements of section 15055 “Motors”.
2.6 EVAPORATOR
A. Description: Shell and tube cooler with refrigerant totally enclosed by shell; water in tubes.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel plate.
C. Cooler Tubes: Seamless copper; expanded into tube sheets; individually replaceable; externally
finned; with standard, removable, carbon-steel, marine type, water boxes.
1. Internal Finish: Internally ribbed or smooth tubes.
D. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig) minimum, subject to suit design requirements.
E. Water Side Working Pressure: 1035 kPa (150 psig) minimum, subject to suit design requirements.
F. Insulation: Factory-applied and painted, 19-mm thick, flexible elastomeric insulation. Insulate
evaporator, suction lines, and other surfaces where condensation might occur.
2.7 WATER-COOLED CONDENSERHEAT EXCHANGER FOR HEAT RECLAIM UNITS
A. Description: Shell and tube condenser in parallel with the standard air-cooled condenser for the
purpose of simultaneously producing tempered hot water while satisfying the chilled water
requirement. with water enclosed in tubes; refrigerant enclosed by shell.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel plate.
C. Cooler Tubes: Seamless copper; expanded into tube sheets; individually replaceable; and standard,
removable, carbon-steel, marine type, water boxes.
1. Internal Finish: Ribbed or smooth tubes.
D. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psig).
E. Water Side Working Pressure: 1035 kPa (150 psig).
F. Safety and Operating Options: Include the following:
1. Pressure relief safety valve.

2. Purge valve.
3. Subcooler circuit.
A. Description: Brazed Plate heat exchanger (desuperheater) for heat reclaim from compressor and
condensing saturated temperature, which allow production of hot water up to 55 °C.
2.8 AIR-COOLED CONDENSER
A. Description: Factory assembled, wired, and tested; and consisting of casing, air-cooled condenser
coils, fans, and controls integrated with compressor operation.
B. Casing: Weatherproof, constructed of hot-dip galvanized steel with factory-painted finish.
C. Fans: Propeller type, statically and dynamically balanced.
D. Fan Discharge Arrangement: Vertical.
E. Fan Motor: DirectHigh efficiency direct drive, weatherproof, with bearings permanently lubricated,
and having built-in current- and thermal-overload protection.
F. Micro-channel heat exchanger (MCHX) Condenser Coil:
1. Constructed of a single material to avoid galvanic corrosion due to dissimilar metals.

Exchanger shall have a series of flat tubes containing a series of multiple, parallel flow micro-
channels layered between the refrigerant manifolds Coils and headers are brazed as one
piece. Integral sub cooling is included through a two-pass arrangement. Coils shall be of
aluminum alloys leak tested and pressure tested at 45 bar (650 psig). Condenser coil shall be
washable with potable water under 7 bar (100 psig) pressure. Tubes shall be cleaned,
dehydrated, and sealed.
a. Security Grilles/Hail Guards: Units shall be supplied with factory-installed or field-

installed louvered, sheet metal panels which securely fasten to the unit to provide
condenser coil protection against hail and physical damage.
G. Safety and Operating Options: Low-ambient operational controls.
2.9 CHILLER OPTIONS
A. Furnish chillers with the following features:
1. Remote time clock.

2. Control transformer.
3. Indicating lights for chiller status.
4. Pressure gages.
5. Audible alarm.
6. Sound blanketing.
7. Sound enclosure.
2.10 CONTROLS, GENERAL
A. Manufacturer's standard, microprocessor-based DDC chiller controls to include BMS interface with
Chiller Sequencing Controls.

B. Chiller Plant Manager System: Factory supplied chiller plant manager system including gateways
for BMS connections supplied by chiller manufacturer shall be provided to sequence, control,
monitor chillers, and interface with BMS.
C. Chiller Interface Panel: Factory supplied interface panel to communicate and transmit data between
the chillers, chillers plant manager and BMS. All required data from chillers as specified shall be
transmitted to BMS.
2.11 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Compressor Capacity Control: Modulating slide valveUsing variable speed drive to maintain
chilled water temperature set point without hunting within throttling range. Include the following
features:
1. Throttling Range: Full load to 10 percent of full load.

2. Chilled water temperature control.
3. Chilled water temperature setback.
4. Load limit controller.
2.12 SAFETY CONTROLS
A. Manually reset controls to perform the following functions:
1. Low evaporator pressure cutout.

2. Low evaporator temperature cutout.
3. Low oil sump temperature cutout.
4. Low oil pressure cutout.
5. High oil temperature cutout.
6. High condenser pressure cutout.
7. Water-Flow Interlock: Vapor proof water-flow switch to prevent starting of compressor
without chilled and condenser water flow.
B. Automatically reset controls to perform the following functions:
1. Low evaporator pressure cutout.

2. Low evaporator temperature cutout.
3. Low oil sump temperature cutout.
4. Low oil pressure cutout.
5. High oil temperature cutout.
6. High condenser pressure cutout.
7. Water-Flow Interlock: Vapor proof water-flow switch to prevent starting of compressor
without chilled and condenser water flow.
2.13 FACTORY TESTS
A. The Contractor and proposed chiller manufacturer shall be responsible for performing the chiller
factory test to validate the specified full load capacity, full load EER, IPLV and NPLV in accordance
with AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI 551/591 (SI), except as indicated.
B. The chiller factory test shall be performed in the presence of the Client’s and Engineer’s
representatives team. The team will comprise maximum four representatives. All expenses to be
borne by the Contractor.

C. The Contractor and chiller manufacturer shall provide to the Engineer a certified chiller factory test
report in accordance with AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI 551/591 (SI) to confirm that the chiller
performs as specified. Tests shall be conducted in an AHRI certified test facility in conformance
with AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI 551/591 (SI) procedures and tolerances, except as indicated.
D. At a minimum, chiller capacity shall be validated to meet the scheduled requirements indicated on
the drawings. Tolerance or deviation shall be in strict accordance with AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI
551/591 (SI). Stable operation at minimum load of 10 percent of total capacity shall be
demonstrated during the factory test.
E. Temperature Adjustments: Temperature adjustments shall adhere to AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI
551/591 (SI) to adjust from the design-fouling factor to the clean tube condition. Test temperature
adjustments shall be verified prior to testing by the manufacturer. There shall be no exceptions to
conducting the test with clean tubes with the temperature adjustments per AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or
AHRI 551/591 (SI). The manufacturer shall clean the tubes, if necessary, prior to testing to obtain
a test-fouling factor of 0.0000.
F. Test Instrumentation: The factory test instrumentation shall be per AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI
551/591 (SI) and the calibration shall be traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology.
G. Test Report: A certified test report of all data shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior
to project acceptance. Calibration curves and information sheets for all instrumentation shall be
provided.
H. Equipment Adjustments: If the equipment fails to perform within allowable tolerances, the
manufacturer shall be allowed to make necessary revisions to his equipment and retest as required.
The manufacturer shall assume all expenses incurred by the Client/Engineer to witness the retest.
I. Chillers shall be sound tested at the factory prior to shipment to confirm the sound pressure level
specified herein. Tests and data shall be conducted and measured in strict accordance with AHRI
575 at the full load system operating conditions. The chiller sound pressure level, in decibels (dB),
with a reference pressure of 20 micropascals, shall not exceed the specified noise level. Ratings
shall be in accordance with AHRI 575. No rising of leaving chilled water temperature shall be
allowed. A minimum of 75 percent of the sound data points shall be taken along the length of the
machine, and established as the minimum percentage of total possible points used to determine
sound levels. In the event that the chiller does not meet the dBA sound pressure level, the
manufacturer shall, at his expense, provide sufficient attenuation to the machine to meet the
specified value. This attenuation shall be applied in such a manner that it does not hinder the
operation or routine maintenance procedures of the chiller. The attenuation material, adhesives,
coatings, and other accessories shall have surface burning characteristics as determined by ASTM
E84.
2.14 POWER CONTROLS
A. Control Panel: Manufacturer's standard, unit mounted, factory wired with a single-point connection,
with the following power-control options:
1. External-overload protection.
2. Control circuit fuse.
3. Power terminal block.
4. Lockout restart timer.
B. Combination controller and disconnect with starter.
C. Starter: Variable frequency drive.

2.15 VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Direct isolation and the following vibration isolators specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration
Control":
1. Seismically restrained spring isolators with a minimum deflection of 25 mm.
A. Verification of Performance: Test each chiller before shipment. Rate each chiller according to
AHRI 550/590 (I-P) or AHRI 551/591 (SI), " Performance Rating of Water-Chilling and Heat Pump
Water-Heating Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle." Provide a written report indicating
Integrated Part-Load Value (IPLV) at AHRI standard conditions or Application Part-Load Value
(APLV) and test conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive chillers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance and maintenance of chillers.
B. Examine proposed route of moving chillers into place and verify that it is free of interferences.
C. Verify piping roughing-in locations.
D. Verify branch circuit wiring suitability. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
3.2 FIELD REFRIGERANT CHARGING
A. Initial Charge: Upon completion of all the refrigerant pipe tests, the vacuum on the system shall be
broken by adding the required charge of dry refrigerant for which the system is designed, in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide the complete
charge of refrigerant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Upon satisfactory
completion of the system performance tests, any refrigerant that has been lost from the system shall
be replaced. After the system is fully operational, service valve seal caps and blanks over gage
points shall be installed and tightened.
B. Refrigerant Leakage: If a refrigerant leak is discovered after the system has been charged, the
leaking portion of the system shall immediately be isolated from the remainder of the system and
the refrigerant shall be pumped into the system receiver or other suitable container. The refrigerant
shall not be discharged into the atmosphere.
C. Contractor's Responsibility: The Contractor shall, at all times during the installation and testing of
the refrigeration system, take steps to prevent the release of refrigerants into the atmosphere. The
steps shall include, but not be limited to, procedures that will minimize the release of refrigerants to
the atmosphere and the use of refrigerant recovery devices to remove refrigerant from the system
and store the refrigerant for reuse or reclaim. At no time shall more than 85 g of refrigerant be
released to the atmosphere in any one occurrence. Any system leaks within the first year shall be
repaired in accordance with the specified requirements including material, labor, and refrigerant if
the leak is the result of defective equipment, material, or installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install chillers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install chillers plumb and level, and anchor. Anchor housekeeping pads to building floor. Anchor
chiller and vibration isolators to housekeeping pad.
C. Install vibration isolators according to isolator manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Install piping connections maintaining clearances for service and maintenance of chillers.
F. Install flange or union connections at chillers.
G. Install flexible pipe connections for chillers mounted on vibration isolators.
H. Install shutoff valves at chiller inlet and outlet connections.
3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Refer to Division 16 Sections for wiring devices, wires and cables, and electrical installation
requirements.
B. Install and connect remote flow switches and remote chiller control panel.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, according to

manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise field

assembly of components and installation of chillers, including piping and electrical connections, and
to report results in writing.
equipment.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean finishes to remove dust and dirt.
B. Touch up scratches in unfinished surfaces to restore corrosion resistance.
C. Touch up scratches in finished surfaces to restore finish.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that installation complies with Contract requirements.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and check
for the following items:
1. No physical damage to unit.

2. Unit is level.
3. Chiller vibration isolation and flexible pipe connections are installed.
4. Clearances have been maintained and piping is installed for easy removal for service and
tube cleaning.
5. Chilled- and condenser-water pipes have been connected to correct ports.
6. Labels and safety instructions are clearly visible.
7. Oil levels are as recommended by the manufacturer.
8. Refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.
9. Shipping skids, blocks, and straps are removed.
10. Refrigerant pressure relief is vented to outside.
11. Thermometers and pressure gages are installed.
12. Controls and safety interlocks are installed and connected.
13. Pumps are installed, connected, and operational.
C. Start-up:
1. Chiller manufacturer to provide a factory-trained representative to perform the following

services.
a. Leak testing.
b. Refrigerant pressure testing.
c. Evacuation.
d. Charging the chiller with refrigerant.
e. Check and record performance of chiller protection devices.
f. Check and record performance of chilled- and condenser-water flow and low-
temperature interlocks.
g. Operate chiller for run-in period as recommended by the manufacturer.
h. Check static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller
startup and shutdown.
i. Check refrigerant charge.
j. Check oil level.
2. After the above services have been performed, the same factory-trained representative shall
be available for fifteen days to instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation and
maintenance of the chiller.
3. The Contractor shall supply the owner with the following literature as furnished by the
manufacturer prior to start-up:
a. One complete set of installation drawings.

b. Wiring diagrams.
c. Installation instructions.
d. Start-up instructions.
e. Operation and maintenance instructions.
D. Guarantee the main electric motor starters shall be furnished and guaranteed by the rotary-screw
chiller manufacturer who will be responsible for the refrigeration system performance and its
control.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."


Specifications BOOKLET 3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Specifications BOOKLET 3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MEP and Finishing Works (PK4)

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 SITE CONSTRUCTION

03300 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE

04200 UNIT MASONRY

05051 SHOP APPLIED COATINGS FOR METALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 1 of 5

DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS

06105 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

09111 NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 2 of 5

09661 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOOR COVERINGS

10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 3 of 5

15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 4 of 5

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO FOH INTERIOR DECORATION WORKS

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS (SUPPLEMENT)

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC/ Page 5 of 5

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

D. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 / Page 1 of 12

B. Coordination Drawings: For access panel and door locations.

E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and operators.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 / Page 2 of 12

1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

1. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Grinnell Corp.; Grinnell Supply Sales Co.

c. Victaulic Co. of America.

5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

7. Mechanical Sleeve Seals

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 3.2-mm (1/8-inch) maximum thickness,

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.

H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.

I. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, elastomeric gasket.

K. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.

1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS